FINISHED PLAN NE0437044-(22N1584785) TENK I =FAKAHASHE ENGINE ROOM ELEVATOR (INCLUDING INSTRUCTION BOOK) This technical document is the property of INantong COSCO KHI Ship Engineering Co. ; Ltd. (NACKS) land may not be copied, nor disclosed to any third Jparty without NAOKS’ s prior written consent. co ° _ eo SCALE ---— JOB NO. —— a| 7 mare HULL DESIGNING DEPARTMENT L & one Ae belong te “TECHNICAL DIVISION | overs Geer 5 i/sees NANTONG COSCO KHI ae on SHIP ENGINEERING CO. , LTD. zlg pate Vy NANTONG CHINA SHEETS INCL. COVERPLAN RECORD 1, MAR, 26, 2005, DRAWN FOR NEO43/044 NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO., LTD NE 043/044 ELEVATOR TYPE:UE5—500—9CA Remarks . APPROVED BY | oxo wt Ze cahecanetl | ie Ba Ts vmncen By. 2 Meeegorror. K050042-180 NK DRAWN BY A, PocagrendS saa, FONE Hata SE HARE aaa = 3 USHIO HEAD OFFICE TEL + +81-898-53-2400 "AX: +81-898-53-6363 DESIGN SECTION TEL ; +81-898-53-2401 FAX 1: +81-898-53-2402 883-1 WAKI ONISHI-CHO IMABARI-CITY EHIME PREF. , JAPAN USHIO REINETSU CO.,LTD.DRAWING LIST DRAWING NO, PRINCIPAL ITEM PAGE_[ REMARKS, JARRANGEMENT OF SHIP'S ELEVATOR 2 7 |ARRANGEMENT OF ELEVATOR TRUNK 1 JARRANGEMENT OF ELEVATOR TRUNK 2 JARRANGEMENT OF ELEVATOR TRUNK 3 JENTRANCE DOOR (A-60)--2ND SRDATH-DEGK [ENTRANCE DOOR (A-0)--UPP-0I JENTRANCE DOOR (A-0)-AB, JENTRANCE DOOR _JOAGE PANEL CAGE FRAME |CAGE ENTRANCE [T TYPE RAIL (Bkg/m TYPE) ICABLE TENSION WEIGHT COUNTER WEIGHT [SPRING BUFFER (CAGE) ISPRING BUFFER (COUNTER WEIGHT) [TOP SHEAVE (440 TYPE) [TOP SHEAVE (480 TYPE) [GUIDE SHEAVE TRACTION MACHINE IBRAKE ASSEMBLY Door MOTOR DOOR MACHINE CONTROLLER GOVERNOR MACHINE [SAFETY DEVICE ~ JOVER LOAD DEVICE (LIMIT SWITCH) ROLLING AND PITCHING SWITCH [PUSH BUTTON (2ND~4TH-DK) PUSH BUTTON (UPP~E-DK) ICAGE OPERATING BOARD lINTERPHONE (CAGE) IINTERPHONE (CONTROL PANEL) JAUTO TELEPHONE (CAGE) JAUTO TELEPHONE (MACHINE ROOM) IGENERAL ALARM BELL (GAGE FRAME) | —JEMERGENCY CALL BUZZER (WHEEL HOUSE & ENGINE CONT. ROOM)| 4 IGHT (IN TRUNK) [EMERGENCY LAMP (N TRUNK) [CONTOROL PANEL a ] i POOL Box (B-12.5) a 46 EL- 16-3 |HALF WAY JUNCTION BOX (WJB-) - a | EL- 18-4 JON CAGE BOX We-4) 48 EL- 185 JON CAGE MANUAL PUSH SWITCH BOX 49 EL= 18-6 [PIT 80x ARRANGE —_ 50 EL= 18-7 [TOP BOX ARRANGE - - 51 JARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRIGAL PARTS B2~64 i IBOX ARRANGEMENT | s5~60 [eL- 2i- 1~18 [sequence e1~78 [eL- 22-1~3 JoiAGRAM > 79~81 EL~_25-1~2_|NAME PLATE —_ 82,03 ISPARE PARTS LIST Ld roo. ust a7 lweichT FOR ELEVATOR PARTS | lnsPECTION CERTIFICATE ase - FToRcH Z - [20 laaTTERY GHARGER — Pest | BATTERY 2 [TRANSFORMER 93PRINCIPAL ITEM [TYPE |UES-500-9CA (SINGLE WRAP TRACTION GEARED TYPE) MAXIMUM CAPACITY l6 PERSONS OR 500kg (MAX) RATED SPEED [45mm/min POWER SOURCE [AC440V, 6OHz, 3 MOTOR [5.5KW, 4P, 1800RPM [STROKE [36.550mm HEIGHT OF HOISTWAY. [42,450mm [STATION lp STATIONS ICAGE lw1000 x D1200 x H2000 ENTRANCE lw700 x H1900 [CONTROL SYSTEM SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE CONTROL IPUSH BUTTON OPERATION SYSTEM CAGE 8kg/m [GUIDE RAIL JT TYPE [COUNTER WEIGHT 8ke/m_ WIRE ROPE 2 x4 LINE _1:1ROPING BUFFER BUFFER SPRING HALL DOOR [SLIDING DOOR (AUTOMATIC) CAGE DOOR [SLIDING DOOR (AUTOMATIC) INDICATOR IELECTRIC FLASH LIGHT INDICATOR ISAFETY DEVICE INSTANTANEOUS SAFETY MASTER CALL lD-Dk, 2°-Dk [HOME LANDING |E-DK, D-DK, A-DK, OFF (SELECT TYPE) INON STOP SW j2°-Dk, 3°-DK, 4"-DK INAME PLATE [ENGLISH [CAUTION PLATE [ENGLISH [CLASSIFICATION INK Without certification) FLAG PANAMA ROLLING 15° CONDITION = |PITCHING 10° EMERGENCY BUZZER. IW/H, E.C.R. (Maker supply) GENERAL ALARM BELL [CAGE (Maker supply) [AUTO TELEPHONE [CAGE, M/R (Yard supply) [TELEPHONE CAGE, M/R (Maker supply) |ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 2ND DECK ELECTRICAL 17.5BG7/2 MECHANICAL 7.5BG7/2 [Traction machine :N6- [Manufacture [Motor : N7_ standard COLOR [INSIDE OF CAGE [2.5Y8/2 (IVORY) [CAGE DOOR & CEILING [2.5Y8/2 (IVORY) [CAGE FLOOR IVINYL (GREEN) \JAMB OF ENTRANCE l25Y8/2 (IVORY) DOOR OF ENTRANCE, [2.5Y8/2 (IVORY)[SPECIFICATION FOR SHIP'S ELEVATOR) LSpecification 1-1.Driving system Single wrap traction geared type 1 Operation system AC 2 step speed Selective collective control Push button operation system 1-3.Loading capacity 500k 1-4.Passenger capacity 6 persons 1-5.Speed, 45m/min 1-6.Electric motor AC440V 60Hz 5.5kw 4P 1500rpm 1-7.Stops 9 stops 1-8.Stroke 36.550m 1-9.Height of hoistway 42.450m 1-10.Internal dimensions of cage W1000 x D1200 x H2000 2.Rules and regulation JIS, Maker standard 3.Operable conditions Ambient temperature: 45°C Rolling and Pitching: Inclination 10° in bow and stern, 15° in port and starboard 4.Construction and installation 4-1.Cage + Floor surface : The frame is made of shape steels with reinforcing material fully so that it can withstand the rated load. Steel plate of 3.2 mm thickness and vinyl sheet is provided for floor. + Surrounding side wall ‘The side walls are provided with steel plate of 1.6mm and it has such a construction that there is no possibility of touching the wall of the elevator trunk, counter balance and other switches from the inside of the eage. + Cage door : Sliding door is made of steel. + Installation ; ‘The operating board and hand rail are provided in the cage. The fluorescent lamp and emergency lamp are provided in the ceiling. The maintenance space is, for inspection and maintenance purpose, of plug socket type with interlock disengaging equipment for both signal input and output.4-2.Entrance for each floor Dimensions. Effective entrance opening Clear width 700mm, Clear height | 1900mm 4-3.Counter weight This consists of the frame of shape steels and cast iron pieces that are bundled with bolts. 4-4.Guide rail T type rail for elevator is adopted as guide rail for both cage and counter weight. ‘The specific weight of rail is 8 kg/m. 4-5.Wire rope ‘The mild steel rope for elevator JIS 3625) is used and safety ratio is designed to have more than 10. The diameter is 12® and 4pe. Roping 1:1. 4-6.The winding machine It is of the single wrap traction geared type. An electric motor brakes and worm reduction gear is assembled robustly on the stand made of steel. It has such a construction as possible to carry out the intermittent operation in high frequency. ‘The brake is DC electromagnet type. Simultaneously with shutting off the current, the braking wheel is held with the force of spring resulting in stopping of operation. At the same time, it has such a construction that it has a full braking holding force while stopping. 4-7 Elevator cable This cables has been manufactured especially for elevators. It has reforming wires galvanized wire rope 862pes). And is so devised that can be operated emoothly in the cage way with cable tension weight. 4-8.Control panel ‘The control panel is of the drip-proof construction floor type and it has such a construction those built-in parts can withstand the rolling of the hull. 4-9.Operating equipment a) The following devices are provided on the operating panel in the cage. () Same number of operation buttons as the number of stop floors. (2) Emergency stop button. (3) Alarm button for emergency. (4) Rolling and pitching indicator, (5) Position indicator. (6) Overload alarm and buzzer. (1) Door open and close button. (8) Pilot lamp for position of cage. (®) Home landing switch. (10) Master call indicator'b) The following push buttons and switches are provided on the operating panel for inspection and maintenance on the cage. (1) Manual operation changeover switch for inspection and maintenance. (2) Ascent and descent push buttons. (8) Stop switch. (4) Receptacle (5) Changeover switch for door safety. ©) Devices to be provided at entrance side at each floor. (1) Push button for calling of eage. (2) Pilot lamp for operating direction of cage. (8) Cage arrival indieator lamp. (4) Pilot lamp for position of cage. (5) Door open indicator lamp. (6) Master call push button. (With D, 2ND-Deck) 5 Safety equipment 5-1 Interlock switch It is provided at the entrance door of each floor. The structure that a entrance door does not open unless a cage stops. 5-2.The gate switch is provided at the cage door. 5-3.The emergency stop switch is provided in the operating panel both inside and upper outside the cage. 5-4, If the cage exceeds the specific speed (63m/min) for some reason, governor switch will operate. 5-5.Emergency stop device (Rapid action emergency stop). It is interlocked with the reduction gear and caught by rail for stopping the cage. 5-6.Brake It is of the DC electromagnetic type. Simultaneously with be cut off the current, the brake wheel will be held with the foree of spring. 5-T.Limit switch ‘The limit switch, final limit switch are provided at the top and bottom of the elevator trunk 5-8.Buffer equipment ‘The spring type buffer equipment is provided at the bottom part of the elevator trunk both for cage and counter weight. 5-9.1t has such a construction that a turning handle for manual operation is provided on the shaft of the electric motor. 5-10.As communicating equipment at the time of emergency, the emergency alarm bell button and telephone are provided in the cage.5-11.Overload protection device ‘This machine is so designed and manufactured that when exceeding the rated load, the cage door will be kept open, and audible alarm will ring automatically. 5-12.Emergeney exit switch In case that the cage stops incidentally anywhere than landing floor and the emergency exit is opened by a passenger , control circuit is cut off automatically. 6.Home landing system If the elevator is not operated while ten (10) minutes, the cage is operated to E/D/A. deck and off automatically. ‘7.Lubrication equipment ‘The lubricating equipment for guide rail is provided at the upper part of the cage and counter weight. 8.Operating equipment against pirates ‘The operation buttons for engine room in the cage are provided with snap switch. ‘The snap switch is provided in a pocket box of the cage operation board. 9.Guarantee Repair or replace shall be carried out, in case of the defects found, in design, material and construction of machinery or equipment within 12 months of ship's delivery. Jsueet no 6 Seer mcr un_sume ‘Staccrevaeh aM bie — - ee) a ee __ 8Y YARD] } 300 es Pat Be a. / \ al] L| Ee ‘ | -g{renson | 118 | i | ; J Al 7 ‘ = a a “4 z | con, i g PANEL ono I I Fe Te | Jo! a ry on a | 4 i r 7 \ ee ss 70° Lone NS 40 eee oa ae MET smummmoos — N EABCDEDS 7 = aa ral a “HOISTWAY AND MACHINE ROOM PLAN. fone a. ands a ate - ef ‘ a ; R1 | 4200kg L.z00x50 — | rf an R2 | 3450kg ™ E cone a mea / | eer R3 | 5100kg uot wane 1 | |e) ze0ong a ce “| Jas | 2300kg cma / | sae ay koaree vec oe ae eee era ma, \ 4 oe — t A L EI | 2 el ri a 3 ws ce oe ne rue 2 reas HOISTWAY TOP PLAN ve SUSU AEN Ala aE NE re eae uesaen es a NANTONG COSCO Kil SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTO NE043/044 a oar sane ea SORE pane OW OTE 'ARRANGEMENT OF SHIP'S ELEVATOR 1 1730 06.08.04 mane OY a 8 EL-1-1 no BR But 22 #SHEET No. 1 030 ‘070 [ee ee H Bel te al i Bg oe a i Bgl oe aay ig} oe Ta i 3 L 3| : 3 | 3 bat g {=a a : = ee i aI = x : x : = 3 4 = / aa | | x 2 i 2) =a i 2 =|o 24 : amet =| | — r Sgala ————_—_———— Sq i ag) OU i al 5) SS] a zq_ : 5 al ! 3/5 fa | al ! — |% = | eles | a aE =e a aa 7. | A Ta : i = | = = 1 : + fn nae = TSYEY AVMISOH 30 TAT wear] 8 a sone 18 WEL a1 wr 52 fie 3 q a 3 a g se WEEP [HEIL a] rere pos 7 pare 3 porn 2 5 | a 8 a if & ai a | r rege WF | Fw re — hr ae ween = Tae NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTD NEO43/044 ARRANGEMENT OF SHIP'S ELEVATOR 2 i 06.06.02, a Ce ee #sto 0 0 HOISTWAY TOP PLAN 6 DECK OPEING PLAN | : | ‘ | “nie Pt frers || = HOISTWAY AND MACHINE ROOM PLAN Foe 1 2.400 4 el | [ee 3 |. AY-A" VIEW NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD “" NEOL3/044 3m OnnEER (ALL BY YARD) BA Bt BA Nae Re SOE [ane OR N DATE ARRANGEMENT OF ELEVATOR TRUNK 1 1730 06.08.04, Wem wannaeR wa owe ay ea RN By Jue owe, no, EL-2-1 lee Nesuet 9 2100 2100 a 2100 1070 1030 a 1070 1030 1070 4030 * ' 380 ' : oo : al : ! el H eo ' ' or | iB : ' | if iii} = s | : || | Ta elt 1 H 100 : elt 1 iLL 100 gi | | | 5 | | i ies ! | a ; ' ‘| ‘ | i Deck floor} | 1 i | Deck floor | | Deck floor} | ‘| t | 570 1000 530. 570 1000 530 570. 1000 | 530 2100 2100 | 2100 FLAT ~ a A.B,C.D.E-DK CAMBER 18.7/1000 4TH,3RD,2ND-D UPP-DK NANTONG'COSCO KH SHIP ENGINEERING Co,LTO | NEO43/044 an ft ARRANGEMENT OF ELEVATOR TRUNK 2 tro | osocor® ERNE SEE BB BRT Yaw BHD. EL-2-2 (ALL BY YARD) USHIO REINETSU 6O.. LTO. UN RRA 2 & lee Na,sieeT No. /0. ESCAPE HATCH 7 I} is 5 CS ot } 1 1 aa | HET BT WORT THAT BUTT BRUT” BRT HAT AT BOGT "HRT BOOT "GH GUOT "BOOT BROT" OGBT-” HET "BOUT BOOT "BOUT" BROT BURT GODT” aOR” WORT "OORT BERT BUT HOT ORT BOTT AT BOT HBT OETA HOLE LOVER wa} a t ae ae { oF t wa t ai + oa t a vo we aa aT wee} ar 75 wT wa aa eee are) tt we we we WHE wer oo v TFT) ARIS 10 SAT gy * wer we wi aE} a} on —} ae wT = wa war 4 y 3 x 3 q 5 3 x 5 a “ “| “| 1 ES a 5 §| wT wT wae wae [reser [owe co wt | , | | t | mae wESaER Te ewe NS NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD NEO43/044 eS o |i le we oAneER ie ® wwe eR SoACe [ane OW BATE 2 ARRANGEMENT OF ELEVATOR TRUNK 3 1/120 06.08.04 < ea wnnaee Rao S ee OR ay ee BENS, (ALL BY YARD) EL-2-3 aR RAS “sueetno, _// Tey Hone 10_| neaDer set 9 | erates $5400 ‘set ‘Sse 8 | su ptate _[ sus 308 ‘ser 15 7 _[ ow AL FRAME "se 3 6-2 | Ser ANGE SPCC ‘set ‘soas0x23t | 6-1 | ser ANGLE spec ‘set ensoat_| 3__| ue stoe ‘area opt [2 [os ‘se 2 1 DOOR SPCC 2seTS HS, | MARK | DESCRIPTION MATERIAL QUAN. [REMARKS _| SPCC IS G21 Coé-reduced carbon seal sheet Class A-60 Door £2, 5Y8/2 Door frame 12, 5Y8/2 Regulation SNK Nationality of a ship :PANAMA Position :2ND, 3RD, 4TH-DECK SECTION A-A A3 EH 1900 INS.40 Steel wall 335 34 EH 1900 ail BASE 26 | 34, NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD **" NEOG3/04% je 8 Nae ew ScALE ane DR W DATE ENTRANCE DOOR (A-60) V5 06.06.02, 410 iw x waNacee ea or Day om RN BY [a © BWE. KO. EL-3-1 Aw R RSSHEET.NO. = T [10 {SET [aera $400 se eo 8 sucrcate SUS 308 SET Hs 7 | OwAlL FRAME | ser 123 6-2 | Ser anste SPCC 1881 Ss 0x23¢ 6-1 | Ser anate spc ise L542 3¢ 5 _| COVER Anat ‘SET Lsoaranist SCREW (O) SSIGALV) ‘aPIECES | MaxtOL cue soe | PIECES. LABYRINTH SHAL 18ET 2 1 [p00 Ce 2861S 118 MARK | DESCRIPTION MATERIAL, QUAN, REMARKS ‘SPCC JS G34 Cold-reduced carbon ste Class AO Door 22, BY8/2 Door frame . 5Y8/2 Regulation NK Nationality of a ship :PANAMA Position UPP-DECK 26 7 T ov | I Hi I! ul I Hy I i i it 7 h & 7 it ] il fl i I i ui ML H } + is g y 84, 625 EW700 625 84 A-3 SECTION A-A Steel wall 269 EH 1900 rt 5 3) 0 a 200 s| 30 tht 239 *“ B-VIEW mE wees e eee NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO..LTD i. NEOU3/044 ie & ae em SCALE [RAG OR WATE ENTRANCE DOOR (A-0} v15 05.09.05 v10 eer we OES wee DEN BY Ja # BWELROT I EL-3-2 ao MR HASHSHEET NO, te) 34 EH 1900. 380 Steel wall, 300 oe 330 3h 269 B-VIEW it] Key Howe 10 | weaDee ‘st 9 ware an ss4oo 3SET [8 _| sur pate sus 306 1881 [7 | oN ALL FRAME I = ‘seT 6-2 | ser ANGLE spec 1861 6-1 | Set ancue [ sece ‘ser 5 _[ cover ance | ‘ser | «| screw ch SSIGALVI ‘BPICES 3__| une stot _ ‘PIECES 2_[ uneven SHA ise 1 | poor sPeC 2sETS MARK | DESCRIPTION MATERIAL ‘QUAN SPCC- J 63141 Cole-redced carbon stel sheet Class 2A-0 Door 22, BY8/2 Door frame 2. 5Y8/2 Regulation INK Nationality of a ship :PANAMA Position 2A,B, C, D, E-DECK te Bh 625 g 2 A3 eae weaaER = aS, NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO., NEOU3/064 fe a ee BSR Pm RW DATE ENTRANCE DOOR (A-O} uD 06.06.02 4/10 [ae wanneer ear ee Ewa Yaw WENO = os EL-3-3 eer, BPM KR RS HSHEET N¢ if A-3 620 C-VIEW ze One 7 [werent Toxiuxszat | 2867 | 0008 RAB Se S| pammnsee “yr arate | SET [wmansensy | ree-eeaewn-ris [wer | ~3_[ secunry took ne 1s 2_| come stoe GPIECES [71 Tooae ee ers [Hs MARK [ DESCRIPTION HATERIAL OR TYPE QUAN. | REMARKS PP NANTONG COSCO KHISHIP ENGNEERNGCO,LTD |" NEOK3/044 ee eee ER SALE [nw RW BATE ENTRANCE DOOR v1 cic Be nae Ca EL-3-4, ee Ew. Bryer ee AF1s sueeT NO, = + [ewe ron en Pa Tas a al a re 7 [waa aan a step | SUS 306 425 15 | Protodecirk sich | paaei > @B 3 34 1000 24 «ese EA ve [uma ev Tene | 5 [rua vi 0 ‘3 [a Toe a / — + [vas pmet [wernt ve [ema Twa > ee 2 eel | | | screws 2 seen ut ie HUES COP | FEL =O ie \ e ] | | 1 a > [Fn aon | =) al : ® 8 wa WATERIAL Rennes [ark | DESCRIPTION MATERIAL REMARKS a 3) | _ | 3 | i DETAIL "E” S| 2 exer inspection ® oe [S| a, 2 Q 7 ” Le ESCAPE 3 r cS a ci i i. | i | g i. | B al HW aa a8 \ a 4 es 8 a g aa A gq 8 zo oO 5 a | 4 | el P-© t — | | Ew}700 8 co 1200 | _ co t200 | en & 1 1 Nive PLATE e cw 1000 cw 1000 SEC C-C SEC D-D SEC_AWA SEC_B-B —_—— a THON COS 0 SP EAGER CATE NE043/044 CAGE PANEL 1/25 05.09.09 EL-5-1 _| Bee RRR eHser 16 FL 2650 1900 cH 2000 c100%x50%5 150% 50%.6 4 2 1 |o7sxaoxs 1 v 2 1 150% 50%6 PL 22 (010% 5055 Quant. | Remarke | NANTONG cOSCa Kt SHEP ENGINEERING COD “NE043/044 05.09.09 Yun aesSHEET Wo, hate CH 2000 EH 1900 Ew 700 PFW 1068 -Jeate swiren [ss400 [4 ii [bee swiven i 4 [ooo waa =m ~~ [to [sareny ence [aL 1 3 [QUIDE SHOE Foso0 | 4 _ [8 [poor [2] 2_|tweaicaron | wnow | 2 “[ 8 jooor wae —[ssaoo | 4 1 | CAGE FRAME soo | 1 | 7._|sPRocKET |ssaoo "|" 2 = ark | Desorption —[astertai [Ouent.| RRS [Wark | Desorption —[uatertai | Guant | —REWaRS axeweseen @ NANTONG COSCO KHT SIP ENGINEERING cO.L7D ]eRE ow WN DATE 05.03.24 @ caREER aw a CAGE ENTRANCE je Rwawncer Jew ow By I " EL-5-3 Bere eeeadn froer 18 (mm ) —E RAIL TYPE] A B c D E Lo] fao4 ‘kg/m [375] 75 | 4 1 4] 48 Sle Wed pont [mn 2900Kg/et — Teale arena AOD /o eo : Cengsioe [mine 10 Lo i BRACKET cur | cl T q i a L Zak eo " : ice | Cae ti || thr=+ i) | 2 8kg/m_VIEW A” oho ta LIAL — D 7 JOINT PLATE 45 Te | BOLT M12 |® | @ pace we | - JOINT PLATE @ ele | Lo t_[_QuanT. ++ CAGE S000} 16 2 2300 2 COUNTER WeiGHTo229}__16. @ OF 1250) 2 JOINT PLATE 32. BOLT 256 SETS OIL(FOR RAIL) No.68 | 2L.(IN LUBRICATOR’ P** NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGNEERING CO, LTD “ NEO43 /044 wan fe wane a aoALE RRR TRH OTE T TYPE RAIL (kg/m TYPE) 1/4 05.09.05 ae RaanRaER a oY Ye EL-6 Bare e zee Po”suertwo 9 Steel wall [4 7 Bolt - [36sets | _M8,L=25 _ 3_| Connecting plate [| SS400/ 18 | FBSBx6tL=300 2 | Rall ___ | $8400] ~20_|140x40x5t,L=2500,L 1_| Bracket $3400| 24 | L40x40x5t Marl Description Material | Quant! __Remarks axa MEBEER 8 ews No, NANTONG COSCO KH SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD NE043/064 ae ORE ew Nae lee woe ae OW OE CABLE TENSION WEIGHT 1/10 05.09.09 ea NRE —— a YT Jw eS EL-7 Brrnnxne at ysHIO RELNETSU Lrp.swt __20 “A SEI CTION Re7se 75. I L=35 © _|_ rash block ssao0_[ 2 | PLét + Chlaexizexst 5 _| Lubricator nyton [2 4 | Guide shoe Foaoo_|_ 4 3 | Stoner ssa00_| 2 | L65xL65x6t + 13ke/a Rale rip 2 | Weight ss400__| eet 1 | Frame 8s400__| eet | cizexesxeexat Wark Description Matorial_| Quant. Remarks ERE MESSER" @ 88, Wo. NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTD NE043/044 ew caneeR COUNTER WEIGHT aR SCALE [RRB OR DATE 1/16 05.09.09 le warner EL-8 Yue Rae etsweet no. 2) d 150 5] I A VIEW 150 6_ [SUPPORT 3 ss400__| 1 [ 9+ a=270xe70 5_ | SuPPORT 2 ‘SGP 1__[ 90a 4 [SUPPORT 1 STKR 1 [ 450x150xS¢ 3 [BOLT ss400__|@SETS| mia 2 | SPRING DLAMP ‘$8400 2_| LSOx6t + FRESX6t 1_| SPRING sup-9 [1 | o24 Materiat|Quent) NB. ews. Fo. NANTCING COSCO KH! SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD NE043/044 ow CAREER ie ® Nan ER SCALE [WRB DRN DATE SPRING BUFFER 1/5 05.07.12 la ® wannceR ww GHD By Jew OR TN BY [aw DWa.NO, EL-9-1 Yar ek Re a USHIO REINETSU CO,, LTD.‘SHEET NOL ers 300 75 9¢ 350X150 ‘908 C150x75 mie Ls0%6t + FBABXEE T -]ro|co]s en] 424 Renarks nor NANTONG COSCO KHE SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTD NE043/044 fem cAReaR SPRING BUFFER (COUNTER WEIGHT) eR Beate [ane OR W DATE VS 05.07.12 es EL-9-2 Bur ax xSHEET wo. 23 330 - 3 oO BB oO L L L P-C-D 440 8 Taper washer $8400 4 7 | BOLT ~ 88400 6 | sor 8400 [5 BASE $8400 | e200 90% 8t x 13, 5 4 | Key |__ssao0 “FBGBx6t. 3 | coLLaR S400 2 2 | SHAFT _ $8400 1 | 670 iia [-1_| save Jrea00 (is @ s601)| 1 | #6214 (Bearing (Oi! less type)] Wark | Description Material | Quant. Ronarks ae RE MEGGER "5 ws. Wo. — NANTONG COSCO KHE SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTD NE043/044 = Wane iW Bone [aa ORTH OATE TOP SHEAVE ¢440TYPE) 1/6 03.24 Mem enerer eee24 SHEET Wo. a 90 125 8 |_96 | 200 “K'~"R" Section a 7 | Bor 8400 deots |_MI0,C=16 6 | BOLT 'ss400 4sets | H20,L=100 with split pin hole [5 | pase $8400 2 | c2ooxaoxarxia.5t aa «| Key ~ sso 2 | Fesexet a) coat ss400 a ~ | 2 | SHAFT 8400 1 om _ 1 | sweave [Feao0 (ais @ 6500] 1 | 46214 TBearine (i! loss typed] Wark |Description Mat Quant Ronarks | axe westen “= ra NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTD NE043/044 = WaMe WR wannaen ee |e Bit ee tet je SOALE [WAR OR'H DATE | 1/6‘SHEET NOL 25 _P-C+p480 463 SVi-6 | BOLT SPRING WASHER | MOL=I6 a] SVi-S) BASE "| ss400 2 Svica KEY $9400.68 4 via | COLLAR $400,1078,0:063,.=65 4 SVi-e | SHAFT #7058400 2 | svi-i | SHEAVE 6480,FCD400+#6214CBEARING) 2 Na NAME TYPE & MATERIAL ort| WEIGHT ‘ae wresER Ss NANTCNG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD BNO, - NE043/044 ® NCAREER a ace Ta DH BATE GUIDE SHEAVE 1/10 | 05.03.24 ja a ow BY we orn By [a # Dwe. No, = EL~10-3 V2 oe a ee ‘Usi'lo REINETSU Co... LTD,ser 26 CABLE GLAND MOTOR : A20b BRAKE : PM~20 3 4 Terminal ox For brake: 2475 By Maker (1Y WACHINE TYPE KTW-30F8 | WEIGHT 260ke GEAR RATIO 511 WHEEL 20rom WOTOR TYPE : FELF-S WEIGHT ‘ke our Pur 5.5K SOURCE | 36-4400, core | [IP code or INSULATION GLASS F GEAR OL No. 460 UNITY 6.0L [6 [oor = ~[4sets_[weaxtr20 5 _|eRaKe 1 [eneren To eL=11-2 4 [woToR 1 3 [WARWOEAR CASE 1 - 2_[WAIN SHEAVE 1 | br2xanores _ 1 [eo FRAME 1 [1250%00% 108% 16 Mark Quant REWARKS ‘Bak neeoER a Bs No NANTENG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD NE043/044 ew oaReER Ew ane RR SOALE RRB ORTH TRACTION MACHINE 11s 05.03.24 wR wANKaER WETS By WORN ay Taw OwaL na. | EL=1-1 7 a wet But RR RS ttsucetno. 27 q 80 [ | ba £4 40 20 1S [TERWINAL Bal a_i _ (] I 17 [CYLINDER ceemoT-i7eH [2 1 ® | ® ~16 [CLERC ALT BLT S$400 2 (NiexéS 15_ [BRAKE LEVER PIN $S400 2 |6l6xi03 i 14_[HEXAGON BOLT S$400 [waxes | 13 HOM SONET SE CV SWCHIeK [2 |waxt0 0] i 12_[STUD BOLT SS400 2 [Mie get. 11 [SPRING WASHER $5400 2 elo ; 10_[BRAKE SPRING | ~___SWPA 2 | a6x6ATXGOL = 9_[GAUGE Al ef i [BRAKE LINING NOWASBEST | [ani4xot 7 _TBRAKE SHOE F-25018 i [PUSH RUD SuS304 Te [i665 it ® @ 5_]MOVING CORE SISC 2 L : [SUPPORT al 1 rm 3__[ BRAKE COT 2 |C=P00V ai 2 [BRAKE LEVER Fop-sor__[e «| _BRAKE LINING 1_|CORE COVER FC-200, 2 =| —————— [magi DESCRIPTION. NATERIAL ltl] Renarks 190 170 f oI a 2x4-M6x14L CROSS RECESSED HEAD SOREWS (C2700 i Cosco KHIL_SHIP_ENGINEERING CO.,LTD es" "e043 /o4a BRAKE ASSEMBLY 1/51/25 05.07.12 - EL-11-2 Bx ew ee ew pe me09 REDUCTION GEAR_ SPECIFICATIONS ALL SEALED BED TYPE RAED OUT PUT i50W VOL. 100V RAED TORQUE 860 17m RATING 15MIN. SHUNT WOUND ROTATION SYS. REVERSIBLE MAX. TEMPERATURE | UNDER 50° WHEN RATED LOADING] INSULATION CLASS} —E DEGREE INSULATION RESISTANCE] OVER 10MQ/500r VOLTAGE DURATION] AC1500V 50/60H2/MIN. eo Jonence é SURFACE TREATMENT] BLACK ENAMEL REDUCER SPECIFICATIONS eer BLUE BILE. cnr fe TERMINAL BOARD. ITEM SPECIFICATION TYPE, HERICAL 2 SPEED TECELERATON COMPARSON| 13.25: 7 $ MOTOR oH REVOLUTIONS _ ~65r7m 2 TTERMINA TORQUE, 750 _kg—cm, 2 INAL LUBRICATING OIL[NISSEKI GREASE _NIKUPEKO_GRij MARKT. NAME WEIGHT 7.5kg NANTONG Casco KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTD Pe" NeE043/044 ow onneeR ew wane RR SCALE [RAH OR'N OATE DOOR MOTOR Vs 05.03.24 lw RwaWAaeR ee ore ay | woRTH BY Bat ee ReeSHEET wo, 29 suvvuuuuT uuyuuuuuy noananang ‘Haz wesaen “a Bs, ews, wo. NANTONG COSCO KHL SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTD NE043/044 Wm GAneER ew NAM le SoALe [esa ORW DATE DUR MACHINE CONTROLLER Vs 05,07,12 EL-12-2 a eeswerw. FO 423 20 ae cD 2a0 ios ve ase =, ie 7 S| SHHTIER || I CAGE SIDE OVER SPEED SW. 63.0m/min MECHANICAL TRIP 68.0n/nin 40kg Type 0 — so NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD NEO43/044 GOVERNOR MACHINE 1/5 05.03.24 | EL-13-1 aoe ar ee L WeHie peiueTen oo treSHEETNO. 3) 5) a f ° =| : s 4) z = FLOOR ° ———" | TENSION SHEAVE T2_[ WHE ROPE CLAMP. 2 [oS 2805 11 Me 2 [as 8 2801 7O_| RAL, Bkg/m Ral [79] SPRING TE [LEVER $3400 [1 7] son ROD 1 = [LEVER 357007 [SHAFT S200 [2 4 [ROO 35400 [2 3 [sour $5400 | 8] L=35 SEC 2_[ROLLER 3450 [2 1_[catcw BOX frooa05 [2 _[RARK| DESCRIPTION — bua TERLALOUAN|— REWARKS: HW GREER ie wasaER TS NO, NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP-ENGINEERING CU.LTD NE043/044 ee eae RR BGRLE ane OR OATH SAFETY DEVICE 1/20 | 05.09.06 [se waNnaTR ere aye EW ay Jaw B¥e.no, EL- wa Tie Bree ee SH USHIO REINETSU CO.,LTD,SHEET No, 32 Gland Sc WR WannaER Fi [init s Mark] Description Material [Quant. REVARKS, BREWESSER "5 P 6s WO - NANTON( 1 KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO. NE043/044 [ew wane rT DVER LOAD DOOmMPip 20000 640 640 298 298 UPP/A/B/C-DK WEIGHT 8KQ PUSH BUTTON PUSH BUTTON BRACKET PACKING ‘CASING POSITION INDICATOR FACE PLATE Desoription \BOX 80, A 1.40, | B | oe | J 7 | 3 x a Bo QI 4 BOX 90 tio ag > (33 a t STEEL p20] WALL Fry SEC, Hy io) SGP 404 | | L=200 EL de STEEL de Naat * NANTONG COSCO KAI SHIP ENGINEERING co.Lta |" "* “* NEO43/044 waa REALE — [ana BRN BATE PUSH BUTTON (UPP~E-DK> Vs 06.06.02 [ww wancee eects ay ew orn oy Peesaeeata: | | ee BRR ee UsHio REINETSU co LTD36 sHe=1 wo. 2 | eR CALL Sw “~| 500kg OR BPERSONS 6 | buzzer Sr 2 Far anly parallel tzlephone use, faneact the mutual 3: Nov to.make the noige,-as not Vocate the telephone wire with other cables absolutely. 4: Missueing' causes sone darape to the set 4H MaxcAC2SOV 4A oe DESO 3A'se resistor COECTION DIAGRAM =m Letpvo-1.25, a other telephone — 8 UNIT SYMBOL nm BPR © USN waver Naood ne} SP | a eT Or a 0 2 7 aieek Boo ¥ iF [TEeMINAL BOARDT 7 Br } 2 Faget am TA b-—! fF i 8 Lice 1] 130 : H 7 7 |reriaa | TESTE — 6 [reser + | POS ero se. [5 FSA MDICATER [CTR SEO. TTT, CAGE (rose aes 1S Sf CTE ESI e cr MAKER SUPPLY 5 Poe oa Me gen ose fbn ; see 2 cavet [215 (ape ome Ki | eee (ies) | pesparsetet 1: kpwoome7s7 v1, v2. vnvemacenex |? CERH GEBRET iA a | -agamunengncadtanses (21 v2, y30e) iat [teat SEP UBS CAE reauosadul CdSe (21 vsozmm {fig tic PARTS Lu TERTAL— pry RU LAB OADIEIE Bh ie 1 a 2eaumeaymaseeas, Huo" Waza, 3: RTF MG, WaoRaLOSoTRUMUNORRNCHMUAUCE, vitce ODC-2780=1 4: MRMTSCRBAIRATICE PBI ET. BUILT-IN TYPE DIRECT SERRARAC oe oVeReeCOC SOVSA ws5:960R0%) yg) 8 FRE CT ONE ere MON BARS imal ore [nema ow nevisrons —Joage or [mo] SE RARE RIERZ) 2 [awa, “2o) BRBRE IRE eccr. “30 4 CHECKED | DESIGNEO| heat dead TAKASHIMA) NT EL-17-1Paar 7998078 wou no ROLES fp < " mn Terminal} i i q | | | | | | f: CONTROL PANEL MAKER SUPPLY wo MER fe 3 CONNECTION BL GRAM a 5 je FITTING PLATE | STEEL coum ES fee are aren : Ta = sacs), [eS 1 seo rae) [5 |Beevar tie | [hair cons = cans /| saoser [4 |e US lean ts NOSE SS RESIN MODULAR JACK (6-6) * sae ABS tee Ea 7 2 Lid ABS RESIN 1 were : ames Resa Trin case of paratie! connection, 7. stanemomets, Buc |; |_HOUSING ABS RESIN’ | eeostse MEeetnat A SIRE ners REPRO RRL ET aa esas vase spore, coun: vary warre | ~[CORBORENT-PuRT-NATERTAE —[an| REWER Bm O.7ko 8 RTO aS Ce [uy ae [a] _one_— [sows vio eae Jwmrane|rine ODC=2381—1 7 [15 0. | SHER urd | eccastesrees| SMALL WALL TYPE C.B.TEL F PRBS USE WG. NO —~ EL-17-2280, capecrion bis Gonanugee getoul elanal Tor Using AG paver tor eutpur sien ingteat ton. 2RRBM (ata) Ever, eeganesMiysm, BSaasneacumca se. Avkeohegeysre: SevL-mReeRteoR, EBTRESL ODE CEEL, eee Sremmsoe EARS? ORS (oTwel owe Bak, YL—ReBAOSRAT OPES rst: SRSTEEKACZ DOV. Pee aerate tt Bacesvess, sro BAb—STUNL ES hER = ie SL 221 ie ease a aan ABs ae. LAN wa 4 foal Sees IN CAGE YARD SUPPLY [spain oo] foie: a DPS {+ Joma, aes Setcpan [ha — DSM Keveae mes 278 “fReREnTD spin Eaten Th wee) SeSTAT T_ ‘1 ODA~1780-1 2 fm 's| SRewetee BUELT-IN TYPE AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE crate | SBTARCEL BSR AREER tarts | RA1116—6092~1 NIPPON HAKUYO electronics, It d. BE EL-17-3For PABK To BELL et zr PORER_SOURCE| x position FZ to 29 tifor necessity prs eon BLAxey. 7a7e 1-2 BS 2-3 a'bell rang and ail will got bask te bein orden (1) SAAS (md EVER. Teme | (22) prea Sm WHASKTSL (R BRatehescensese, EF ag PeobeeRree® 3 Shov-nacenttie, DE=AS0), BShakuaweceen, ea-otd Pemasone i FEE ian ones 1 free Pee, ybSxARDAAIST OPPS ae) ee + {aw | ‘uaweaxncecovanene | 5[% 7 RGD DCSOVSA, - NG TYPE. BeeOy SA acestauery, | 2 fel as AEN ieee te ring {oatdental ARCRSYEEA. FORALL, 7 0 ei TEs oot trots or ratfanction at ooae a Get hires Ubi rolimtion, nseaeromtenwaees | PES ge 1 | [eave cen PARTS Twn Te | Rew aR: IN MACHINE ROOM YARD SUPPLY canisio-Tit pare oF tesue} Tire HE BE [ee mawr o| ODAI310-1N pesas—) WALL TYPE AUTO. TELEPHONE cower | (FOR NOISY PLACE) Ten] SMBERREEE GHEE) Prase | RAII16-6111-1N NHE El MIPPONE HAKUYO electronics, lid FORA PAN EL-17-44! 1 225] CAGE FRAME MAKER SUPPLY 4 | BaLL Sith we. | 1 Take | 8 | ur noe —— |: |ms Bl oser EER 1 7| Lae 1 | 5W 2| com sunenc [7 Rr [6 semen yy [re 1 | Boy Ic FREP SINIHETIC FC #20 ae fies | 1 INo| NAME OF PARTS |. MATERIAL [QuAN| REMARKS [No] NAME OF PARTS | MATERIAL | cum] REMARKS fm WEIGHT | BR APPROVED BY | MM CHECKED BY | @¥K TITLE ert ‘ABOUT. 1.3kg MARINE ELECTRIC BELL RE SCALE| mm PAINT | BAY DESIGNED-BY | aE _DRANN BY = T.TOYODA NTS. 7.5BG67/2| ‘JAN. 1992 | B® MODEL No.NBU ~ L120 wa UNITS SRR Ris estStt eo mm SANSHIN DENGU MPG CO.LTD. EL-17-542 KNOCK-OUT HOLE === ST ass ; WHEEL HOUSE & ENGINE CONT. ROOM MAKER SUPPLY ao rr LS hy Oo KNOCK-OUT Hi i ____HOLE ! I 68 t biz) 20x13%30 COAMING SPECIFIOATION BUZZER TPE _ [rei Wreo-es|rou-soa0s-0e| von t20-08 S [CLAMP SCREW _[STARLESS STEFL| 2 RATED VOLTAGE | oc24v AcLOOV, A220, STERN Benn 1 [HOASP || naveo ounnenr | sonnets] soahnex | a00n ven 4 PILOT LAMP 1_|iwu-toma’ | |WIN, WORKING | Go1e, av} aceov aeLaaa WBE Phae | 0°18. 3 |BUZZER ul ~~ sounotever | soasve | o0407e | s0aare 2|FLUSH PLATE |UREA RESIN 1 LAMP TYPE €-10, 1-10, “UNE, T~ LOR (108), 1 {BOX PHENOL RESIN) 1 | NAME OF PARTS | MATERIAL [aun]REWARKS|v,[ NAME OF PARTS | WATERIAL [wan] REWARKS Cy [RE [eR wr Te ore Tae Te ERO 7 @ BTITA) 1 NON-WATERTIGHT FLUSH TYPE Rak SOLE [AE Finis | RE oesiaven by | We ORAW BF ELECTRIC BUZZER ve | worry | M. TAKEL,,|T.SOTOKAWA| wim HOOF! Wm, MZL—F a wis was OFANING Ne, wey mm EL-17-6 A43 SYMBOL, IN TRUNK set I a uss AGtOOv MAKER SUPPLY 6 [TERMINAL BRASS 2 | 3-s-20a]12 5|Gtose FRAME | per 1 a 4 {GASKET RUBBERS [1 [10] GUARD PC 1 SICLAMP SCREW |SRRENVESS | 2 9| GLOBE GLASS 1 [S904 2|capuz cLann | pc 2 | #20 | a[casxer aise < | 2 1 [Boy PBT 1 7) LAMP HOLDER = 1 |PB26 INo| NAME OF PARTS | wATERIAL Javan) REMARKS [No] _NaME OF panTs | MATERIAL [aum| REMARKS ‘BH APPROVED BY | RE CHECKED BY 1.0 kg BA TLE MARINE WATERTIGHT TYPE PENDANT LIGHT Rm SCALE | ® PAINT | mH OESIGNED BY | OAAWN BY HOMIAER XT | NTS | ‘za | PH MODEL No. L-2 a oc UTS | (Ben AAR Etat BARS ORANG No | mm |_SANSHIN GLECTAIC CORPORATION 4A00756 | EL-17-744 @.- 4-01 : ING HOU Ho ‘ iH lege EMERGENCY LAMP IN TRUNK 6set po2av MAKER SUPPLY 6 | TERMINAL BRASS 2_| 3-8-20a)12 S|GLOBE FRAME PBT 1 i 4|casKeT RoSeeR ES 10| GUARD PC 1 3|ctaMp screw | gERENEESS 7 9| GLOBE, CLASS 1_|ss0-a 2|CABLE GLAND PC 2_| #20 8| GASKET RGbeee~ | 1 1 [BODY PBT i 7|LAMP HOLDER -- 1 [FBISL. No] NAME OF PARTS | MATERIAL |auaN| REMARKS [No] NAME OF PARTS | MATERIAL | GlaN | REMARKS a VEOH] 3B APPROVED By | mB cHecKEDeY [aR TMLE I MARINE _WATERTIONT TYPE ~ PENDANT LIGHT Re scaue [2K vain [Ae DesIeND BY [RET DRAWN BY, : NTs fem MODEL No. L-1 ‘i UNITS = 2353 25s tetSt QBS ORAWING No, _ EG a bigs play ei iano treo 1 EL-17-8suet am, 4b 9) pp De / 1550 so} WEIGHT: 240Ke 1 [aw WETER [20a 9 WANE PLATE 2 |PiLoT LANP 10 [coAWING [300x100 3 ALARM INDICATOR [11 [reRWiWAL BLOCK 4 |WANUAL MODE INDICATOR li2 [sear [L50%50x4 5 [EWAGENCY STOP INDICATOR li3 [cae HOLDER 6 [ESCAPE INDICATOR [14 |BRAKE RESISTOR 7 |ESCAPE RESET S¥ 15 [coutaR 8 [COOLING FAN [16 [TELEPHONE or INTERPHONE EEE Messen = fe es, Wo, NE043/044 HE CAREER RARE RE CRE BE ORWORTE] CONTROL PANEL lee wANACER ewe SY ew ORB ee BWe NS, | EL-18-1 F L,I UsHIO REINETSU CO.,LTD. ARRA-AdOsneer no. 46 08 ____20 0 2 S 7 z 1 4 s al 3 | 8 i g ry 150 | 60 | so | 4s 0 “ REE WESTER TW: NE043/044 FECTREER wn Re SCALE eRT OR ABATE POOL BOK eR MAIETT RECO BYR OR NOY TF OWENS Ee ee USHIo REINETSU co. LTD.sneer vo. 47. 330 us TERMINAL BLOCK eo zl D238 . ‘conc 200,40 Hes : 1 T nw NE043/044 EL-18-3 Bree wk Re Ht 8-3-148 SHEET NO. co o 50 10 0 zl ae fs Y e | & fe Tle z— lal 36 la} 3 oo & E E= ZL OE E le Ele fe PR fk eke & la by E \*g E led . F S4 ae le a4 3g | | . ® he oF He of © E CAREERsnect wo. 49 aw 155 15 ns \ cose 2 5 2 ee BOTTOM VIEW o—0'5,—} DOOR OPEN PUSH SH wo, EMERGENCY STOP SW SELECT SW Up PUSH SW DOWN PUSH SH DOOR CLOSE PUSH SW eee Ww. NEO43/044 Se RCAREET RR SCALE [RAG OWN DATE (ON CAGE MANUAL PUSH SWITCH BOX OR N8Y a DWE HS: EL-18-5 eT aS: Le # ee ie Susans coe ats stonesueer no, $0 28 0 c2o__[ mee) a || 3| 3 ° ° al *| \eo10 s al 1a | ws | [srs 228 [EMERGENCY STOP SW Bs tn no s I = Id wl mid ve nexcocrsre WETTER aes NE043/044 ren rene HR SERCE BRO DW HORT UT 80x ARRANGE ae EL-18-6 i aa ee ees mir-aoe ustiio REINETSY co. LTD.bf o = ea | Val le ify | | 4 a 3) 8} | id | be J sella | e ° —__al 4 5 * 0 0 0 0 | 32.5] 20 32. Lao lara A pes 134 Le NE043/044 ane te 00.24 [ EL-18-7 Yurenn eae aeseer no 52 & 2 covemoe vacine Tae OVER ti 5. STAYS TRO : ‘ooer ‘WOE WOE ‘OO0E DONE | ‘OO0E | Mae wea LOS OOLT 4 4 3 | 7 erp ar FE perp |f |e 34 [8 a 13 jh A , ay : \ E a x z 4 ql ead aE EE] q [ik “aad *% 12g . e it Sl Bg ar g a= ee ops : ora ég ie Lela hal IL al | [PSE] fose| osc] Yosr] fosc] fosc} fasc] jasc [7 EE [SL ag BEL] JOEL] JREE} JOEL} [OST] YOST) [OsC) fosr} Jase) fase} |OSC} osc} OSC} foEC} josL 2 BEL) [OSC] [OSC] [BEC] [OSC] JOSC] [OSC] YosC) jose EL) [SC] [OSC] Ooat sz OE ez OS Se ie ee OSs N62 ie ® % 0 0 we 8 we % a Nee 182 18 i6e 80 0S bat . ati 1 | 0S S . s - g a slz s| AE 38) 5 . 32 slg a 7 = | 7 z . ene COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD LS ee = ARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL PARTS: 1/120,1/10 i 06.06.02 A @ EL-AEP-1_ | ee penne USHIO REINETSU 6O., LTO.steer, 53 MATERIAL QUAN a 750 ad 2 50 300 po! 2... 1 ‘ 200 a oo f wo - 2 SECTION B-B 2 SECTION 8-8 = [soo 200 300 50. SECTION C-C FB 50x 45t ; 7 SS oe Poo. Box Apt HB 4 Tenet e st 0 ® 500 T ae L -Fo0R PUSH BUTTON ] tie 2] E i iE eer cy) aaa’ 20 . a : a an tet ; | S [7 : : S 3 oJ TALFway sincron feels conraoe L Box 8-3 1 ae iS [| = FB 50x 4.5t | cae MATERIAL [QUANT =<) =! a 600_ om 50 8 HOISTWAY AND MACHINE ROOM PLAN fore NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD NEO43/044 ARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL PARTS 1/30,1/10 06.08.04 EL-AEP-2 7 ee ee USHIO REINETSU CO.,LTD.SHEET No. 7 \ Foor ust auton i is | | MATERIAL QUAN] i SECTION D-D ——_____1___} | ae + SECTION E-E = i SECTION E-E SECTION A-A a 2 eae Bet aU fleece: ee i ae cs ik, 88 0 1 | h usa FB 50x 4.5t ES 4 : = MATERIAL QUAN] . . 750 | ae | | escape won a = tT | “toh 5 oO (al 1 fd ' [else . | ae 7 mo cy pam Ts aS alee HOISTWAY PIT PLAN sue MATERIAL [QUAN -HOISTWAY TOP PLAN. fe 1200 L 600 50 aaa ves Fa aa NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.,LTD NEO43/044 CR ao ESR a BE S| ARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL PARTS 1/30,1/10 06.08.04 a Rane ee a a SW l EL-AEP-3 BR Bi ZB #serne. 3S oy fan ® 4 alc lelelels a El (ENS B/2 ®@ ® | @©00®@ 6M S 5 — Sseone a ape f=] ° 00000 fe || oe 3/8 | Utz ua a ates | a 7 sau sel y a2 i BEL pocket ay saa] (EE TEL ae very aEEWESTER TT RENO NE043/044 EE CREE aA OE SERLE SRT OR WATE CONTROL PANEL ARRANGE ae oral ee waNRSET oe SW SY OR BY J BW: EL-20-1 5 aaa: Oe eee crssucer wo. $6 [ . | | oes : : vee : a] os 3 a] | 3 a] | g 3] | { TBdl-2 1842-2 TBuS-2 JB-4 yB-3 PiT-Box CAGE PB-BOx =] ep | ; Fr : GO xt f | | ] | i | 7 | ew | owe a 1m Hae fel 1) vee (| ie | a] Al © | z | {2 | i 30H he |S y L Fae = : | J} q mn eS ee ° ° g g 3 7 EEEWESSER TT EWS. 7 ee ia o NEO43/044 ARRANGE 05.08.24 = eR WANAGER ae mcr By fe OWN BY [a owe. NO. coos oe orssueerwo. 57 GD <>) LAIjL 2/L 3]L 4/L S|L 6/D 1]D 2/u 1)v 1/u tv 1] THI] TH2 E 1{E 2/€L1|EL2]EL3| EL4 | BE1 | BE2|BE3| SD1| DTI | DGt | sb2/ 0T2| p62 TL1|TL2|TL3|TL4}TL5|TL6}TL7} GA1)GA2| FL) F2 e043 /048 cowrnot. PANEL TERMINAL BLOCK LABEL 05.08.24 e-20-8 Ber mee eee uso REINETSY CO.,LTD58 SHEET wo oD Ul} V1 | O01 | D2] LI | L2 | EL1| EL2] BET | BE2 | ES1 | ES2 | SF1| SF4 DS1 | DS2| TL4| TLS | GAT | GAZ or | pg | sp | sen] cno| suo | Tit |T.2] 113 > DT | DG | SD | SGN) GND|SLD| D1 | D2} L1 | L2 GA1|GA2| /24V/24V| OV | OV EL1/EL2|BE1|BE2|ES1|ES2|SF1|SF2/SF3|SF4|DS1 sz] {conjzix|z2x| ur[t2]is]a]is|us GEE TsTs 7 oo neo4a/o44 ORTREER FWA SCRE TERT OR WORT J8-3, 48-4, 8-B0x TERMINAL BLOCK LABEL 05.08.24 y* UsH1o REINETSU co R&R K S tt Lr. FW. EWS. TB-LABELsuccr no. 5 ¢B |x20/x21|x22/x23]x24|X25|x26] CB C1 |y2o|v2i|y22|y23|y24jv25|¥26) C1 24v| ov| — |y28|y2aly2aly2B|v2c|y2p]¥2e|Y2F| y30|Y31|¥32|¥33| y28|y29 Y2A}¥2B|¥2C|¥20]¥2E|¥2F| ¥30|¥31|Y32\¥33 6B | x40/X41|x42|X43]x44)X45|X46) CB C1 |y40ly41|y42iv43|y44iv45|¥46) C1 24v] OV] |¥48|¥49/Y4AlyaBly4cly4p| Y4E|¥4F| ySOlY51|¥52|753) y48|y49 ¥4A}¥4B]Y4C|Y4D|Y4E|Y4F|Y50)¥51|Y52\¥53 EE MESSER TS eS To NEoA3/044 pe eeaneer WWE a 48-1, JB-2 | TERMINAL BLOCK LABEL 05.08.24 fe ewanneen ee EL-20-5 ew Bee A ae Ae a SHIO REINETSY CO.,LTD.sweet wo. 60 E |SD|DT|DG B }X60/X61|X62/X63]X64/X65|X66] CB C1 |¥60|¥61)/¥62/¥63|¥64|Y65|Y66) C1 l24v| ov | |¥68|y69}Y6A/Y6B|Y6C| ¥6D|Y6E| Y6F| Y70\Y71|Y72\Y73 68) Y69 Y6A}Y6B|Y6C|Y6D| Y6E|Y6F|¥70|¥71|Y72|¥73 SRE NESSER WE WS. NEOA3/044 PE SCRE] #80 DR NORTE SRCRREER 5 aE - 48-5, TOP-BOX, PIT-BOx TERWINAL BLOCK LABEL 05.08.24 | | e1-20-6 es ee TB-LABEL USHIO REINETSU CO.,LTD.carn 6/ 4 TuRW os i woo-w/ish sau oLe ron sauce of i i ss 7 20 vfs | 3e-ncuay of z Woot v fo | oz ° © ee q : E 654 el 8) ca-1/4 /7.5kW TR 440/200¥ fesistor : Z 00k = oes « { WOB-B/SA a (ser —28 el texy [ners : _ftowriae, ae / igs | | p-13:5,6 | jor S22 MOB-B/SA MOB=C/SK a seg 1.524 (| cel fart Spe ole on | y* 8-4 | | isa eet WOB-R/SA & 7 | | gut iovsct2 | gut a as Lu [o-us:3.4_| ov CS ge mn | t vet eas | | | t-— pace eet pest ut }——110 % | ver al oT . | yee F | Fg Ore | " i GF )eooLiNG FAK i 2 © | lS m7 wes | aa — — e043 048 AOE TAREER ee WANE aE SERCE ER OFA EATE CONTROL PANEL SOURCE CIRCUIT 95.08.28 ERAN AGERE YH eL-ai-1 = eS oe rsaseet no. 62 f 'NB-3 |JB-4 | CAGE MeB-L/108 | | | I one le 2a 2800 t3_ | p-a:9. 10 tg | ptt 16 “ACIO0V gl? La | pussti2 [2X7 ve | | Vv 1 Lae wee | TRUNK LAMP 60W x6 if i 09, —o | { 1 | || | a wes 1 Ly | \ o pipe S| Or | | i ff t t i | ssa | | | i ! EMERGENCY LAMP SW x6 | | | i | | i | EL) | i | | iy SA dh SAL S| | | 2 | | | weo-£/54 i: - | | i i Et 2.509 2.890 1.53 1.580 | = aoe vo av + 297 < ee ee (ey EMERGENCY LAI | 2 | EL {eee | oe | i ql tt . a | z i | | | . | | | sew j ct | | ie ths | ja forse + Sele | poet enzo ENEROENCY CALL SW | \ {9 worl or2 Lee 7 ac2 | weoa:es i feweraency t Precast) Pace] | patter 110 weroriie pes i t | i ma Lona} | | 6 * | - Ly avrowaric | TeLemnone TS ae re. | Teveprone | 6 eT 95 — 12 oy | | + L | oat ae] ie i i cenera, 8 tite git |_w-0h__ 9) eeraL, avant | ALarn 642 Lone one [oes (acioov) | aa, ' dl i | om GENERAL ALAR INDICATOR | 5 | ' xy (aczav) | w/a inrenPHoNe | | ' | + be Tite mR + INTERPHONE | | 5 re | 3 me ! mag [crise . | run mus ponaS75 [ets | : uo aurowaric | TELEPHONE | eREWESTER aw by vm | ‘AUTOMATIC i Lr cee ae | oaaEER wan SOATEST ATE | LAMP, BATTERY LAMP | EMERGENCY BELL CIRCUIT 06.06.14 a eae Bae eae ae =FES WS. NEO43/044 a eas Stns Ks0042sweet, 6 624 p24 vio vio 10-SY2 10-T64-2 10-T64-1 NE043/044 CONTROL PANEL DO CONTROL CIRCUIT Wer say 05.08.23, Saeh eke Fe Oe EL-21-4 K50042SHEET NO. & 624 pope al 2b te | esonPe Maron L seve on F | Wa a | ew g 5 is ise | eorow eR ts PIT EN sx [Lor over ts coverace 5t [Ba eld ll hl (od bell 6 set Lse2 EN WZ, sral 7 S77 carer is wim 246" | Wx a | .sor Lsb2 Lsbs_Lsp4- LSS LSD6 LSD? (oe ee. | | | u P24 tsi 18l2 LSL3. sid ISLS LLB 1 Fa oF « = e " Isla isis Lst7 310); ESCAPE SAFETY SAFETY ooR SAFETY FLOOR DOOR SAFETY DOOR LOCK SAFETY BOTTOM SLOW LIMIT SW BOTTOM STOP LIMIT SH TOP SLOW LIMIT SW TOP STOP LIMIT SW ROLLING: PITCHING LIMIT Sit 1.60 [Poppe waa 200] | sav 24s | aay 20 10-62PN) =) 19-T64-1 | 10-T64-2 "Jneur |S : | | 1 sD | | CAGE [8-3 / . so & 7 Jonas CONTROL CIRCUIT 95.08.28 ai =66 SHEET No. c-0k c-0k B-K B-0K A-0K A-0K upp.oK upp. Dk 2uD.DK 2ND.OK 05.08.23 NEo43/044 EL-21-6 Ks0042 . Z Se ast |B ae = : = ] S| 41s) = = z — 20st | 7 1 = a a 3 ° % an 3 ~ ° > 9181 % 60s) | = oo 2 = ——_ fe eeeeeeeeeces == sist . 2 Leo = g sast See lela 2 visi | po = 3 vs | seme 5 q ©. 7 a e181 al eal = 3 £081 see | EB, Lo o= | 2781 s| x «| -2-> L ae a 3 zas1 ees ella = 3 ow . 1181 . =| oe w o e| be ~ o= a a 5 10s1 Se D-K Lock si ee owe, D-0K DOOR sw aoe 110 £-0K Lock sw Cs R kL A tt * E-0K DooR sw DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT BE WARRCER yi REWESSER FANE$7 SHEET _NO. HOLYOLONI NOILISod 30-0 UOLYOLONI NOLLISOd ¥o-2 BOLVOIONE NOILISOd ¥o-8 HOLYOLONI NOLLISOd ¥0-¥ BOLYOLONI NOLLIsog 0° dan WOLVOLONI NOLLISod ¥0°OnZ WOLYOLONI NOLLISOa ¥0°OuE WOLYDION! NOLLISOd ¥O°HLY MS LIMIT OVOT W3KO 39¥9 aS OLoHE aLv9 39¥9 Ns 38079 ON wood 39¥9 is ALadvs 3903. wood NS OLOHd 39NVHO ¥oOTS NS OLOHd NKOO HOTS NS OLOHd 3NOZ wood MS OLOHa dous an MS OLOHd 404s NAOO 95n 140_TBIS NO n13) THE | 492 an09 ez LOX — anos 8h oe 8) ance gOS. 2 as ron AOLLDV: OL 90 viva ANI O71 ais P61 SOX or znoo 2 1no9 2 vr20/1 9 8¥20/1 (0:01) 1ud-O1 ls le fe Es fal Be Gae Ee |# E ag E Eee SE jad Lie l*y68 10-DR2(1D:2) Gas hee aE Poeas TE BV Dae RR Le HEsueerno. 70 E-DK CAGE CALL INDICATOR ‘CAGE DOOR OPEN RELAY CAGE DOOR CLOSE RELAY ve Lone E-DK D-0K A-K i = ie N-ca:t0 ae Neca vig a)g——_Wreaiz | 7 7 a e043 /044 case 3-4 awe a CONTROL CIRCUIT 4 05.08.23 a = oe as eR WANKGER ae wor Sey Cr EE owe No. el-21-10 J oe ee Cee votsucerno. 7 16 -ACITO oooR oToR) ‘CAGE poo OPEN CAGE ooR. close CAGE Doo OPEN SLOW ‘CAGE DOOR CLOSE SLOW CAGE DOOR 1 wewe:3, { T | DOOR MACHINE CONTROLLER | WoW DOOR MoToR Dcioov, 150 FELD COIL CAGE AUTO DOOR CONTROL CURCUIT 18 2.080] noo | 2.0sa (rat) 28-206 28 2 2a 286 280-286 10-DR1 10-DR2 10-pR3 10-pR4 tugee oan | [yore vara} voce oara | favaze_ oxta 0.75sa-1P-S8 ‘SOURCE + SIGNAL CIRCUIT 10-DRI : 1D:0 (2 USE) X00-X07, Yoo-Yo7 REFERENCE D1AGRAN 10-DR2 : 10:2 (2 USE) X08-KOF, YO8-YOF 10-DR3 : 10:4 (2 USE) X10-XI7, Y10-YI7 1O-DR4 : 10:6 (2 USE) XI8-XIF, Y18-YIF EMERGENCY CALL SW ESCAPE HATCH SAFETY LIMIT Si CATCH SAFETY LIMIT Si EWERGENCY STOP SW (PB-BOX) EWERGENCY STOP SW (COP) DOOR SAFETY LIMIT SW (CAGE DOOR CLOSE LIMIT SW) we043/044 case se-4 CONTROL CIRCUIT 5 05.08.23 et-ai-n Me ee ee oe ee foes2 ou/oue as re an reve ws en Bret eanae ; Wow13 earoront 1340 00 awotoul 20 moran woe Yovolom aoissoa 30-3 an1oten wo sotvotou wo111808 Yo-Y ‘orvotoa wo1sts04 eden sod 36-0 504 36-3 atten! wo14is08 ¥0-aRt oto10H 1240 O06 owovons 62 vouvorou wnisoa 0-3 mrvrout wo1sisos 0-0 amtvotout W011i 30-9 atyotont wuss s0-8 o.oton 90111908 ¥0-Y e.ot0n 0 o1o10n e1oH0N WL oLverOn| 1aH0 O08 owovant an ‘wrvron oxstsed 30-3 orton WOU 0-8 otvoron! W190 H0-Y otvtout no1sis04 30a aWotont no1Lts08 40-042 ayoton! po11isog xo my ue Pokal g 49 ‘Or eow 7) rT Bla “ « 84 ae ETS i lg 4 —— ie a | |eal |e EL @ |’ 4 rar k eras E A Ta E ‘ s_| € A [+r oe tr 4s Tare | a THEW pes om _ eo | fe ven is ee oe = fein — = fein rt . enw row - et stk sno € = Sea oe ts im an ee fs tos fea q 0 tm on I Los Wang-orxy Ib & = 2-89 (ASN ¥) u-01 «Fk 3 Lyh-OvA ‘2vK-OX (38M 2) 0:01 + 980-01 Se 3] =]. 7 ge |e3| 3 : waa} 2 Eels & 7 ls ff fe Wye Wah : bo aa movie somnaze |g sinouia wwii - zounos fg mew I. e |# ere) pas T } V9 $osgT I a e |*¢ Fi J ». | 4 5k /&4 Se leq | 919 vil |x 1 fe r reece! WOLVOIONI T1¥9 df NO-€ aaa or SE SYA 5 a 8S YoLvO1ON! 119 whod 0-2 | aT ee Yh ER & | | ly ie fe ™ {lg , ie as THv9 dn 90-8 9 -e—aTy xe 61 rx He ft 7 | Sea a fs TWv9 whoo 90-8 oo ae a LL x |. cemenere pean + poz ano ee sia . - ls UOL¥DTONL TW¥9 NHoa ¥0-¥ — oir $62 27h KE as TWV9 dn ya-¥ ¢ = ae sh enK As 119 wo ¥a-¥ yeTH “ $e1 20x = Et $91 eno 3 | v9 uo.varonl TW¥9 én yo°vdan a = $12 1h WoLVOLONI T1¥9 NAO Xa" dan oH ieTK a $82 OPA as Two an ya°dan 2 wir w us une as TW¥9 whoo ya" adn 2.0 a oii #6 ovk Bai 1290d-W 89 ae AOLIDV: 90 vive ¥ NIT O/T gag va wae (O:d1) 9ud-O1sneer. 75 rea 10-R6(1D:2) NE043/044 05.08.28 ee OWENS, EL-21-15 aa Brtree eet 5004276 SHEET NO 114-894 sn #) 2-01 ei g 194-094 *49X-09% (A8n 2) 8:01 + 140-01 gk gle] wa a al Sd le ie ’ bok b Sed he vi EE EE oe eat muovie soins [sf unovia wis » aoun0s gf rane ean le | ad Ter ET p90 Posy E |e a a io Bee J L jaa ee |®d Eh lg 2 of] |r i eS Pee wouvotont 11¥9 woo 30-3 betes . 8 89h E a) . SS fe is 1WV0 aoa 90-3 a oat 61 ox EE ff 4 le a w peed aa wa vouvotani TWv0 4ais¥H 0-0 | __}ee v4 wouvolant TW¥9 an v0-0 « oe “- $16 94 i vouvoton! 11¥9 woo x0-a oe —e aT ie zh f fs As 1WV9 ¥3LS¥H 0-0 ret par _ 11 99% i s.1W9 an ¥0-0 goo ay a 41 9x ss TWV0 Moa 30-0 re aT et 294 | ha for anoo wi ouvotant TW9 an 0-0 a 422 19 wou oo 0% jouvotont TWO naa ¥o-9 | = $52 09 ws 1W9 an 0-9 eee $11 9x AS TWO toa v0-9 ooo te aT 6 08x |_| ne os 21 e109 Tai ADLLDV: 1 90 wave as: ANI O71 (8:01) 280-01Pa Yes 69 6A 68, 66, v60, Yee, yr Yor yr. ¥70, jvra yr yr, y13, 10-R7 CID: A) EREWESSER = Ne043/044 FAR OR WORE 05.08.23 CONTROL CIRCUIT 2 SER ear Say ee OWEN. EL-21-17 Oe woe‘SHEET NO. & PIT-BOX BOTTOM SLOW LIMIT SW BOTTOM STOP LIMIT sw BOTTOM OVER TRAVEL LIMIT SW PIT EWERGENCY STOP sw TOP-BOx w-tor:6_7} wusiy | LST | wtop:7 af wust:2 werop:t1 9, w-T0P:12 10) | * peL~izA DPYC-2. 5 TOP SLOW LIMIT SW Top stor Li TOP OVER TRAVEL LIMIT SW GOVERNOR LIMIT Sw TRUNK ESCAPE HATCH SAFETY SW W/W EWERGENOY CALL BUZZER EEEWESSER = Oooo E043 /044 [ee CAREER lee WARE OR SORTE [RE DR OATE PIT-Box, Top-Box CONTROL ciRCUIT 06. 06. 14 [sR wANAGER ore By Ew OWEN. eL-21-18 re awe: ¥g Rome Re RR ae 1p. io Rei wer79 yo um ea Ow Oe Oa Oa ©) ‘wa ©) — was © ee —@ ais ©) as © a er Ca ic Le Heer te ect f=} ath Le eres) ere wee ero wre ue sere. __[rrcsor fr] rv ennai sr ae Ber ee tatSHEET NO. 2 JB-3 JB-4 TAIL coRD ATTACHED GABLES (A-DS) >> ATTACHED CABLES (A-US) > ATTACHED CABLES (A~02) >> ATTACHED CABLES. (A-SL) > ATTACHED CABLES (A-F6) => ATTACHED CABLES _(A-DE) SOFT CABLES (WED) oe weye-2 __(W-0L) aa wpyo-2__(W-L62) = weve-2__(W-c1) Tani weyo-2__(w-p0) isms wpyo-4_ (u-DC) i GOP weyc-27__(W-CA) a wpvc-27__(W-CB) wPycns (w-c0) 18 wpyc~12__(u-PB) fo oc PB-sH ppyo-1.6 _(0-P8) oe 8 weve-2___(0-F) ay wpve-2 7 weve2_O-8) RECEPTACLE, weyc-2 ___(0-EL) i weye-s _(w-T1) a wevo-2___(w-12) a wpyo-2___(D~GA) ppvo-1.6 _(0-MC) ae SOURCE weyo~4 (uo) Sai weycn4 (WW) 7 ses weve-2 _(W-08)__ Frag DOWN STOP PHOTO sw UP sToP PHOTO Sw DOOR ZONE PHOTO SW SLOW DOMN PHOTO sw FLOOR CHANGE PHOTO Sw DOOR GATE PHOTO SW DOOR EDGE SAFETY LIMIT sw OVER LOAD LIMIT Sw caTOH Limit sw ESCAPE DOOR LIMIT SW DOOR OPEN LIMIT Sw DOOR CLOSE & DOOR SAFETY LIMIT SW INDICATOR LED & BUZZER OPERATION SW EMERGENCY STOP SW EMERGENCY CALL SW LIGHT SH, FAN SW (ACIOOV) EWERGENCY STOP SW, AUTO-MANU COS. MANUAL PB SH LIGHT souRcE (Actoov) FAN (ActO0V) LieHT (Act00v) RECEPTACLE (AC1O0V) ENERGENCY LAMP (Oc24v) INTERPHONE AUTOWATIC TELEPHONE GENERAL ALARM BELL (AC1OOV) DOOR MACHINE CONTROLLER SOURCE (ACTIOV) CONTROL SIGNAL CONTROL PANEL qeye-2.6__(T-W) Dpve-1.5 (0-8) 3@ AcA4ov Gonz 1 ActOoV Gonz po 2av EMERGENCY CALL BUZZER (E.¢.R) AUTOMATIC. TELEPHONE EXCHO" GENERAL ALARW SIGNAL JauToMATiC TELEPHONE (w/R) Iworor 5. skW [2 6 Jeraxe con DOOR WoTOR (OC1OOv, 150M) CLOSE sLow LIMIT sw OPEN SLOW LIMIT SH wye-2__(v-usa) wrro-2 jro.cine Lint sw 3B) Ls = WAKER RING neo4s/04a ELEVATOR CAGE, W/R DIAGRAM cd MPR e tee Be ovosweet no. 8] CONTROL PANEL CABLE JB-3 TAIL CORD JB-4 ee ae ees cae conrron source wig (uz) dus 42 hur 1 -ncrtov-sorz vig | a4 jv 3.4 Vi CONTROL ciRcUIT 70 Link cae ae a t 11 | - —| | DOOR WACHINE source _ oi | 5. 1 Lack D1 vercrior-son “oat | oe | fon wae D2 DOOR MACHINE | lat 1 [| | | Liont source _t34 | 9,10 Lt Rep bus | 18 -acioov-6oH2 Ley [it.12 2 eREEN Le Liewr & FAN GENERAL ALARM GENERAL ALAR actoov ewe ezay EMERGENCY LAMP enercency ewencency caLL 82 cae sw ESOAPE DooR ESCAPE SAFETY Limit su jlo sarery sae 7} 10 Sse4 24 Gera Limit sm iT | i Area { pst 25 ‘DOOR SAFETY boon sarery _10f | 12 Sps2 26 Limit sw | ea] | | = TL 14 jr 31 vwrenewone —nu2g | 16 12 32 WTERPHONE ica |e) esoteees aes 23 3 avrowric ua | a7 | son u js avrowaric TELEPHONE _ TLS} 18 | 4sP2 35. iG TELEPHONE ST lI i | | | | i | | RETESET a neo4s/o44 SoHE eR 1 EORCE NFR OOF TAIL CORD REFERENCE cco EU RNRGER eL-22-8 a. Ore fe DIAGRAMste 0. 82 140 90 ESCAPE HATCH SPECIFICATION 1, MATERIAL: ACRYLIC RESIN 2mm 2. CHARACTERS: ROUND GOTHIC RED 3. BACK GROUND: — WHITE. 4. FITTING POSITION: CAGE ESCAPE HATCH x1 NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING co,LTD |" NE043/044 3 omneeR ew ae ~~ Km GoAtE aRBOW'H BATE | NAME PLATE 172 05.03.24 lew eANRGER ear By [ew OR BY Taw owe. Na. EL-25-1 Mart eana a we Ke,‘eer 33 250 HOW 10 RELEASE BRAKE SYSTEM FOR EMERGENCY USE 10 RESCUE PASSENGER (1) SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER IN CONTROL PANEL. (2)INSERT THE TURNING HANDLE INTO TRACTION MOTOR (S)RELEASE THE BRAKE MECHANISM BY USING RELEASE-HANDLE FOR BRAKE. 300 (4) TURN THE TURNING HANDLE BY THE VOLUME MEASURED VISUALLY AND LET THE CAGE GO UP OR DOWN JUST FLOOR LEVEL. (5)AFTER GOING UP OR DOWN OPERATION OF THE CAGE, REMOVE THE HANDLE FOR RELEASING OF BRAKE MECHANISM. (8)OPEN THE LANDING DOOR AT FLOOR WHERE. CAGE STOPPED EXACTLY AT FLOOR LEVEL AND RESCUE THE PASSENGER FROM IN—CAGE. 1.MATERIAL: ACRYLIC RESIN 2mm 2.CHARACTERS: ROUND GOTHIC BLACK 3.BACK GROUND: WHITE 4.FITTING POSITION: MACHINE ROOM x 1 maa weeaeR "8 ww, No, NAWTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING COLTD | NE043/044 ¥ w oaReER ew NAME RR ScALE [RAB OR'W DATE NAME PLATE 1/2 05.09.06 EL-25-2 ls RwanaceR ae ow By Berea tee reresueet No, BH fo > i co ® AA wR ex SHIP No. | SPARE PARTS LIST FoR U_s = seve Fan vess LLA-3- ‘ser ELEVATOR QUANTITY ]USHIO CODE No, a8 ee dh FZ eeneneeeeeenene - WORKING: NoJ NAME OF PARTS OUTLINE oaalpee SETIVES: ea 1 2 1 MAGNETIC CONTACTOR Yur 2 3 1 RELAY Yur 3 5 1 RELAY YbL= a ‘ i pe24v RELAY _--——--——- B-RHI YL 5 3 1 TERMINAL RELAY BAe 6 1 1 TIMER WREA4 oF 7 o 1 | aDs-83 PHOTO SWITCH : ao TOYODENK! USybadoF 2{ pt = 8 5 10 | aus-v51 UMIT SWITCH a a _ —= YAMATAKE. URyhAtaF TN70015=0712 yy b 9 10 1 | LIMIT SWITCH j ‘ _ES~6PAIO PACKET ah AMATARE UR hatyF 10 3 1 | ZE+NA2-2 LMIT SWITCH @ Beware “SPARE PARTS LIST ~] DRW, No, EL-26-1sueet No. BA fe ¥ ti db a @ Be SHIP No. | pane PARTS LIST FOR Us = sens ron vass ILA-3- . ELEVATOR QUANTITY USHIO CODE No, 8 B Sh 2 @ WORKING No, NAME OF PARTS OUTLINE PARI PER! PER ae SET|VESG ea-z 0, "1 a ® FUSE ca-x 30, 12 2 2 | MF-6 FUSE el an ka-z 2] }_50__ 13 at 1 1 FUSE. S44-8 14 1 1 DIODE 6 maRRAL By a-s6-2 “USHIS WEINETET GO. Lis, [~"—SeaRe PARTS UVST DR, No,SHEET No, 36 © 8] Raz i cc BE z IDA-9- ELEVATOR on al Paes ah FE QUANTITY |USHIO CODE No, WORKING ~ - No] NAME OF PARTS OUTLINE PAR TYPE PER|PER . sET\vesg SL-#34 41500251 24 2 2 | S2aIL-saRe BRAKE COIL. TRACTION MACHINE FOR BRAKE} ‘KM S429 04750026 22 2 2 | SEM IL-sae LINING [TRACTION MACHINE FOR BRAKE| KTM=30FB. KM AIUD 45 0415002700 23 j 2 2 | SEMIL-FaR SPRING I re [TRACTION MACHINE FOR BRAKC| IKTM—3OFB KM H4RYa— Bkg/m 120 (04150071 24 4 4 | DDY9-Ordh GUIDE SHOE LOBBER kg/m COUNTER WEIGHT FIRYa— Bkg/m 120 20 (041500711 25 3 4 4 [as GUIDE SHOE LOBBER 8kg/mm ut eae tne 165 041501500 26 a 4 | SRR FELT ROPE a LUBRICATER K7S4+- 0.5t e 160 405 fa 27 4 t 40| 22878 DOOR LINER 0.5t I CAGE DOOR RPS4t~ 1.6t ie 160 16 Saisolle 28 "| aoe 40 | DAS? R DOOR LINER 1.6t hn CAGE DOOR VIDA YF 79060600 29 : 1 | Ord F BaF MICRO SWITCH R.P. SWITCH RH IORAVF 19060602 Ea 18 | 7797827 MICRO SWITCH INTER ROCK B WARMERS es To USHIO REINETSU CO,, LTD, SPARE PARTS LI ST DRW, No, ine87 ae TRE ii z aE SHIP No. TOOL LIST ( seve ese vess ILA-39- KTM~30FB " ELEVATOR a a e dh 72 2 ns as NoJ| NAME OF PARTS OUTLINE QUANTITY. REMARKS 479-09 ORR + FMM Ao TET 1 | 3 LOCK RELEASE ROD ] IN SPARE TS BOX DU- FRU (038) Mec Be 2 1 BRAKE RELEASE LEVER 6 ” IN MACHINE ROOM I-ZYINIEW Khe 2E 3 -— 1 TURNING HANDLE ) IN MACHINE ROOM aH = Seacee ‘ Ce SPARE BOX ~ IN MACHINE ROOM a HAMERTEA TRE elie USHIO REINETSU CO,, LTD, FOOL LisT DRW, No,WEIGHT FOR ELEVATOR PARTS : ELEVATOR | DESCRIPTION ¢kg) [DESCRIPTION | 15 GUIDE SHEAVE 115 a TOTAL WEIGHT 7020K9 Bw onneeR wa weasER Te wea KS. NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO.LTD NE_043/044 EW WANE iw wane pane ow OATE WEIGHT FOR ELEVATOR PARTS 05.09.06 Lay Fe pW No BP BRA R LHSHEET NO, 39 90 80 ELEVATOR es SS MODEL UES-5S00-9CA MAX, CAPACITY | 500kg or 6 persons INSPECTION No. SERIAL No. DATE O° Wi USHIO REINETSU CO, LTD. 7 w SPECIFICATION MATERIAL Aluminum 1mm CHARACTERS: SOUND GOTHIC BLACK FITTING POSITION: | IN CAGE x1 [BE essen NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO,LTB INSPECTION CERTIFICATE 005/2/1 a ae EL-29 ea OFS ay BBR FtQuant us FITTING HOLES Specifications Model [BF-541P Size [45x55 X210 (mm) Life of battery [8(eight) hours: Brightness. [700 bx Lamp type MB-25P5K @.5V 05A) 9 TORCH ‘AT HA 8 28 24) BF-541PPanasonic ideas for life Quantity : tset Specifications BATTERY CHARGER 7 WAR/=AR BME BQ-560 —MODEL [Model [BO-560, Size 111X210 X51 (mm) [Charging time [8(eight) hours Brightness about 8(eight) hours2 Panasonic ideas for fife NIKEL METAL HYDRIDE BATTERY (RECHAGEBLE TYPE) S97 LAR BIL TEM) HHR-INPS/2B = —MODEL Quantity : 2set SCI L Zi 2 HHR-NPS/2B [Size —__|34%64.5 (mm) [Voltage fi2VB TAIN ie] Beewwe ocx ey cb J] @y 'd17"09 21410913 MOTIVAS lds = xy» YHACGAs| BY dg 02 -3SNOW [3102 es 306CU} fa VowofstmL FEE us CREEL Lan (Ep et ve (£6EA60FN) SRSOV BAL BE dl Lod AAI GCE MeLoewio5 YAOZ, ZY) ADDS tite see VAD soaces, aceon ol ” e "626 SINO-WME228 aa Me (Bye i al 000 AAROTAE TAS ABEPLAN RECORD 1, MAR, 26, 2005. _ DRAWN FOR NED43/044 NANTONG COSCO KHI SHIP ENGINEERING CO., LTD NE 043/044 ELEVATOR TEST GUIDANCE “Remarks APPROVED BY, LE CHECKED | oecxn ey 4 cnaeccmie® | No. TART. PREV. | CLASS une YZ Rhugaira. K050042—180 NK DRAWN BY >. Teyyat. g USHIO HEAD OFFICE TEL : +81-898-53-2400 FAX : +81-898-53-6363 DESIGN SECTION TEL : +81-898-53-2401 FAX : +81-898-53-2402 883-1 WAKI ONISHI-CHO IMABARI-CITY EHINE PREF. , JAPAN USHIO REINETSU CO.,LTD.CONTENTS TEST GUIDANCE 1, PURPOSE OF THE TEST ----- 2 2, PRINCIPAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 3. TEST PROCEDURE (1) LOAD TEST (INCLUDING INSPECTION OF OPERATING DEVICES.) --~ 2 (2) BRAKE TEST (HOLDING TEST) ---- 3 (3) GOVERNOR TEST ---. 3 (4) LEVEL TEST --- 3 (8) INSULATION TEST 3 (6) TEMPERATURE RISE TEST ---~ 3 (7) CLEARANCE OF COUNTERWEIGHT ---- 3 (8) CLEARANCE OF GOVERNOR WEIGHT ---~ 3 TEST RESULTS 1. LOAD TEST --. 4 INSPECTION OF OPERATING DEVICES 5 2. BRAKE TEST (HOLDING TEST) 5 3. GOVERNOR TEST --~ 5 4. LEVEL TEST ---- 5 5. INSULATION TEST -- 6. TEMPERATURE RISE TEST 7, CLEARANCE OF COUNTERWE|GHT 8. CLEARANCE OF GOVERNOR WEIGHT1. PURPOSE OF THE TEST This test guidance shows the procedure and method for performing service elevator in order to make sure of compliance with specification and of all devices operating with safty. 2, PRINCIPAL SPECIFICATIONS Manufacturer USHIO REINETSU CO., LTD Type Single wrap traction geared type Control Selective collective automatic Capacity 500 kg 6 Persons Speed 45 m/min Stroke 36, 55 m Trunk height 42,45 m Stopping floor 9 Stops (4TH, 3RD, 2ND, UPP, A, B, C, D, E-DI Power supply 3 Phase , AC440V , 60 Hz Traction motor 5.5 kw, 1500 min Rated current 9.11 A 4 Poles 3, TEST PROCEDURE (1)LOAD TEST (INCLUDING INSPECTION OF OPERATING DEVICES) Load test to be carried out in six(6) steps progressively 1.E., 0%, 25 %, 50%, 75%, 100%, 110% of the rated capacity (500kg). Voltage, current and speed to be recorded in each steps. a) At 0% load of the rated capacity: Speed shall be 130% or less of the rated speed. * Current shall be 130% or less of the rated current of motor. b) At 100% load of the rated capacity: « Upward speed shal! be 90% or more and 105% or less of the rated speed. * Current shall be 110% or less of the rated current of motor. Regarding inspection of operating devices, to check each item shown on attached sheet (page 5)(2)BRAKE TEST (HOLDING TEST) Test of traction machine brake with maximum load weight plus 25% of rated load. (3)GOVERNOR TEST Disconnecting governor rope from cage , governor to be operated by hand under the condition of over speed. The actuated speed of governor, tripping switch operation to be measured. Test results to be satisfied with following items; CAGE Catch of governor to be operated immediately or after tripping switch operated, and also to be operated downward speed being 63 m/min within. EMERGENCY STOP TEST Tripping the catch of governor by hand in down direction of cage with the rated load, the cage will be stopped temporarily. The relay for down direction contractor at the control panel in the machine room to be operated by hand, the operation of emergency stop device to be confirmed by stopping the cage at less than 0.3m. (MLEVEL TEST This test shall be carried out with no load, 50% and 100% of carrying loads. Allowance landing error within +30mm. (S)INSULATION TEST Insulation resistance to be tested by 500V megaohms. (6) TEMPERATURE RISE TEST Temperature rise on motor, machines, etc to be measured. (7) CLEARANCE OF COUNTER WEIGHT Confirmation of the clearance between counterweight and buffer. The clearance between counterweight and buffer is to be measured when cage is stopped at highest position. (8) CLEARANCE OF GOVERNOR WEIGHT (CAGE) Confirmation of the clearance between governor weight and trunk bottom. The clearance between governor weight and trunk bottom aTEST RESULTS DATE ATTENDANT OWNER, SHIPYARD 1. LOAD_TEST LOAD UP WARD DOWN WARD % WEIGHT | VOLTAGE | CURRENT | SPEED | VOLTAGE | CURRENT | SPEED (ke) | W) (A)_ | (/min)| _W) (A)_| (m/min) 0 0) 25 125 50 250 75 375 100) 500 110 550) CURVE OF LOAD TEST 10 T 9 ToT t | [eae z8 os a [| [UP WARD | & 6 : 4 DOWN WARD 2 |e z 4 { ome| ea 3 0 25 50 5 100 110 LOAD (%)INSPECTION OF OPERATING DEVICES No. ITEMS OF INSPECTION RESULT 1. [Confirmation of limit switch and over travel limit switch operation 2_ [Hall button and car button operation 3. |Emergency signal device operation 4 [Emergenoy stop button operation 5. [Position indicator operation 6 [Door interlock operation 7_ [Door contact switch operation 8 [Landing door able to be opened from outside by a special key 9 [Condition of landing 10 [Emergency stop device operation when escape hatch was opened 11 [Emergency call device & Emergency light 12 [Over load alarm (110% of rated load) 13 [Rolling switch & Pitching switch operation 14 |Emergenoy exit (Escape method from the cage) 15 |Home landing operation (A-DK , D-DK , E-DK , OFF) 16 [Master call (@RD-DK , D-DK) 2. BRAKE TEST (HOLDING TEST) 3. GOVERNOR TEST 4, LEVEL TEST Load Result Confirmation for brake (holding) of the lift 125% Tripping switch operation speed |Emergency stop test| CAGE m/min m LOAD 0% 100% LANDING ERROR m| am}5. INSULATION TEST No. ITEMS SOURCE| Earth-MEGAOHMS SUCCESS 1 [Motor main circuit AC440V 230mQ 2 [Brake circuit DC200V Z5NQ 3 |Lamp circuit ACTOOV =5uQ 4 [Door motor circuit DC100V 25NQ 5 6 6. TEMPERATURE RISE TEST FINAL TEMPERATURE, LIMIT OF No. ITEMS COOL. HOT SUCCESS | reup._Rise 1 |Stator core of motor 20° g [Gear oi! casing of traction 30° machine 3 Controller 25° 4 |Machine room Below 50°C 7. CLEARANCE OF COUNTERWE|GHT Confirmation of the clearance between counterweight and buffer. Cage position E-DK Clearance mm 8. CLEARANCE OF GOVERNOR WEIGHT Confirmation of the clearance between governor weight and trunk bottom. Clearance (Cage side) mmprnnanaaaanannnns FEGAC wannnnnaaanaag : | : : % TAv a 7 aE WA BE CERTIFICATE FOR STEEL WIRE ROPE No 627203 06.07.25 KIA O-~ Fi HHN ST RCMB ORAL AMMO OMAR CS SOE ERMEL ET, We hereby certify that this steel wire rope is examined and tested strictly acco- rding to the under-mentioned specification at our works and we guarantee the qua- lity of the article, if fl i [SPECIFICATION] JIS G 3525 % 4 % # (PRODUCT NO] ... 0 — 70H ®% (CONSTRUCTION) EB 70800 8xS(19) 0/0 2 — 7 ® ¥& (NOMINAL DIA. OF THE ROPE)~ 12 (ACT. 12.45) =m 0-7 & [LENGTH 94m X4 oJ 5 (GRADE) A a 32 BW #7 HE (SPECIFIED BREAKING LOAD).... 69.2 kN ‘PAWL A H [ACTUAL BREAKING LOAD]... 17.0 KN % 8 [APPEARANCE] ae i 3% MH (WIRE TEST) .. a it ‘ * [NOTI (z 713580. 3773590) 3560. 3773570. 3 SUFUSTLFUSUFUFLSTFLSUSLSLSLSL SL SUSU FL FUELS SUSU FUSS SU STALSTL AT SL FLELELELALALALALSLSUSUSU sue AREER DEERE EEE UU EEUU IUTUUR ULLAL UTILS UU UL a_—— TESAC “eer é Av 0- THEW CERTIFICATE FOR STEEL WIRE ROPE Xo _sorga0g 106.07.25 KI O- THERM ATTRA LORALARM HD OMAR MCE SCERMMKLET. We hereby certify that this steel wire rope is examined and tested strictly acco~ rding to the under-mentioned specification at our works and we guarantee the qua lity of the article. oi FAL ~CSPECIFICATION) JIS G 3525 Soi @& & (PRODUCT NO.)... B 72479 2 — 7 0 HW (CONSTRUCTION) ... 8xs(1g) > 0/0 8 (ACT. 8.29) om B—7ORS CLENGH a5m ft 3i (GRADE) E a ‘S05 Be IM fil AL (SPECIFIED BREAKING LOAD)... 26.0 KN ‘32 BRET ff HL CACTUAL BREAKING LOAD)... 29.2 kN x {8 (APPEARANCE) a & & BR WB WIRE TEST) .. ah 6 % (NOTE) (3773600) 2 é 3 2 2 8 : 8 8 S é = — 7 © #& (NOMINAL DIA. OF THE ROPE) $ é g é $ e é cc 2 5 2 é 2 8 h 8 8 AA AAR AAAAAAAAAAAARAAAARAAAAN AAA AAAIOPERATION MANUAL FOR ELEVATOR USHIO REINETSU CO.,LTD. 30FB 38FB1. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOOR SIDE oe Press CALL or 4V push—buttons on each floor can be called cage. The position of cage can be confirmed by turning on of the position lamp on a push-button plate. When the door of floor open. OPEN indicator turns on accordingly, you can make sure of occupied of cage. When cage arrives on your floor, ARRIVAL lamp, accordingly, you can know the arrival. While the door on your floor side opens, the door of cage does not close Take hand off the door on your floor side, then the door close automatically.2. AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAGE SIDE Push OPEN push-button to open the closed door. Also, when you want to open the closing door halfway, pusu OPEN push-button or SAFETY EDGE then, the door reverse and open. Push the push—button of desired floor, then, the, specific lamp of the floor turns on and cage move up or down. When cage arrival on the desired floor, the lamp of the floor turns off. On over load, OVER LOAD lamp light and a buzzer sounds. Then, drop any load or person off. With a priority circuit provided, when the master call lamp turns on all floors of destination are cancelled in cage. Immediately, cage stops and a buzzer sounds. Then in 2 seconds, a cage moves directly to the called floor. When cage arrivals on the floor, the lamp turn off.3. HOW TO ESCAPE IN EMERGENCY To be calm and take the actions carefully when the elevator stopped suddenly or when danger occurred. If the elevator stopped suddenly with cage within +100mm from floor level of landing, the passenger can open the doors by hands and escape from it easily. If impossible in 3-2 method, push emergency stop button emergency call button, and wait communication from outside sources. In case of escape by himself. If failed in communication for outside, push emergency stop button, and open exit cover at ceiling of cage Climb up to cage at ceiling, escape through escape—hatch by using ladder. Once an emergency door is opened, closing of it will not bring the elevator back to the original operative condition. To reset the system, use the "RESET BUTTON” on control panel in machine room.4, IMMEDIATE ACTION BY OUTSIDE SOURCES IN EMERGENCY 4-1 To communicate by phone to elevator inside when emergency call rang 4-2 To be than 2 staff-menbers for rescue. If elevator stopped over 100mm from floor level of landing, @ Turn off the main power switch in control panel. But, do not switch off the light in cage. @ To release the brake with brake release key, to turn the motor with handle and to move up or down the cage to floor level. @ Rescue the passengersService Manual for Turning Handle & Brake Releasing Lever Note: Before operation, please never fail to check the followings: more than two persons are needed for operating; more than one for turning handle and more than one for brake release lever, respectively; whether power source of elevator control panel is cut down at main breaker; travelling direction of cage and turning direction of turning handle. STEP 1 Turn left and remove oil leak preventing cap attached to thrust cover opposite to sheave of traction machinery. Oil leak preventing packing is inside the cap. Take care not to lose the packing.Service Manual for Turning Handle & Brake Releasing Lever Brake STEP 2 releasing Se Brake releasing lever rh ¢ shall be set at brake coil. STEP 3 Put turning handle in thrust cover of traction machinery, fitting a key inside the end of turning handle in a sky groove attached to shaft inside thrust cover. After this, a person is to keep turning handle.Service Manual for Turning Handle & Brake Releasing Lever STEP 4 While a person keeps turning handle, anot brake releasing lever in each direction of Then brake can be released her person is to press down indicated arrows. Move slowly turning handle in each direction of indicated arroes, depending on the travelling direction of cage. While this operation, please take care to be enable to set brake releasing lever back immediately.CAUTION OF INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE FOR ELEVATOR 1. General ~ To take permit of manager before working start, and to indicate “Out of service” or “Don’ t use” on each entrance door. ~Not to inspect or maintain with person except engineer of inspection or maintenance, = Work to be done by more than 2 engineers under good communication. = Engineer to ensure helmet putting on tightly. = To ensure enough illumination above cage top and inside trunk. To ensure that alarm bell is operable prior to work, 2. Works in machine room To inspect control pane! and traction machine after main power switch is turned off, 3, Works on cage top To ensure enough and safety working area on cage top. AUTO-MANUAL CHANGE OVER SWITCH to be selected to “MANUAL” position. Otherwise cage may start running without caution. ~ Emergency stop switch to be “TRIP” position so that cage shal| not start in both “AUTO” and “MANUAL” mode. = Cage is manual ly operable by pushing “UP” or “DOWN” switch after emergency stop ewitch is released, ~ To take care with counter weight moving and obstacles inside trunk in case of manual operation. = AUTO-MANUAL CHANGEOVER SWITCH to be selected to “AUTO” position after confirmed safety on cage top and inside trunk. 4, Works in trunk bottom = Emergency stop switch to be “TRIP” position so that cage shal! not start in both “AUTO” and “MANUAL” mode. 5. Rest and smoking is allowed in only predetermined area, 6. Consultation before work and confirmation after completion to be done with customer’ s representative.: NOMLOAULSNOD HHL 40 HOLOgala IVES TVIOdd0 dO TUALVNOIS + NOMLOGASNI GHL dO FOVId * NOMOGdSNI SHL dO FLV + qIHS 40 UaaWON + aIHS dO SWWN MOLVAGTA CUVOENI FHL dO NOLLOAdSNI GNV AONVNGLNIVA NO LSTI MOaHOuya/may8 wre / TB, ujur/a109 yur /ag9 uyur/uIE9 uyw/wSy ° ° - aSIANG Alaavs | SIAC ALLAVS ‘TWOINVHOSN ‘TWORLOTTA Ce Wddowd Calva Gadas ° ° = ‘SDUVHO TO (aah cavaNvas) ° ° = ‘ATIVRUON GSLVEAdO HOLS NIHON oO o = N@SOOT LIOM CATIVISNI ANV MONHAAOD ° ° = WadOud SIO AVE JO ALINVAD TAL OmHO | AVEO NAVA ‘MOTH CNY CIUIGT uyer/w109 MOTHE CNV HMIGT url /WIGy q 7 ~ avis 40 HIONST daads Cava OLS OLAV NEHM HOCH TAOOUD NO GUI JO AIS ANV ° ° = GAOON) TAVGHS NI NOLWNAOFIT ANV ° ° = ACOd GAVAHS NI FOVNVC ANV o ° = NGSOOT 10d GATIVISNI ANV | SAVEHS NIVIL ° ° = NOG LOS XOWGNG NAHM CACHVIRY ATAAVS FOVO oO ° a ‘TWAHON ONINIT % THAHM AVA ° ° = NASOOT L1G GHTIVISNI ANY | HvaUe. SINKAL oO oO = aDaVHO TO SdISNI oO ° = “IWAUON NOMIONOD GaLvaadO x oO fe) = NaSOOT LIO8 CETIVLSNI ANY yOLON NIHOVA Wood oO fe) = NSOOT L108 GATTVISNI ANV aaa NOLWLOVEL SINIHOVAL UVGAT | SHINONS | HINONT SNVAN LNENGOGOL ¥ SWALI YOaHO INIod YouHO | — Siavd NOLLVOOT "IVAUALNI OHH10 o . a ‘DVO NO QaLVYddO ATHAdOUd NOLLNG % HOLINS ‘ANVd TOALNOD ° ° ° ‘GaANSNA NOLLVYAdO HOLIAS ‘DNINEdO ° ° ° NOLVHGdO TIGNIS 4 FSOTO ¥ NadO AONTDUANE ° ° ° GaUASNA NOLYYIdO ° ° ° NASOOT L108 GATIVISNI ANY HOUIMS Hiv) | SDVO NO ° ° ° (XTHLOONS 4SO10 % NadO) GHYASNA NOLivaado | soa ALgavS ° ° ° HDNONG GaNVaTO TAOOTO ° ° ° (XTHLOONS SOTO % NadO) GHYASNA NOLLVYadO wood HOV ° ° ° SCISLNO HUM GELOVINOD HadOud | SNOHATIAL [SOIT AAWNOD| DL ‘CALVGONNODOY SUTDNASSVd AO g ° ° YSGHON XVW GVOT SISVAOW 40 NOLLVOIGNI WINOD QLVId SVN ° ° ° df LHOT] dV THL JO WRINOD ° ° ° ‘ATHYNOTS DNDRIOM SI HOMIMS dOLS AONTDUIAG TANYA ° ° ° ATIOdOYd ONDOM FAV SUHOLINS UNV SNOLLNE-HSNd YATIONLNOD ° ° = SHORI TIV SI DNILHOTI JANVI AONSDWANG] OVO NI ‘AON YO ONE SSHT YO AOST SION YO ONF'O SUON YO AOST SAOW YO GNI'O Aovy ° ° a CaYNSVEN FONVLSISAA NOLLVINSNI SDVLTOA INA, (UGLELLOga HOLINS ALOHd Hod aISNI HOVUIOA INVLSNOD HIM HNO ACNTOXG OL TUAS aa) 2 (SHASVAN TONVISISTY NOLLVINSNI WOOe ° ° ° ‘ATUIdOUd CALVUAdO AVIGY HOLIMS HOVE NSTIOWLNOD | SNIHOV UVaAT | SHINONE | HINONT SNVGN INSWIDGAL % SEL HOH ANIOd YOMHO NOLLVOO1 ‘"IVAMGINI 3OaHO slavdme oO oO = NASOOT LTO CATIVLSNI ANV ° 3 = CGYASNG NOMMVaadO | HOLS Xood ° ° = NASOOT W108 CHTIVISNI ANY ° ° = G@IO0T Ta NVO YOOT ¥ALNO SAL ° fe) = GIS FOVO GHL HLM ATAANIAS CAMIOTHALNI | MOOT MALNE ° ° —_| sav do Siaiva OL MATION YOOT MAINT NAMM aVO THI YoaHD |SWOOC ano) wo0T xooa (GWNS'0~2'0 NIHLIM) THHION ° ° - ATTOOY NGOS ¥ TVA HOOT NEGWLAG FONVEVETO IaTION YaONAH] €SAONIA AG ATTINd | LIXE CNV AMIN ° ° _ WOW WOO? LV GUHSAd JI ANSE NIHLIM NayovIs oan ¥Od HOOT oO fe) os NdSOOT LON FIaNod ANY dou NIVHO ‘WAONL AG LDLOONAS ° ° - WO¥d WNOST LV GHHSNd JI WO} NIHLIA NEXOVIS LHI TI SI NOISNAL | NIVHO AATEC wyood gvO oO = = NOILVNYOAAC ANV oO 7 = NaSOOT LAN ANV Tv ° ° = (HOO ANTHOWN NOWd GaXOGHO) OLA ISNA ANV (mmmg'z weUY SSaT) TUM YONUTAOD « a a 7 (cxumg'oy weUy SSaT) TYLA NIVA: | (BULA %06 NIHLIM NSLANVIC LON | YONATAOD (Rood INIHOVK KOU CAXOTHD)GASVENOT LON WALANVIC | ONIGNTONI) (WOOd GNIHOWK NOYd CEIOTHO) TOvAVEE ANY | TdOw TAL ° ° = ‘KINGAT HLONGAIS AUSNSL Caddy oO ° = GRINS Nid Lilds % LON ianod | dow sTaMNL, dd0u oO = = CyaNSNA INANSAOK oO oO = NaSOOT LAN TIanod ANV SOVANIT (0018 HOLVO) ° ° = ‘CGHAASNE NOLVTIVISNE qa0u yonaaoa | aovo No AVGAL | SHLNOWG | HINOWT SNYGN INGNGDCAL ® SWGL HOMHO INlod NOHO | Siuvd NOLLYOOT ‘"WAUSLNI HOH12 "IVAMGLINI 3OHHO ° ° S GRUNSNA NOLVATEO HOUIMS ° ° 5 NaSOOT L104 GaTIVISNI ANV ‘INT 801 ° ° = ‘GaANSNG NOLLAAEO HOLS SINDUL ° ° = NSOOT L10€ GATIVISNI ANV ari aaddn | _sqIsNI (pOI0e #NIHLIM) Yadoud g i 7 YOOLA ONIGNVI % SOVO NIAKLAG SONTUSAAIG | THAT Hoots | YOOU oO °° fe} GaUNSNa ONIHOTT dANT NOLLAG ° ° ° ‘ATIVRUON CHLVEGdO NOLLAG HSNd Hsfd YOLVOIGNI| _ONIGNVT ° ° ° (@uOW YO 002) FONVUVATO ANV | GONVUVATO |LHDIGM YaLNN0D fe) fe} _ NSOOT LOG CATIVISNI ANV ° = = (axon Yo 002) ONVAVATO ANV NOISNAL ° = = (AIHLOOWS SAOW) KTUHIOUT CHTIVISNE HONUAAOD oO = = XTqIS1a GITIVISNI ONTddS Yadan ° ° = ‘GaaNSNA NVETO BOOT ud ° ° = NSOOT L10€ GHTIVISNI ANV tmiooads ° ° = ‘AIG GATIVISNI [HOLIMS OLOHd| — HOLIAS ° ° = GHUASNG NOLLVasdO | DNIGATONI | ONTIGAST ° ° = GGONGHA SVH FdOd NOLLOD f ° ° — | GaNIVREe aaON YO Z0S TIO ~ ATAU SI THAT TO MOLVORIaNT ° = = GGIND SAL WOU AONVARYOSIC SI HATH | ABTINd NOLLNAL oO ° om aDvavads AALNO ANV oO = = CaaNSNE LNIOd GaxXtt 3009 TIVL ° ° = (ANE NIHLUIM) ANVHLAYN dO AVA ANV | UALNNOD BHI ° ° = NGSOOT 10G GGTIVISNI ANV | DNIGNTONT | SOHS aainD oO O° - NdSOOT LTO CATIVISNI ANV YOLON Hood HOVO NO VAAT | SHINONE | HINOWT SNVGW INGWGOGNE SHUI YOTHO INIod HOUHO | Stave NOLLWOOT13 oop aouesqu9 souenug |e ony Joop a8eo % a8vo eaogy | aatsap Ayayes zourex08 prmosy| a9 aINTd 89 sob sqytour € | 305 aig uy | soop a%ea DINYNAC 289 89 AVAETON | OLOgsaaE | S108 ‘mo opin AvayNad | AVMINA | SNHava | ‘ouLsvO | 200 | Bevo we oon SINTHOVN auton aaoqy | rez opp syyjuow gt Stone yy aSueyoxe oor “qery s9uv pour sat ety) avaD di so9r osrds | 305 20321 auryouur aun ogras osrds |SNNOdNOD| VHdIV | syyuourg | woor worse Towing uvap | ooNNog |a0 SNHAVG| Toutsvo | sei 0'9 | sutyouN |J0 eseo twe9) “IO VAD NVSOMIMNE onsoo |l0 NoddIN| asunaat | Toursvo aoed =| euryoeur oun, 2 4,0 yueoqiqny Buyreysuy | Jo eueN ANVdN09 TIO Jo eureN,14 oop souvsqUD souwsyt nay Joop a8vo @ avo oaogy | aowap £ayes roureAo# punory 99 ost on gos 110 9 suuout € (3525 oy) uy| x00p a8ep oars | XAVaH 99 da WNNoL | gou-v |AvMouaAH| 10g 0 qvaanap | loud. | xauamod | TIGHS | DIasoHs | GNOWVId | seo | e800 7% Gort SNIHOVW yuBpem aa0qy | pred oprny “syquour aq Steno yy aBueyoxa “yeu OU er ‘oUNy} SAY YY ‘Toavaa veo o97T10 O9rdS | soy 1070] auryoot as avaD o9rda vivno | dso9v0-5 |aanT-4Vad| syyuou g | woos uworoesy qwagnao | aon | Nvuavas | TIaHS | DiaSOHS | GNOWVId | 461 O'9 | euTYoRN | Jo ese 19=9| TIO AVED ‘To Tango | GOW oss ‘igHs | 10 VMOHS | THSIGASLIN aoejd | euryoenr oun, 2 4,6 Supreysuy | Jo ourey, queorqny ANVdH09 TIO Jo ouren,Gear oil items & supply Recommended gear oil : Viscosity classification (ISO) est (40C) VG460 +Idemitsu Kosan Daffny Super Gear Oil f 460 + Cosmo Oil Cosmo Gear SE460 + Mitsubishi Oil Diamond Super Gear Lub SP460 + Others In case of gear oil supply. Look horizontally at oil gauge attached to gear box cover opposite to sheave. If oil is 10mm below the level if central mark, please supply gear oil slowly up to the level of central mark. Opening for gear oil supply16 Governor Safety Device (Drawing No.1) The elevator cage must be suspended by more than 9 wire ropes each of whitch is required to have asafety factor of more than 10 times according. to the Governmetal lams and regulations. Resulting in eliminating the possibility of failing condition. For some reason or other, if the elevator cage should overspeed, exceeding the rated speed, the governor switch will be operated, resulting in shutting off the electric circuit to the electric motor and operating the electromagnetic brake and then, shopping the cage. At the same time, the instantaneous safety device will be operated, resulting in getting a grip on guide raill and stopping the cage safely. Instantaneous safety device. ‘This device is used for elevators of which rated speeds are less than 45m/min. The governor switch is operated when the cage speed is less than 140% as fast as the rated speed, The instantaneour safety device is operated when it is less than 151% as fast as the rated speed. Description on mechanism By rotating centrifugal force of the governor machine sheave (), the weight @ is kicked up and the switch © is operated at 140% of the rated speed. When the centrifugal force is increased, resulting in reaching 150% or so, it will engage with the ratchet @,, resulting in pressing the wire rope against the stand @), and stopping the operation of the rope and operating the link device of the cage. The catch clamp © of the safely box (®) is lifted by means of a rod and it is pushed between the rail (@) and the said. 5m/aia te17 Adjudting method (3 workerd or more) (1) Stop the cage at the uppermost floor. (2) Climb on the cage from the emergency exit from the inside of the cage and turn off the change-over switch in the operating panel in the cage. (3) Remove the pin @) and make a joint plate (2 free. (4) With one worker remaind on the cage, turn the governor machine sheave @ with hand, Revolution must be in the direction that the joint plate @ descends in the elevating passage. (5) Apply a revolution counter to the governor machine sheave. Confirm that the governor switch is operated when the cage speed is, than 140% as fast as the reted speed, and that the gradual safety device is operated when it is less than 151% as fast as the rated speed. Adjustment must be made on the tensioning condition of spring @ (6) In this care, must be taken in such a way that the joint plate @ does not strike against the governor tension pulley installed at bottom part of elevating passage. (7) Reset the governor switch () as it was. (8) Connect the joint plate @ with the cage as it was. (9) Install the governor machine of which speed has been adjusted fully. Incidentally, at the time of inspection after completion, inspection is made. Accordingly, it is not required to adjust at normal maintenance and inspection time. (10) Turn on the change-over switch inside the operating panel on the cage. (11) Place the change-over switch inside the operating panel on the cage. at position MAN flom AUT. Then, push the button for descending and operate it to the lowermost floor. (12) Check the loosening of bolts at respective parts on the cage. (18) Lift the joint plate @ and check whether or not the lever isinterlocked smoothly. In this cage, if there is anyloss in connection of interlocking rod @) and joint lever (§, no catching operation will be carried out at both sides simultaneously, resulting in cauding a onessided operation. 400y/ain pe18 Accordingly, check it in such a way that there is no gap between joint lever (B and interlocking rod nut. Incidentally, fine adjustment can be made on the nuts located at the upper part of rod @) for the purpose of balancing at both sides when rod (8) is lifted simultaneously. (14) Open the entrance door at the lowermost floor from the inside of the cage. One worker must shortcircuit the door switch for entrance door. In this cage, close the cage door. (15) By two workers inaddition to those for the operation to be carriedon the cage, operate the elevator approx. 2.5m up by means of the push button switch inside the operating panel on the cage. (16) Carry out the descending operation by means of the push button inside the operating panel on the cage at the condition that joint plate @ is raised up with hand. (The door switch for entrance door must be kept shortcircuited.) (17) Simultaneously with biting of the catch clamp @) and stopping of the cage, release the push button and turn off the change-over switch inside the operating panel. (18) Go into the inside of pit and check the condition of the catch clamp ©. If oneside application condition should be caused, adjust it in such a manner as mentioned in item (13). (19) Shortcircuit the doorswitch for entrance once again and carry out the ascending operation of the cage. The governor catch clamp will be disconnected and returned. (20) Check the damage of the rail by the catch clamp in the inside of pit. If scratches are found. Equally both at right and left side of the rail, it will mean that the cage is caught normally. After inspection, correct the damage of the rail by means of a file. (21) Shortcircuit the door switch for entrance door at landing and descend the cage once again. Then, stop the cage approx. 1m above the entrance floor level at landing. Then, check the condition of the catch clamp. In this cage, turn off the change-over switch on the operating panel on the cage.19 (22) If one~side application effect should be recognized, make adjustment in cooperation with the worker located on the cade at that condition. (23) Supply oil to the respective parts (revoling parts of shaft.) (24) Close the entrance door after adjustment, place the change-over switch in operating panel on the cage to On flom OFF. Change over MAN to AUT. (25) Carry out the normal operation and confirm that there is nothing abnormal in operational condition. EXCHANGE METHOD FOR WIRE ROPE (1) Operate the cage and stop it at the uppermost floor. (2) Turn off the main switch on the control panel inside the machine room. (3) Open the entrance door at the uppermost and loermost floor by emergency key. (4) Open the brake for traction machine. (Another worker must insert the turning handle in the electric motor for prevention of revolution.) (5) Turn the turning handle for electric motor and descend the cage 2m from the uppermost floor (8) Provide a wood block at the lower part of the counterweight at inside of pit in the lowermost floor. (7) Turn the turning handle for electric motor and operate the cage in the ascending direction and ascend the cage until the wood block inside the pit comes in contact with the counterweight. (When the wood block comes in contact wuth the counterweight, a slipping phenemenon will develop at maine sheave and wire rope, resulting in heavy revolution of the turning handle.) (8) Employing a chain block, lift the cage frame from the upper part of the hoistway. (9) Secure it so that the governor pully can not revolved. (If the chain block should be disconnected or other unexpected accidents should becaused, it will stop the cage by means of the governor safety device immediately.)20 (10) Remove the wire rope. (11) The new wire rope length to be 200mm shorter than removed wire rope, (Extension of wire is considered.) (12) The stopping wire to be used at end of wire rope connecting to thimble rod. (13) Wire rope to be pass through the thimble rod (socket) with ring, and insert awedge into the ring. And then tighten wire rope inside of housing of thimble rod (socket) (14) Insert a cotter pin into cotter pin hole of wedge, this is for avoid ship~ out of wedge from housing. (15) To use wire clips at 2 location (see Drawing No.4) to catch wire rope. (16) The wire rope consist of... Diameter 12mm Structure 8 strands with 19 wires, center is hemp wire. Shearing stress, more than 5990 kg/cm’. Material Steel Remarks Hemp wire is included oil. (17) Provided wire rope both at cage and counterweight sides and make the tensioning condition fixed. (18) Remove the chain block hanging from the cage and rest the governor. (19) Release the brake of traction machine and turn the electric motor with turning handle, and then, descend the cage approx. 200mm or 300mm. Then, remove the wood block at underside of the counterweight. (20) Close the entrance door at the lowermost floor. (21) Ascend the cage and stop the machine in such a manner as (19) at the uppermost floor level. (22) Remove the brake release handle and motor turning handle. (23) Carry our the reciprocating operation between uppermost and lowermost floors automatically two or three times. Then, adjust the tensioning coundition of the wire rope in reference with item "MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF THE MACHINES AT THE UPPER PART OF THE CAGE”,(8) LIFTING ROD ASEC @ouve RAIL a B VIEW ial (6) CLAMP SHEAVE! 7) GRADUAL SAFETY BOX a1 4) RATCHET » SWITCH KEEPER (2 i 2S _CAGE|FLOOR — ee } Je ) WEIGHT GOVERNOR WIRE ROPE ¢8 == TENSION SHEAVE ~ ia i Es Governor Safety Device | Drawing.Not | ~WIRE ROPE, THIMBLE ROD LUBRICATOR GUIDE SHOE WEIGHT CASE GUIDE RAIL 22 ae == mele lg] Drawing.No223 GUIDE SHOE lg) Drawing.No3 | ~WIRE CLIP | = ~— ~ STOPER PIN WIREROPE WEDGE mt THIMBLEROD 24 i i i P i BS) = oe | Wire Rope ig] Drawing.No4DOOR MACHINE CONTROLLER MANUAL TYPE:DMC-0125 WARNINGS You are required to follow strictly to the undermentioned “WARNINGS” for the safe and correct use before operating. (1) The mis-connection the short circuit to the ground destroys apparatus. Therefore check the isolation of all wires from the ground (hul! ground) After checking enough the line of power supply the line of motor the line of input Please power on. (2) This is equipped with induction relay for error actions, but if this relay worked oftenly, it may cause short circuit in power transistor systems with heavy stress. So, please clear such cause off. (3) Amperage controller is damaged in the condition of do not short-circuit filled coil, armature coil. (4) Do not make mega~test absolutely because of use of semi-conductor. (5) To instal! then in better conditioned places avoiding high temperature, high humidity, vibration, dust and etc. (6) It is a matter of course to instal! in well-ventilated places because of radiation from machine, and besides to install wiring/code terminals of mechanics to be “BELOW” (7) Do not use any fuse out of specification. (8) Door machine controller is constructed with non-contact point circuit (excluding induction relay for over-flowing current), so required to cover mechanics with sheet in works. (9) To use insulated adjusting bar for turn of adjuster volume. (10) To set the volume of over-flowing current to the level of amperage of the motor. (11) Main cable/code supplying to door controller D1 D2 is required as thick as possible, o/wise, it may cause voltage down.VOLTAGE INPUT QUTPUT-VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM MOTOR MAIN CONTROL ELEMENT MAIN ELECTRICAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SPEED CONTROL VOLT CASE SIZE 26 SPECIFICATION AC100V+30%—15% 50/60Hz DC100V (at without Load /MAX.) SLOW UP—DOWN BY P.W.M SYSTEM DC MOTOR UPTO 200W POWER TRANSISTOR ARMATURE COIL SA FILLED COIL 0. BA DC12V(INSTALLED) ORDER CAN BE CONTROLLED WITH NON—VOLTAGE CONTACT OR NON—CONTACT CIRCUIT 260Wx290Tx120L27 Important DOOR CONTROLLER OVER-FLOWING ADJUSTMENT Motor-lock system may work on elevator door according to the some conditions. T/FORE, PLS adjust electric current adjusting volume after door adjustment. If not adjusted , it causes too much over-flow on motor-lock, and then short-cirot of power transistor at worst case. After adjustment, to confirm of amperage of motor or power-down. In this cage, PL lamp is ” LIGHTING” and this does not mean trouble on work/operation. 100W WOTOR | ————— 2008 woTOR Reversal operation is effective, although |ithograph re-operation wil! be performed several times and it will be stopped, once it locks a door. When locked in OPEN and CLOSE, in order to prevent damage by fire of a motor, and breakage of a controller, please stop operation immediately, and operate after removing an obstacle.EACH POSITION NAMES PL LAMP. SIGNAL INPUT COMMON c— ———. GROUND CON —_| a 28 BRAKING RESISTOR DOOR OPEN SIGN 21x DOOR OPEN SPEED REDUCING SIGN OSt AR DOOR CLOSE SIGN 22X {| DOOR CLOSE SPEED pa REDUCING SIGN csi RUNNING SIGN TC | RESET SIGN RST ERR OUTPUT ERR OOoeoNN) OOO} a 3 OVER-CURRENT ADJUSTER VOLUME ; LA ‘A_A2 ARMATURE. USE FI F2 FIELD USE D1 D2 ACIOOV INPUT 1 == FUSE 5A29 + DC MOTOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS FILLED COIL VOLTAGE ABT OV~100V_ (ADJSTBL) ON POWER-DOWN OF ABV. ABT OV~100V_— (ADJSTBL) ARWATURE COIL VOLTAGE, ABT OV~100V_ (ADJSTBL) ON POWER-DOWN OF ABV. ABT OV~ 15V_ (ADJSTBL) DYNAMIC BRAKE RESISTOR (INSTALLED) 85Q (FIX) + TURN OR TURN-OVER, WORK-UP, WORK-DOWN, INCLINATION ANGLE, WORK-UP LOW SPEED DRIVE, SPEED VARIETY SYSTEM. + SHOCK-REDUGING SYSTEM CIRCUIT ON TURN/TURN-OVER + MOTOR CONTROL SEQUENCE CIRCUIT INSTALLED, CONTACT OR NO- CONTACT SIGNAL CAN CONTROL MOTOR FREELY * WHEN OVER 15 SECONDS (or 45 SECOND) INTERVAL OF DOOR OPEN-CLOSE SIGNAL, IT CAN BE START AGAIN WITH POWER RE~SET AFTER CIRCUIT OFF. IT IS NECESSARY TO LEVEL UP APMERAGE A LITTLE HIGHER WHEN OPEN OR CLOSE BOTH DOORS (SIZED: 3 00 Om/mX3000m/m) WITH 200W CAPACITY MOTOR.30 «PROCEDURES BEFORE ADJUSTMENT OF DOOR CONROLLER The following procedures are important for avoiding immoderate systematic works of doors on adjusting, you are required to follow in order from A to 0. How to adjust direction of turn, open/close and slow-speed A 0SI-Distance of stop, CS1-Distance of stop to be within 25-30cm B In cage of small door, PLS set up below MID level of speed meter of open/close at start. C Tobe “ON” and GS1, then “ON” signal of 21X or 22x. To see direction of turn, condition of cam, and of slow speed on open/close. If turn is wrong direction, change contacts on Al,A2 terminal. If slow speed is faster, adjust it speed slower by turn to $ direction. + And, normalize OS1, CS1, put signals of 21X and 22X in, and then to adjust start of open/close, speed reducing curve, Hi-speed and Hi-speed field voltage. + Turn-over is required to brake right sided 100W follow resistor.31 + ADJUST OF DOOR CONTROLLER To set-up motor turn direction before adjust. To use insulated adjuster bar. GQ open start 2 OREN SPEED REDUCING CURVE CLOSE START @ CLOSE SPEED REDUCING CURVE ® CLOSE sLow spEEDg A) OPEN SLOW SPEED close HI speeD A @)opeN HI SPEED Te BIAS FIELD QQoren sias FieLo eisisielele a) TC BIAS ARMATURECH) CH OPEN BIAS ARMATURE geisislelele HI SPEED FIELD ¢¥ VOLTAGE o STANDARD LE * Adjust starts standard level position when motor turn direction set-upped. It is OK to complete set-up with slight adjust, but PLS refer to explanation of volumes of each positioning adjust, if need more exact set-up. %* Direct connection can load torque to door closed direction when door closed. When open to change inside of controller recommended to se at 50V of Te bias field volume |(7}| (at this positi of TC bias armature coil. n) And, to set at lower * Open bias, too, to set armature voltage at higher field level by judging weights. ID) %* Over~flow current adjust is to be set torque can be loose when motor-lock (important) .32 “HOW TO START WORK + 21X Sign ON Work-up with Hi-speed, + 081 sign ON Work-down with slow driving. + 21X Sign OFF Stop “slow” , load voltage to armature/field when opened door at MAX. 22X Sign ON Work-up with Hi-speed, + CSI sign ON Work-down with Hi-speed and slow driving. + 22K Sign OFF Stop slow close, load voltage slightly to armature/field when traveling sign on. “MANUALS OF EACH POSITION ADJUSTER VOLUME (Name of position is printed on board ) + Open start, close start, This volume up the voltage of armature coi! gradually when switch on 21X or 22X signals by adjusting curve of open, close work-up. Then speed up gradually to Hi-speed. S-direction up the speed slowly. + Open speed reducing curve, close speed reducing curve. This volume works for slow speed smoothly by turning to “slow” from sign-on of OSI-limit signal or CSi-limit signal for direction to “high” speed suddenly to slow. + Open Hi-speed, close Hi-speed. This volume works to set up MAX High speed no more High speed than set-up. Slow for S-direction, faster for F-direction. + TC bias field, TC bias armature, This volume works load voltage slightly to armature /field, lower for L-direction, higher for H-direction. + Open bias. Field, open bias armature. This volume works to load voltage to armature coil when door opened to MAX. Lower for L-direction, higher for H-direction. + Hi-speed field voltage. This volume is used for both open or close with adjusting of voltage of field when Hi-speed drive. Lower field voltage for L-direction, higher for H-direction. This field voltage influence to speed. Recommended within 40V-100V“WORKING TIME It is abort 10 seconds, even if big door, to take times for door open or close. lf any objection within short time, motor will be locked and overflowed. PLS time-set in shortest to avoid damage of motor-control ler and to protect motor. A setup for 15 seconds and 45 seconds is possible. working Time [878] 0] s (15 second) [¢ BZ]. (45 second) + HOW TO USE OVER-FLOW CURRENT VOLUME Not listed name in print board. Same type volume located below. This is electric current contro! adjuster of armature coil of motor. PLS adjust to 2A level if 100W motor, or to 3A MAX if 200W motor. Some time happens current contro! to start work in cage sudden start of open-start, close-start, on this time PLS adjust to moderate by turn to H-direction slightly or by adjusting work-up. If electric current contro! once worked in adjusting, PL~lamp will light and this is warning over-load. And at same time, ERR sign on. If adjusted completely and to perfect, PLS power off and again power on. If do so, ERR, sign-on and PL-lump lighting will be off.34 RECOMMENDED FOLLOWING CIRCUIT BECAUSE INPUT POSITION OF CONTROL IS CONSISTED OF PHOTO COUPLERS. Circuit for contacts com (~) 21X (OPEN SIGN) OS1 (OPEN SPEED REDUCING SIGN) 22X (CLOSE SIGN) CS1 (CLOSE SPEED REDUCING SIGN) TC (SIGN IN RUNNING) RST (RESET SIGN) ERR OUT ay | ERR CONTACT CAPACITY : DC3OV 1A35 BLOCK DIAGRAM ACTOOV bi Dt a 2K 081 22K cI Te RET ERR —E— LiL necrieten| | COWTROL |) conrroL [tei DIGITAL 170 LolPL LAMP power (1) ["] POWER (2) conTroL [SV SET. vR — > POmeR (3) MICROCONTROLLER rs cS x tal ose |rwme PWM 1 tev DRIVE DRIVE AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER Beisov SWI CHING SWicHING TwRW/ \ TURNOVER voutage |, aRI0GE DETECT CONTROL oveR CURRENT ‘OVER OURREN verecr. [>] erect Fi F2 Al Aa FIELD COIL USE ARMATURE COIL USE36 Brake Adjustment Procedures for Traction Machine Model KTM-30FB(35F) 1. Adjusting the brake [CAUTION] (Please refer to figure 4) ‘When spring is lengthened by loosening the double nut, the “cage” will move suddenly up or down. Therefore, do not adjust the brake unless cage or counter weight is secured in place. (1) Loosen double nuts @ and @ at the external brake spring by turning them counterclockwise. [KTM-30FB, KTM-160 types are that spring cover © of inside proceed screw is compatible with nut.] (2) Adjust the length of brake spring @ by turning adjusting nut © until the specified rate of braking control is achieved.(Please refer to table 3 for a connection between braking torque and length of spring) (8) Tighten the assembly by turning nut @ clockwise.2. Adjusting the operating stroke of the brake lever. (The clearance between brake drum and lining) [CAUTION] Cage shall be secured in place during adjustment. Due to the prevention of danger. (1) Disconnect ((OFF)) power to brake coil. (2) Loosen adjusting bolt © of braking stroke and nut ® counterclockwise. (3) Turn brake releasing lever @ counterclockwise or clockwise until it is full for push rod to be salient. Turn adjusting bolt @ clockwise until it contacts to head of the push rod. Then it one more turn and tighten lock nut ©. (4) Adjust other stroke of the brake lever as item (3). (5) Energize ([ON}) power to brake coil. (6) Measure the clearance between brake drum (coupling) @ and brake shoe (brake lining) @ along the entire surface of brake lining. Read the clearance value by inserting a thickness gauge into the space. Standard values of clearance: 0.2 to 0.3mm, initial38 Brake control assembly Figure-4 8 L 6 g E Ny G —@ 3 EP i 2 4 Length of spring oo when it adjusts Sy 1 Eh Oy WL) 1 brake spring 8+ lock nut 2+ stud bolt 9-- stroke adjusting bolt 3+ Jock nut 10- brake lining 4 Jock nut 1 brake drum 5+ spring control 12--brake releasing lever 6" push rod T+ brake coil the best clearan: @ shoe is well worn within the range of 0.05 to. 0.1mm. ‘The clearance between brake drum @ and brake shoe @ shall be the same sides. Avoid leaving too large a clearance: doing so may cause the brake to emit a very loud noise as it operates.39 (1) Disconnect (OFF) power to brake coil. (8) When the clearance is within the standard range, lock nut ® of adjusting bolt © clockwise to tighten it so that the adjusting bolt is secured in place. (9) If the clearance is outside the standard range, adjust in accordance with steps (10) to (13) until the clearance falls within the side range. (10) When the right-hand and the left-hand clearances are greater than the standard values: (@) Loosen lock nut ® counterclockwise. (b) Loosen the adjusting bolt © corresponding to the side with the smaller clearance slightly counterclockwise. (© Energize [(on)] power to brake coil @ and measure the clearance between brake drum (coupling) @ and brake shoe (brake lining) @ within the standard range. (@) Disconnect ((OFF) to brake coil. (©) If the clearance remains outside the standard range, repeat to adjust until the clearance is within the standard range. (1) When the right-hand and the left-hand clearances are lower than the standard values: (a) Loosen lock nut @) counterclockwise. (b) Loosen the adjusting bolt @ corresponding to the side with the smaller clearance slightly counterclockwise, (© Energize [(on)] power to brake coil @. and measure the clearance between brake drum (coupling) @ and brake shoe (brake lining) @ within the standard range. (@) Disconnect (OFF) to brake coil. () If the clearance remains outside the standard range, repeat to adjust until the clearance is within the standard range.40 (12) When the clearance on one side only is outside the standard range: (a) Loosen lock nut ® of brake lever on the side of outside the standard range counterclockwise. (b) Turn adjusting bolt @ clockwise so that it increases the clearance. In contrary case turn adjusting bolt @ counterclockwise so that it decreases the clearance. (©) Energize [(on)] power to brake coil © and measure the clearance between brake drum (coupling) @ and brake shoe (brake lining) @ within the standard range. (@ Disconnect ([OFF) to brake eoil. (©) If the clearance remains outside the standard range, repeat to adjust until the clearance is within the standard range. (1) When the clearances are within the standard range, turn lock nut ® of adjusting bolt © to tighten it so that the adjusting bolt @ is secured in place. (II) Operate low speed, in order to confirm that brake drum (coupling) ® and brake shoe (brake lining) (@ scrape each other. If over-scraping noise is occurred, increase the clearance. [CAUTION] 1, After making the above brake adjustment, make the following inspections before resuming traction machine operations: (2) Check to confirm that none of the tools and instruments employed in the adjustment has been inadvertently left inside the machine. (2) The power to brake coil © must be disconnected [OFF]. (3) The “cage” previously secured for the adjustment must be released. 2. When you operate traction machine with adjusting the brake, the “cage” will move suddenly up or down. Therefore, the “cage” is secured in place.41 3. The connection between rate of brake control and length of spring The table 3-1,table 3-2 are shown the connection between rate of brake control and length of spring for each types of the traction machine. Length of spring is design value according as the fixed torque of the motor. KTM-30FB Type L=Length of spring when it adjusts (mm) table 3-1 Motor Rate of brake control Motor capacity Torque 400 125% 150 Kw ‘pm 5.5 1500 22.5 21 20 75 1500 20.5 19 7 Setting value in our factoryKTM-35F Type, KTM-38F Type L=Length of spring when it adjusts (mm) table 3-2 Motor Rate of brake control Mctreecly i too | 125" | 159 75 1500 60 585 57 95 1500 ET 56.5 55 1" 1500 57 555 | 535 15 1500 sas | 52 | 495 Setting value in our factory 42CONTROL PANEL (10-CPU ++ +Drawing symbol) 3 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC-A Replacement of Battery M9008 or M8007 turns ON when the voltage of the battery for program backup and Power interruption compensation falls. Even if this special relay turns ON, the contents of the program and the power interruption compensation function are not lost immediately. However, if the ON state is overlooked, the PC data contents may be lost. Special auxiliary relays M9006 and M9007 are switched ON to indicate that the battery has reacted the lifetime (minimum) indicated in Table 10.3 and it must be replaced if continued use of the power interruption RAM and /or data backup is required. ‘The following sections give the battery service life and the battery changing procedure. 1 Service life of battery Table 10.3 shows the service life of the battery. Table 10.3 Battery life Battery ite Battery life (Total power interruption time) [HF] (Guaranteed value ‘Actual service ‘After MSO0S or CPU model (aN) ‘value (TYP) (M9007 Is turned ON. “AISIHOPULSA) ‘AISHOPU 4000 20000 100 AQSHCPU, (ABSHOPU-ST "2200 12000 6 * The actual service value indicates a typical life time and the guaranteed value indicates the minimum life time. Preventive maintenance is as follows : (1) Even if the total power interruption time is less than the guaranteed value in the above table, change the battery after four to five years. (2) When the total power interruption time has exceeded:the guaranteed value in the table above and M8006 has turned ON, change the battery. Battery specifications Model er ASBAT Normal votage 3eV0e Guaranteed ie 5 years ‘Apoliation For IC-RAM memory backup and power interruption compensation function [External dimensions fam Gry) | 916 (0.69) x 20 (1.18)44 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC-A Battery replacement procedure When the service life of the battery has expired, replace the battery using the following procedure : Even ifthe battery is removed, the memory is backed up by a capacitor for some time, However, ifthe replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value shown in the following table, the contents of the memory may be lost. Therefore, replace the battery as quickly as possible. Table 10.4 Backup time by capacitor ———_] Capacitor backup time (Minutes) Guaranteed value | Actually eppled value "Tam OFF the PC poner ipa, (un) vey L 3 6 ‘pen te cover on hart of the AoSCPU. Remove he od tater tom the older an rove hs eas From ‘he aad damp. Then evo te Iaed eannecor rom he contacter Inert pew batry rote holder Inthe caret efantation and cane oct the oa wires otha conactr. {eamp haa with toad lam) (The rec ina is poliv, an he Due one negate) AisHcPU ‘lake in coveron the Hono he AnSCPU, “Tum ON te PC power upp Testor NaC08 an check45 ROLLING SWITCH: PITCHING SWITCH Rolling switch or, when pitching switch works, an elevator is moved to the nearby floor, and it stops under the condition that the door of cage is opened, For about 15 minutes, an elevator stops, and it reverts automatically after that, and usually comes back for the operation.MITSUBISHI TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER FR-As5s00 HIGH FUNCTION LOW ACOUSTIC NOISE FR-A520-0.4K to 55K(-NA) FR-A540-0.4K to 55K(-NA) — INSTRUCTION MANUAL - MITSUBISHI ELECTRICThank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter. This instruction manual gives handling information and precaution for use of this equipment. oe Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum. Please forward this manual to the end user. This section is specifically about safety matters ‘Do not attempt to instal, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through this instruction ‘manual and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this instruction manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION". Assumes that Incorect handing may cause hazardous condona, reaiing fh ZXwarnine | seat or severe ry ZA cAUTION | ASSumes het incorect handing may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only. Note that the CAUTION leve! may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safely.SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. Electric Shock Prevention 4\, WARNING "@ While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. You may get an electric shock, © Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed high- voltage terminals or charging part of circuitry and get an electric shock. © If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock. © Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more atleast 10 minutes and check for the presence of any residual voltage with a tester etc, © Use class 3 or higher earthing method to earth the inverter. © Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do the work Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured Operate the switches with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock eee 2. Fire Prevention Z\CAUTION ‘@ Mount the inverter on an incombustible surface. Installing the Inverter directly on or near a combustible ‘surface could lead to a fire. © Ifthe inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire, © Do not connect the resistor directly to the DC terminals P, N. This could cause a fire. 3. Injury Prevention ZA\CAUTION | ‘© Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to prevent damage, etc. © Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, damage, etc. may occur. © Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage, ete. © After the inverter has been operating for a relativly long period of time, do not touch the inverter as it may be hot and you may get bumt4. Additional instructions Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, ete. (1) Transportation and installation ZA\CAUTION ‘@ When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury. Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the inverter. Install according to the information in the Instruction Manual Do not operate ifthe inverter is damaged or has parts missing Do not hold the inverter by the front cover; it may fall off Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter. Check the inverter mounting orientation Is correct. Prevent screws, wire fragments, conductive bodies, oil or other flammable substances from entering the inverter. Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact. Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions: 0°C to +50°C (non-freezing) (10°C to +40°C when the dust-protection structure attachment is used) ‘Ambient humidity | 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature _| -20°C to +65°C* ‘Ambience Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oll mist, dust and dit) Max. 1000m above sea level, 5.9mis? {0.6G} or less (conforming to JIS 0914) “Temperatures applicable for a short fime, e.g. in transit, Ambient temperature Environment Attitude, vibration (2) Wiring ZA\CAUTION © Do not fit capacilve equipment such as power factor correction capacitor, noise fier or surge suppressor to the output of the inverter. © The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the motor. (3) Trial run ZA\CAUTION Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by sudden start-up. (4) Operation Z\CAUTION ‘© When you have chosen the rety function, stay away from the equipment as it will restart suddenly after an alarm stop. © The [STOP] key is valid only when function setting has been made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately. © Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart the motor suddenty © ‘The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment. Do not modify the equipment. A-3AXCAUTION ‘© The electronic overcurrent protection does not guarantee protection of the motor from overheat. © Donot use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. © Use a noise fiter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected, © Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power harmonics from the inverter may heat/damage the power capacitor and generator. © When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, it should be insulation-enhanced or surge voltages suppressed. Surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. ‘© When parameter clear or all clear is performed, each parameter retums to the factory setting. Re-set the required parameters before starting operation, © The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine. © In addition to the inverter’s holding function, install a holding device to ensure safety. ‘© Before running the inverter which had been stored for a long period, always perform inspection and test operation, (5) Emergency stop ZA\CAUTION © Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions ifthe inverter fails. (6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement ZAXCAUTION © Do not carry out a megger (Insulation resistance) test on the contro! circuit ofthe inverter. (7) Disposing of the inverter Z\CAUTION © Treat as industrial waste. (8) General instructions Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a cover, or partially ‘open. Never run the inverter like this. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.CONTENTS ea ee) ey ; neraNCaTon swore a a 7 2.4 Installation + 2.4.4 Instructions for installation « 2.2. Wiring 2.2.4 Terminal connection diagram 2.2.2 Wiring of the main circuit 2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit: 2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector: 2.2.8 Connection of stand-alone option units 2.2.6 Design information - 2.3 Other wiring 2.3.1 Power harmonics “+ 2.3.2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines - 2.3.3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques 2.3.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures ~ 2.3.5 Inverter-driven 400V class motor = 2.3.6 Peripheral devices --+ 2.3.7 Instructions for compliance with the UL and CSA standards - 2.38 Instructions for compliance with the European standards Porn ee 3.1 Pre-Operation Information «+ +40 8.4.1 Davies and pars tobe repeed fr operation +40 3.1.2 Power on +++ +++ +42 8.4.9 Parameter check = +42 3.2 Operation=- +48 3.2.1 Pre-operation checks +48 3.2.2 External operation mode (Operation using external input signals) +49 +50 3.2.3 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04)) 532.4 Combined operation mode (Operation using the external input signals and PU) 51 SRS a eZ oe RAMETERS Ce ee 4.1 Parameter List“ 62 +88 4.2 Parameter Function Details ---~pRofectiveFUNGTIONS 0 ee] 5.1 Errors (alarms) +++ no 166 5.1.4 Error (alarm) definitions « settee 166 5.1.2 Coespondences between digital and actual characters = 169 8.1.3 Alarm code output +++ aoa 170 5.1.4 Resetting the inverter - 170 5.2 Troubleshooting ++ +++» octten 17 5:21 Checking to operation panel pay a lam sop « 171 6.2.2 Faults and check points « : 172 5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection: 174 5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection 5.3.2 Check items + 5.3.3 Periodic inspection 5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger: 5.3.5 Pressure test « 5.3.6 Replacement of parts + 174 174 174 175: 175 178 5.37 Inverter replacement 170 5.3. Meaoutement of main cre votages,curens and power pero) [esiteirications| 71 ae 6.4 Standard Specifications 6.1.1 Model specifications +++ 6.1.2 Common specifications 6.1.3 Outline drawings « 182 162 104 7.4 Option List 7.1.1 Stand-alone options 7.4.2 Inboard dedicated options Appendix 1 Data Code List Appendix 2 List of Parameters Classified by Purposes of Use :- 193 + 198 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE This chapter gives the basic "outline" of this product. Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the equipment. 1.1 Pre-Operation Information ++++++++** 1.2 Basic Configuration -- + 1.3 Structure «+++++++* + DU Operation panel (FR-DUO4) Inverter Mitsubishi transistorized inverter FR-A500 series + Pr. 7 | PU Operation panel (FR-DUO4) and parameter unit reun4) i i Parameter number + PU operation + External operation + FR-A200E Operation using both the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUO4) and Operation using the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PU04) Operation using the control circuit signals Combined operation CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 | INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 3 | OPERATION CHAPTER 4 | PARAMETERS external operation uubishi transistorized inverter FR-A200 series series. CHAPTER 5 | PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 6 | SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 7 | OPTIONS APPENDICES.1.1 Pre-Operation Information 1.1.1 Precautions for operation Incorrect handling might cause the inverter to operate improperly, its life to be reduced considerably, or at the worst, the inverter to be damaged. Handle the inverter property in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual to use it correctly This manual is written for the FR-ASOO series transistorized inverters. For handling information on the parameter unit (FR-PU04), inboard options, stand-alone options, etc., refer to the corresponding manuals. (4) Unpacking and product check Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact. 4) Inverter type Capacity plate Rating plate MITSUBISHI mere Se" FR-A520-0.4K mere ype FR-A520-0.4K/ Fane -rrateaio mero eapaciy 7 | us cutting —a} oe 2) Accessory Instruction manual Ifyou have found any discrepancy, damage, etc., please contact your sales representative. (2) Preparations of instruments and parts required for operation Instruments and parts to be prepared depend on how the inverter is operated. Prepare equipment and parts as necessary. (Refer to page 40.) (3) Installation To operate the inverter with high performance for a long time, install the inverter in a proper place, in a correct direction, and with proper clearances. (Refer to page 7.) (4) Wiring Connect the power supply, motor and operation signals (control signals) to the terminal block. Note that incorrect connection may damage the inverter and peripheral devices. (See page 12.)1.2 Basic romnguration 1.2.1 Basic configuration ‘The following devices are required to operate the inverter. Proper peripheral devices must be selected and correct connections made to ensure proper operation. Incorrect system configuration and connections can cause the inverter to operate improperly its life to be reduced considerably, and in the worst case, the inverter to be damaged. Please handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual. (For connections of the peripheral devices, refer to the corresponding manuals.) Namo Bescription Use the power supply within the permissible Power supply | power supply specifications of the inverter (Refer to page 26.) Earth leakage | The breaker should be selected wi Care ccreultbreaker | since a large inrush current (ELE) or no-fuse | flows in the inverter at power on. (Refer to breaker (NF8) | page 36.) ‘The magnetic contactor need not be Magretis provided, When installed, do not use I oo No arsine inet. ight reduce me) e) (Refer to page 36.) iit “The reactors must be used when the power factor is to be improved or the inverter Is Reactors Installed near a large power supply system (1000KVA or more and wiring dstanco within 10m), Make selection carefully + The inverter We i lnluenced by ambient temperature. The ambient temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range This must be noted especially when the Inverters installed in an enclosure. (Refer Inverter to page 7.) * Incorect wiring might lead to inverter damage. The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main cicuit to protect them from noise. (Refer to page 8) Devices Do not connect @ power capacior, surge ‘connected to the | suppressor or radio noise output filer othe output side. To prevent an elect shock, alvays ground oe the motor and inverter. Ji Suppression Guideline The "harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" was issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry in September, 1994. This guideline applies to the FR- ‘A520-0.4K to 3.7K. By connection of the power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL), this product conforms to the "harmonic suppression technique for transistorized inverters (input current 20A or less)" set forth by the Japan Electrical Manufactures’ Association. 21.3 Structure 1.3.1 Appearance and structure (1) Front view (2) Without front cover PU comacee (Provide wy motley conan (Feruser Rots ss) Oost pnal (R.OUDH) essa ck yp ny emer compare at rit (oath ack) i {bans ten meuing postin | ~via po avr roten oo — Eee *7.5K or less inverters are equipped with an inboard brake resistor.rms 3.2 _Removal and reinstallation of the front cover FR-A520-0.4K to 11K, FR-A540-0.4K to 7.5K «Removal 11) Hold both sides of the front cover top and push the front cover down. 2) Hold down the front cover and pull it toward you to remove. (The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PUO4) on.) ‘+ Reinstallation 1) Insert the catches at the bottom of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter. 2) Using the catches as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter. Note: When the operation panel is mourted and the front cover is removed, remove the operation pane! before reinstalling the front cover. FR-A520-15K to 22K, FR-A540-11K to 22K + Removal 41) Remove the installation screw at top of the front cover. 2) Hold both ends of the front cover top. 3) Pull the front cover toward you to remove. (The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUO4) on.) + Reinstallation 1) Insert the catches at the front cover bottom into the sockets of the inverter. 2) Using the catches as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter. 3) Fix the front cover with the top sorew. Note: When the operation panel is mounted on the front cover removed, remove the operation panel before reinstalling the front cover.Cama FR-A520-30K to 55K, FR-A540-30K to 55K * Removal 1) Remove the front cover mounting screws. « Reinstallation 1) Fix the front cover with the mounting screws. Note: 1. Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. 2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front cover, check the serial number to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed,OUTLINE 3.3. Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel To ensure safety, remove and reinstall the operation panel after switching power off. * Removal Hold down the top button of the operation panel and pull the operation pane! toward you to remove, Reno Roatan To reinstall, insert straight and mount securely. + Reinstallation using the connection cable 1) Remove the operation panel 2) Disconnect the modular jack type relay connector. (Place the disconnected modular jack type relay connector in the ‘modular jack type relay connector compartment.) esr yp any connecter usa ype ly mec cagrinert " 3) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector of the inverter and the other end into the operation panel. Note: Install the operation panel only when the front cover is on the inverter.MEMOCHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter gives the basic “installation and wiring" of this product. Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the equipment. 2.1 Installation --+++++ss+see reer eee eee ee seen 7 2.2 Wiring: =~ af 2.3 Other wiring CHAPTER 1 | OUTLINE CHAPTER 2 Pas CHAPTER 3 | OPERATION CHAPTER 4 | PARAMETERS CHAPTER 5 | PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 6 | SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 7 | OPTIONS APPENDICES2.1. Installation Seas 2.1.1 Instructions for installation 1) Handle the unit carefully The inverter uses plastic parts. Handle it gently to protect it from damage. Also, hold the unit with even strength and do not apply too much strength to the front cover alone. 2) Install the inverter where itis not subjected to vibration. Note the vibration of a cart, press, etc. 3) Note on ambient temperature ‘The inverter life is under great influence of ambient temperature. In the place of installation, ambient temperature must be within the permissible range (~10°C to +50°C). Check that the ambient temperature is within that range in the positions shown in figure 3). 4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface. The inverter will be very hot (max. about 10°C). Install it on a non-combustible surface (e.g. metal). Also Jeave sufficient clearances around the inverter. 5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity. ‘Avoid places where the inverter is subjected to direct sunlight, high temperature and high humicity 6) The amount of heat generated in an enclosure can be reduced considerably by placing the heat sink outside the enclosure. Note: 1. Use the option (FR-A5CNEID) for installation. The mounting area should be cut to the panel cutting dimensions. 2. The cooling section outside the enclosure has the cooling fan. Do not use the inverter in any environment where it is exposed to waterdrops, oil mist, dust, etc. 7) Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt, etc. Install the inverter in a clean place or inside a "totally enclosed” panel which does not accept any suspended matter. 8) Note the cooling method when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. ‘When two or more inverters are installed or a ventilation fan is mounted in an enclosure, the inverters and ventilation fan must be installed in proper positions with extreme care taken to keep the ambient temperatures of the inverters below the permissible value. If they are installed in improper positions, the ambient temperatures of the inverters will rise and ventilation effect will reduce. 9) Secure the inverter with bolts vertically Install the inverter on an installation surface securely and vertically with screws or bolts.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3) Note on ambient temperatures |4) Clearances around the inverter 8) For installation in enclosure Vern aoa 7A (ta bv ro | a | ¥ (Corectvaree) (hearer) Potion of Veron Fan (4) Wiring c ling (22K or less) 1) When cable conduits are not connected Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover with nippers or a cutter before running the cables. © © Ot— <} WARNING Do not remove the protective bushes. Othenwise, the cable sheathes may be scratched by the wiring cover edges, resulting in a short circuit or ground fault, 2) When cable conduits are connected Remove the corresponding protective bushes and connect the cable conduits. SSo> 8E82.2 Wiri INSTALLATION AND. WIRING: 2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram © son creat emit O cnt toutes (© Cnt eet out tit pee —a 24vo6 pow opt seers easter conan chp ‘Cota rpa cman aca)? Amgee conno ce eec ee eenenrennnn safes none Faves omp whan ig FR-ABR Fea tten et STF ‘an sting slacton STOP ‘em statin vetoad nan cotetr out requneytaton (emcees) | oa oral opt (wentanINSTALLATION AND WIRING 1 of ci Sma [ Fama Tass th Saal score owe sey Ken ess OIE ONC WONT ReT ao roeeew _the high power factor converter (FR-HC). 73, Ca acoso suas a Ts i coma ta a ont sph ons WaT To an a Saya Rist Lae ‘alarm output or when using the high power factor converter (FR-HO), rove the jumpers it from terminals RR and $-81 and apply external power to these terminals ala colon | Savon Bont fom ics PRPC ab cote Bs ol Baa eae ieee ere coreioce (FR-ABR) across terminals P-PR. cance Catt pl FR EU wats WAL poner a COMGTOT FACTOR Fo eo een 2 factor converter (FR-HC)._ EE CCCOLOM i Domacer commen | meng att Poe SE arb comes aisa Ta PPR Tay RT, ape [Butinbakecteat | Rina cate trols er eres vein For gunn irr chasis Mast be carhe (2) Description of control cir¢ inals “yg [Sarton ‘asian rain be STF appa Oca var tae anTuNTSTO [When SF ee ee STF a rae [programmed operation mode. (Turn on to start and tum off to Jare tumed on et irre, ‘Tum on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and tum itotf to |e SP STR Reverse rotation start a command is stop. given. arp | SSASBSI Trin ne STOP sal wc ta sting teat Sa Use the RH, A and RL signals as appropriate to select multiple RH, RM, AL. |Multtepeed selection | 250.0 2| w caocaoa| Tron te JOG sgnala sled og opetaon Tao stig] — rout tein gos 406 mode selection | Jog operation can be performed wit the star signal (STF or STA), | function selection 3 rumen the RT sfral esl to second acoleraton” (er te0%0 5 ‘Second acceleration’ | deceleration time. When the second functions such as "second | Pr. 186) change Alta éeceeraton time [toque boot and second VF (base frequen) trcons have termine! eons ze selection been sot, thase functions can also ba selected by turning on the a i sina 8 a Tom on ha HAS agra tis Tongro ep vero a E| o|MRS Output stop Used to shutoff the inverter output to bring tha motor to_a stop by the magnetic brake. : = Used eset toprotectve eeu acvatd. Tun onthe RES signal fr ore hen 01 alps [rma rs tonto Slo Soran npunsaaion|O eno AU Sigal item HOTTY GBS OPTRA] ag th the 4-20mADC traquoncy sotng signal function selection puomatis raatan aar| With tio CS signal on, restart can be made automatically when ha] er tag 19 pr eS teemenecee eens” [Bower ostored afer an instantaneous power fale. Nota that | 36 Change, instantanaous Powe" | iis operation requires restart parameters tobe set. When the | aoe invertor i shipped from the factory itis sett disallow restart. a [Contactingut [Common to the contact input terminals and terminal FM. Common output terminal for common (snk /24V0C 0.1A powor (PC terminal) [28VDG power and | When transistor output (open colector out), euch as programmable control, is fextoral translator | connected, connect the exiamal power supply common for transistor output to this, PC Jeommon terminal to provent a fault caused by leakage current. This terminal can be used as a [Contact input 2AVDC, 0.18 power output When source logic has been selected, ths terminal sarv [common (source) “_|as a contact input common, 10INSTALLATION AND WIRIN Tape [Sb —ormra nae Desert ne TD, prs aT —] Wt fen so PRT regan sting [sunt oma conned ne sect ats coma to ‘emral 10 [Porersippy [506 uit it naa comida tein 1, cane fe : gt pesto anal g By eta T STOC OTS TOV he ss ut essen & RACRTTTAT al =| 2 [Fequeersetra [fersay ano se popotnal Sie aterm toto VDC (by ati) and ile ato) St "ov00 tam te opensonpaa neste oko. Max porasti eta ; ov 2/3 requency sulting | 8Y entering 4 To 20mADG, the maximum Output requency is reached al 20mA and UO) B]E) —«—[FRoammcrseuea Tot repair Ts ht sg vald oy nes the AU aa eon. np : rene 200 Ma somber oA & ‘By entering 0 to +SVDC 0 to +10VDC, this signal is added to the frequency setting 1 [Asai teasney | stna oftmina 2 or Sich betveon nto 510 ag ost0VBS coy sting ati) fom te operton pel np ens i0, Ha permission tae anu TS | C e ST TT 6) SRT TO autommon” [aM Gensteats hae oe eral GA HSE al a SUB Doe 3 sopra einer proc tron aca 3 amour | rovne dan 30vOC 628 Au: dcr 8 8. 8 entry acs 0, ena coinay some Bo (giscontinity across AC), Switched low when the inverter output Frequency equal to or higher than the starting frequency (factory set to 0.5Hz, variable, oe ‘avert running | Switched high during stop or OC dynamic brake operation"2. Permisabeoad 24VD¢ 0.18. put termina Shih ow when tho ouput Fanuandy has Yeahed win 70%) tuncton selection fhe et Fequeny (actor eating, varie). Sitch igh |r. 190 to Pr: | 82 |Urtetemencr [cng ecataton, decdaon oto, Pamissistond | 8) change 3 2avDC 0.18 terial anctons ai Soe on i a pear non eT Ta B18] cL Jovetosdatarm | prventon tobe activated, Sched high when stl prevention fs 213 reset"2, Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A. 3/°}— 5 [intananaous power | Sted ow when instaniaroous powet Talia of undaneTaGe a fale protection ie acvated"2,Perisab oad 24VOC 0.14 Switched ow wen the out fequonc has reached or xcnaded FU | Frequency detection ine detection equoney at as apropata, Sted hgh when below he detection requengy'2, Permissible fod 24VDC 0.18 se __|OREREBIEGET CUBA | crn tothe RUN, SU, OL IPF and FU terminals aka seing of olpa To 3 Jone seeced rom 16 Froquency tye eee montoring tems, such as Permissible load curent mA, ouput fequency, soup 14d0 puiseslnc Sle al he out sionals Fair eoting of ett am g Proportional tothe magntude Freqency E] AM [Anatoa sonal ouput | cach inning er Outpt signal Oto Y0v0C Peis oad cute mA Commision ASS | PU connector With the operation panel connector, communication can be made through RS-486. Conforming Standard : EIA Standard RS-485 ‘Transmission format _* Mutirop link Communication speed: Max, 19200 baud ratos vera length 500m “1: Terminals PR and PX ate provided for the FR-AS20-0.4K to 7.5K, FR-AS40-0.4K to 7.5K, *2: Low indicates that the open collector outputting transistor is on (conducts). High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct). 1INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 7 1) Use insulation-sleeved terminals for the power supply and motor cables 2) Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover when running the cables. (22K or less) 3) Power must not be applied to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter, Otherwise the inverter will be damaged 4) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. AWways keep the inverter clean, 5) Use thick cables to make a voltage drop of 2% or less. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. 6) The overall wiring length should be 500m max. Especially for long distance wiring, the overcurrent protection may be misactivated or the devices connected to the output side may misoperate or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitance of the wiring. Therefore, the maximum overall wiring length should be as indicated in the following table. (When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, the total wiring length should be within the indicated value.) Tnvorior Capacity ome 0. 75K Tek ermore Norow acousic noise mod. 300m 500m 00m Low acoustic noise mode. 200m 300m B06 Overall wiring length (1.5K or more) 7) Connect only the recommended optional brake resistor between the terminals P and PR. These terminals must not be shorted 8) Electromagnetic wave interference ‘The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which may interfere with the ‘communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional radio noise fiter (for use in the input side only) or FR-BSFO1 or FR-BLF line noise filter to minimize interference 9) Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise fiter (FR-BIF option) in the output side of the inverter. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are installed, immediately remove them. (Connect the FR-BIF optional radio noise fier in the input side.) 12INSTALLATION AND WIRING 410) When rewiring after operation, make sure that the POWER lamp has gone off, and when more than 10 seconds have elapsed after power-off, check with a tester that the voltage is zero. After that, start rewiring ‘work. For some time after power-off, there is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor. 11) Use the space on the left-hand side of the main circuit terminal block to run the cable for connection of the control circuit power terminals R1, S1 of the FR-A520-11K. tt Bowe ene RL ep tp ee |e] soem) Notes on Grounding ‘+ Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be grounded (200V class...class 3 grounding, grounding resistance 1002 max.), (400V class... special class 3 grounding, grounding resistance 100 or less.) + Use the dedicated ground terminal to ground the inverter. (Do not use the screw in the case, chassis, etc.) * The ground cable should be as thick as possible. Its gauge eomrean ee so) should be equal to or larger than those indicated in the | Motor Capacity |soqyrcises aga cleas following table. The grounding point should be as near as [SW oriess 35. 2 possible tothe inverter to minimize the ground cable length, [ SSK/.S4W ss 35 * Ground the motor on the inverter side using one wire of the Freer a = 4-core cable. 25.558. 38 2 13INSTALLATION AND WIRING (2) Terminal block layout In the main circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below: 4) 200V class, FR-A520-0.4K, 0.78K FR-A520-15K, 18.5K, 22K eT Lt le] LD [eB] sowie amy i [6 | senses «le[xla[> @[~ @ comeing 05 [ a | § So FS BO Bommue Cale a Peper ll ‘ea. SF FR-AS20-1.5K, 22K, 3.7K FR-AS20-30K lett] lel le] [= @ comme tanp etme] si] Ses 04) mw [a aie Ee ‘row vw (A) | sae R12 Le) ele be) Dee] sere ace vy @ amps 1® cu e e® t sero 0) saree FR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A520-37K, 45K seesoa a ne Bi] somes a [sor © » Di creme me pele] pe) Te fe] sme seo or K @ sino a@ sezow 22016) eon) w]e |e fa[re @] seoveto oi: 2 22 | tworteSen sabe 828 4,,4 B® owe FRABIOAIK - FRAGIO-SOK Serv ce 4) coopetane XL [RI] St] scwe seo 0m) Le s] ru] y | w] ccrwsxe me ; I 5 oe @ 147 Tes 2) 400V class FR-A540-0.4K, 0.75K, 2.2K, 3.7K FR-AS40-30K rp PyPyT Pl ® TE] senso oH nla x ® commie PR] © Soren cooing 1 Cc CG Se sme ® T ovo ® ee® t Pane anor FR-A540-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A540-37K, 45K, 55K | 8 | somata) Ee eee ae craseine $f es Pf cosine Ge 8057 @ ws) Pip] somvstcney °@ ee 8) e® FR-AS40-11K, 15K, 18.5K, 22K Be] 54] somes consi StL [6 ep Pe T 8@ =e Sew an0 6) 7] soma 15INSTALLATION AND WIRING (4) Cables, crimping terminals, ets The following table lists the cables and crimping terminals used with the inputs (R, S, T) and outputs (U, V, W) of the inverter and the torques for tightening the screws: Applicable inverter | Terminal coe Crimping Terminals ang ama we Sew Size | xgtom [RST] UVW] RST [UMW] RST | OVW FRAS2OOAK To 22K | __Wa 6 2 Ez 2 2 4 4 FRAB2O-3.7K Ma 18 354 [654 [35 35 2 2 FRAS20-5 5K MB 25 555_| 555 [55 55 70 10 FRLAS2O-7 5K M6 26 145 65, 14 3 6 3 FRLAS2O-11K. M6 26 145 [145 14 4 6 6 FRAS20-15K MB a5 228 [226 2 2 4 ‘ FRLAS20-18 5K Mi 0 388 | 388 36 38, 2 z FRAS2O22K Ms 0 a 36, 36 2 2 FR-AS20-20K MB 0 e086 | 608 60, 60. 70 7 FRAS20-57K Mi0- *150_ | too-10_| 100-10] 100 00, a0 40 FR-AS20-45K Mi0- 150__[-100-10 [100-10] 100, 100, a 400 FRAS2O-SEK Miz 250 “150-12| 150-12 | 160 150 | Mewa65 | MEMS FRAS#OD4KTS7K | __ Ma 18 24 2 2 2 14 14 FREAO5 5K Ma 16 B64 2 35 2 2 74, FREAD. 5K Ma 16 B54 | ssa | 35 35 2 12 FREAO-11K Me 4 556 | 558 | 56 55. 10 10 FRS40-15K, MB 4% 145 66 14 3 6 3 FRS40-18.5K ME 45 145 86. 14 @ 6 2 FRS40-22K M6 a8. 225 [146 2 14 4 6. FRE40-30K, M6 a6, 226 [228 2. 2 4 4 FRSA0-37K, MB 0 328 [228 36 2 2 4 FR540-45K_ MB 80 ‘36a [368 36 38 2 2 FR5A055K ME 0 08 | 608 60, 80 i 76 Note: 1. The cables used should be 75°C copper cables 2. Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torques, Undertightening can cause a short or misoperation, Overtightening can cause the screws and unit to be damaged, resulting in a short or misoperation. (5) Connection of the power supply and motor ‘The power supply cables Connect the motor to U, V,W. ‘must be connected to R, ST. Inthe above connection, tfthey are connected o U,V, turning onthe forward rotation Wythe invertor wit be damaged. sites (signal rotates the motor [Phase seen eed tbe Inthe counterclockwise (artow) matched. ‘ection when viewed from For uso with a single-phase the lead shaft ower supply. the power suoply cables must be connected to (Rand s. 16VSTALLATION: AND WIRING (6) Connecting the control circuit to a power supply sey ain circui Ifthe magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter power supply is opened when the protective circuit is operated, the inverter control circuit power is lost and the alarm output signal cannot be kept on. To keep the alarm signal on terminals R1 and S1 are available, In this case, connect the power supply terminals R1 and S1 of the control Circuit to the primary side of the MC. ¢ Model FR-A520-0.4K to 3.7! Connection procedure> 1) cee tunes 2) Remove owes 5 Renown he epor ‘Gene sopra por spe cnt ete» ower 39) Model FR-A520-5.5K to 55K, FR-A540-5.5K to 55K Connection procedure> [2] rove spy trio ‘creamer Note: 1. When the main circuit power (R, S, T) is on, do not switch off the control power (terminals R1, S1). Otherwise the inverter may be damaged. 2, When using a separate power supply, the jumpers across R-R1 and S-S1 must be removed. Otherwise te inverter may be damaged, 3. Fora different power supply system which takes the power of the control circuit from other than the primary side of the MC, the voltage should be equal to the main circuit voltage. 4. For the FR-A520-5.5K to 55K, FR-A5S40-5.5K to 55K, the power supply cables must not be connected to the lower terminals. If connected, the inverter may be damaged. 72.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit instruction: 1) Terminals SD, SE and 5 are common to the /O signals and isolated from each other. These common terminals must not be connected to each other or earthed, 2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit) 3) The frequency input signals to the control circuit are micro currents. When contacts are required, use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to prevent a contact fault. 4) Itis recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm* gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals. If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm® or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel or parameter unit contact fault. (2) Terminal block layout In the control circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below: Terminal screw size: M3.5 sau] su] er | c | rv | so | st | ste |s05] cs (3) Changing the control logic The input signals are factory-set to the sink logic. To change the control ogi, the connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position (The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the connector position.) 1) Loosen the two mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (The screws cannot be removed.) With both hands, pull down the terminal biock from the back ofthe control circuit terminals 2) Remove the connector in the sink logic position on the back surface of the control circuit terminal block and fitt to the source logic position.INSTA LNs 3) Using care not to bend the pins of the control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix itwith the mounting screws. [ Note: 4. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fited correctly 2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block. 3. The sink-source logic change-over connector must be fitted in only one of those positions. If it is fitted in both positions at the same time, the inverter may be damaged. 4) Sink logic type * In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding signal input terminal. Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. + When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal PC as a common to prevent misoperation caused by leakage current, (Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal OV of the extemal power supply.) ass =, aa Tresor PE 19INSTALLATI WENA IG 5) Source logic type * In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. Cl. C. loca ‘+ When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal SD as a common to prevent misoperation caused by leakage current. iow to use terminals 41) Using the "STOP" terminal & ‘A connection example (for sink logic) for sel-holding the start signal (forward rotation, reel reverse rotation) is shown on the right, rs © 2) Using the "CS" terminal This terminal is used to perform automatic restart after instantaneous power failure ‘and commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, Connect terminals CS-SD and set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 57 "coasting time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure" 3) Using the "PC" terminal This terminal can be used as 24VDC power output using SD as a common terminal. Specifications: 18V to 26VDC, 0.1A permissible current Note that the wiring length should be within 30m, Do not short terminals PC-SD. When terminal PC is used as a 24V power supply, leakage current from transistor output cannot be prevented, 20INSTALLATION AND WIRING: 2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector (4) When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a connection cable ‘« Parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2) (option) or the following connector and cable. ‘* Connector: Ru45 connector Example: 6-554720-3, Nippon AMP ‘+ Cable: Cable conforming to EIAS68 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable) Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm X4P, MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD. Note: The maximum wiring length is 20m. (2) For RS-485 communication With the operation panel disconnected, the PU connector can be used for communication operation from a personal computer ete. Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front Note: 1. Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX madem socket or telephone modular connector. Otherwise, the product may be damaged due to electrical specification differences. 2. Pins 2 and 8 (PSS) provide power to the operation unit or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication. Use the connector and cable as detailed below. # Connector: RJ45 connector Example: §-554720-3, Nippon AMP ‘* Cable: Cable conforming to EIAS68 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable) Example: SGLPEV 0.5mmx4P, MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD. When the communication board of the personal computer has the RS-232C specifications, prepare an RS-485, RS-232C converter, Example of converter. Model: RC-55A Manufactured by RA Systems, Tel. (Japan) (03) 3341-7471 21See n units 2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone op’ The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required. Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual. (1) Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (option) The builtin brake resistor is connected across terminals P and PR. Fit the extemal dedicated brake resistor (option) instead when the built-in brake resistor does not have enough thermal capability for high-duty operation. Remove the jumper from across terminals PR-PX and connect the dedicated brake resistor (option) across. terminals P-PR, Note: 1. The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor. 2. ‘The jumper across terminals PR-PX must be disconnected before connecting the dedicated brake resistor. A failure to do so may damage the inverter. © Model «+ ++ FR-A520-0.4K to 3.7K, FR-A540-0.4K to 3.7K 41) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.) 2/38 @|® * Model «+ ++ FR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K, FR-A540-5.5K, 7.5K 1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals, P-PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.) 22INSTALLATIOI! EEN nection of the F! @ unit Connect the optional FR-BU brake unit as shown below to improve the braking capability during deceleration, te Ne EE u Reser Prone Freeue Note: 1. Connect the inverter terminals (P, N) and FR-BU brake unit terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.) For model 7.5K or less, the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed. 2. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and resistor unit should be within Sm. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m, 3. Ifthe transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely hot, causing a fire Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of failure, 4, For the power supply of 400V class, install a voltage-reducing transformer. 23INSTALLATION AND WIRING '3) Connection of the conventional BU brake unit (option Connect the BU brake unit correctly as shown on the right. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. iN) ti Note: 1. For models 7.5K or less, remove the jumper across terminals PR-PX. 2. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharge resistor should be within 2m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 5m. 3. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely hot, causing a fire, Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter’s power supply side to shut off current in case of failure. 4, For the power supply of 400V class, install a voltage-reducing transformer. (4) Connection of the FR-HC high power factor converter (option| When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, wire as shown below. Wrong connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter. After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection" Hon poor tter carver toate rma) StH 24SUT Tea Nes Note: 4. Remove the jumpers across the R-R1 and S-S1 terminals of the inverter, and connect the control circult power supply across the R1-S1 terminals. The power input terminals R, S, T must be open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Reverse polarity of terminals N, P will damage the inverter. 2. The voltage phases of terminals R, S, T and terminals Ra, S4, T4 must be matched before connection 3. For the terminals of the inverter connected to terminals RDY, Y1, Y2 of the high power factor converter, set "10 or 11" in Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection). 4, This example indicates that "3" was set in Pr. 183 to assign FR-HC connection instantaneous power failure detection (X11) to the RT terminal. Another terminal may be used by setting "3" in any of Pr, 180 to Pr. 186, 5. When the FR-HC is connected, use sink logic (factory setting). For source logic, the FR-HC cannot be connected. (5) Connection of the FR-RC power return converter (option) (For power coordination, always install the power factor improving reactor (FR-BAL).) ‘When connecting the FR-RC power return converter, connect the inverter terminals (P, N) and FR-RC power return converter terminals as shown below so that their signals match with each other. After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "0" in Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection’, FRR powarset conecer nse RHE Note: 1. For models 11K or less, the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed. 2. How to connect the FR-BAL power factor improving AC reactor (option) ‘When using two or more inverters in the same system, small impedance between the inverters will cause a regenerative current from the power return converter to leak into the other inverters, resulting in overcurrent alarm of the other inverters. To prevent this, install the power factor improving AC reactor on the power supply side for all the inverters, (6) Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (option) Connect the FR-BEL power factor improving DC reactor between terminals P1-P. In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P1-P must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not function. Note: 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m, 2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (RS, 1) 25NSE eN GIN 2.2.6 Design information 41) For commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2 designed for commercial power supply-inverter switch-over. When there is @ commercial power supplyinverter switch-over circuit as shown below, the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error. 2) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal. Ifthe start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored. 3) When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit, make up a circuit which will switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R, S, T when the power supply terminals R1, $1 for the control circuit are switched off. 4) the input signals to the control circuit are on alow level, use two parallel micro signal contacts oa twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a contact faut 5) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit. 6) Do not apply a voltage directly to the alarm output signal terminals (A, B, C).. Always apply a voltage to these terminals via a relay coil, lamp, etc. 7) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements. 1) Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over | 2) Low-level signal contacts wes sas Wf oly D) 262.3. Other wiring INSTALLATION AND: WIRING. 2.3.1__Power harmonics Power harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter, affecting power supply equipment, power capacitors, etc. Power harmonics are different in generation source, frequency and transmission path from radio frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. Take the following measures. ‘= The differences between harmonics and RF noise are indicated below: Tam amones asa Femara eral ZO St degre, SRE os [Fgh guanay ever Oe Eada Selon Tew gah, powe apes ese space, dare, lying phe Guaraive undoing — [Legal tan posse cur andon,qunatv unerandng@ GCA nected amount pporoxnatey proartorlto ed capacity [AE © cent futon rte (arger wi ater Ty a afeIo Sen Spo ani Tonk dice [Dir ato aka Sov SSSR arp ofanoguard [stata oar Inreaee he dance * Safeguard The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the power supply differs according to various conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether a power factor improving reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side. For the output frequency and output current, the adequate method is to obtain them under rated load at the mi operating frequency. Note: A power factor improving capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter's output may overheat or be damaged due to the harmonics of the inverter output. Also, when an overcurrent flows in the inverter, the overcurrent protection is activated, Hence, when the motor is driven by the inverter, do not install a capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter’s output To improve the power factor, insert a power factor improving reactor in the inverter's input or DC circuit 27TALEATION AND: WIRING 2.3.2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines Harmonie currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The harmonic ‘suppression guidelines were established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents. 1) "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products” This guideline was issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industries in September, 1994 and applies to 200V class inverters of 3.7KW and less. By installing the FR-BEL or FR-BAL power factor improving reactor, inverters comply with the "harmonic suppression techniques for transistorized inverters (input current 204 or less)" established by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association. Therefore install the optional reactor for the 200V class, 3.7KW or less inverter. 2) "Harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers* This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or specially high-voltage consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures, Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power Received Power | sty mth 1h 43th wh 19th 23rd | Over 23rd Voltage 6.8KV 35 2 76 13 70 os 076 O70 DaKV 18 13: o.82 0.88 053 047 039 0.36 35K 42. 2.86 0.58 0.48 (036 032 0.28 024 ) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers ‘New inetallavor/adaltion/renewal of equipment Calculation of equivalent capacity sum Not more than reference capacty ‘Sum of equivalent capactis ‘Over reference capacity Calculation of outgoing harmomic current TS outgoing harmonic cu (Over maximum valve rent equal oor lower than maximum vale 2 ‘Not more tran | Harmomic suppression technique fs required. J ‘maximum vale lharmomic suppression technique is nat quired Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-A500 Series Glass Creat Type Gonversion Factor Without reactor Ki = 34 A 3.phase bridge With reactor (AC si) = Kee he (Capacitorsmoothed) [With reactor (00 sie) 13-18 With reactor (AC, Do sds) Kade ha C= Seikaxeiing S-phase bilge [When hign power fact converter is used K=O. 28INSTALLATION AND: WIRING Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits Received Power Voltage _| Reference Capacity GaK ‘SOKVA PIPER 300KVA BER or mare 2OO0KVA Table 4 Harmonic Content (Values at the fundamental current of 100%) Reactor ah Th ith Tah Tih ah Bare 2th Not used 65 ‘at 85 77, a3 34 26. 18. Used (AC sida 38, 45, 74 34 32 13) 47, 13. Used (OC side) 30, 13 84 50 a7 32 30 22 Used (AC, 0c sides) | 26 oa 72. ai 32 24 18, ia 1) Calculation of equivalent capacity (PO) of harmonic generating equipment ‘The "equivalent capacity” is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumer's harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the following equation. if the sum of equivalent ‘capacities is higher than the limit in Table 3, harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure: PO= = (Kix Pi) kVA] * Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity of Ki: Conversion factor (refer to Table 2) the applied motor and found in Table 6. It should be noted that the rated capacity used here is used to calculate generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive, Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment® [kVA] 1; Number indicating the conversion circuit type 2) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) x ‘operation ratio x harmonic conten * Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor x operation time ratio during 30 minutes ‘Harmonic content: Found in Table 4. Table 5 Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Inverter Dri f Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.6kV Z . . : (No reactor, 100% operation ratio) 10) Paso ao) ma aCe aoa a co | Or | 3105 an0e [ares [3778 ator [vor [ire | wae Se], Cisco dar] sas [sos [70ssfasor] saab [aera [ase] abe is] Nt [ers or} “tas [to [oar [azo | ae Por [srr [ase [3008 396_[ aio | “at | 400 | sado_| 2040_[ vee] tose | 7400 | 6240-4300 ans 6.50, 304 461 | 257.4 | 161.5 [33.49 [30.34 | 16.94 | 12.21 [10.24 | 7.092 Arar |355_[ sre [677 sre | aara [as [ease | ono [ares | i505 | 1042 Sie [ese [ize | 776 [br] son | a1 | 5.00 | oor | sar | 2406 | 20. | tar a qs [soe | eas [1500 | 178] oon [over | reas [vier | axon | a8 76 | 39.08 [oro feeb ste tssr-| tees prance frase ae fa roar ree aba [ae fe rai} 356 [ 229 [as [14a | star | sear | 170s | was [eBe2 [6772 | 990 Sse seo | sao | oro [a7 [test | rare | ese | zen | rar | seor | reze [ssa OE Sa] 147 [735 4450 524 7e83_ | 1625 [3783 | 3427 | 191.4 | 1380 | 175.7 | 80.10 eo [699 [5050] [aes [sss Lavo ase ier 9810 3) Harmonic suppression technique requirement Ifthe outgoing harmonic currentis higher than the maximum value per 1kW contract power x contract power, a harmonic suppression technique is required. 29INSTALLATION: AND: WIRING: 4) Harmonic suppression techniques Ne: Tem ‘Description {1 | Reactor instalation —[ instal a reactor (AGL) the AG side oT the inverter ora reaclor (OGL) ins DG aide or Bath To (ACL, DCL) suppress outgoing harmonic curents, High power facor | The converter crcul is switched on-of fo Conver an put current waveform Into @ ane wave, 2 | converter suppressing harmonic currents substantial, The high power factor converter (FR-HC) Is used (ERO) with the standard accesso Installation of power When used with a series reactor, the power factor improving capacitor has an effect of absorbing 3 _| factor improving armnle curente capacitor eomnaia |_| Transformer mulir | Use two Wansforners wih a phase angle difference of 30" asin =a, A combination To provide phase operation an effect coresponding to 12 pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents rae ‘A capacitor and a reactor are used together to redues impedance at specie Wequencie, producing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents This fiter detects the current ofa circuit generating a harmoniécutfont and generates a hammonie current equivalent to a aiference between that current and a fundamental wave current to suppress a harmonic curent at @ detection point, providing a great effect of absorting harmonic currents 6 | Active fiter 30INSTALLATION AND. WIRING 2.3.3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques Some noises enter the inverter causing it to misoperate and others are radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noise, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the following basic measures to be taken. Also, since the inverter chops the output at a high carrier frequency, it could generate noise. If these noises cause peripheral devices to misoperate, measures should be taken to suppress the noise. The measures differ slightly depending on noise propagation paths. 1) Basic measures ‘+ Do not run the power cables (1/0 cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. * Use twisted shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the shielded cables to terminal SD. * Ground the inverter, motor, etc. at one point. 2) Measures against noises which enter and cause misoperation of the inverter When devices which generate many noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be effected by noise, the following measures. must be taken: ‘+ Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate noise to suppress noise. ‘= Fit data line fiters to signal cables. ‘+ Ground the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal. 3) Measures against noise which is radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. Inverter-generated noise is largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter and inverter main circuit (VO), those electromagnetically and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply cables. inver-ganeraed] Path 0) Te propaaated | __ [Noe doy rad rows JP lasdy invertor |__FRoise recat by power cables Noise racated by motor cables Path 0.8) ath 2) ath 2) path 9) Ts RR (Copesroresatd) | Tetccpoet |atn Noles fom gaan L cabie dueto leakage current 31INSTALLATION AND WIRING —__G ‘loptone 2 Sauron oa] 7 y Noise Path ‘Wher davcos which handle TowTavel signals and are sussopible to misoperation dua to noise (euch as Instruments, receivers and sensors) are installed near the inverter and their signal cables aro contained inthe ‘same panel as the inverter or aro run near the inverter, the devices may be effected by airpropagatod noises and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easly afacted devices as far away as possible trom the inverter. 23) (@) Run easly affacted signal eables as far away as possible from the Inverter. {@) Do not run the signal cables and powor cabs (ivorter JO cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle ther, (4) Inset tine noise fiters into YO and radlo noise fiters into Input side to suppress cable-radiatod nolsos. (6) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to reduce further effects, ‘When the signal cabies are run parallel wih or bundled with the power cables, magnoto and Stale induction ola may be propagated tothe signal cables to effect the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easly affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. ane) {@) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible form the inverter. {8) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter UO cables) in parallel with each other and do not buna thar. (4) Usa shicid cabs for signal eablos and power cables and run them in Individual motal conduits to reduce furor etfs ‘Wien the power suppl ofthe parpharal devices are connected To The power supply of We Inverter wit the ‘same line, invertr-generated noise may ow back through the power supply cables to misoperate tho devicos ” ‘and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install the rao noise titer (FR-BIF) to the power cables (input cables) ofthe inverter. (2) Install the line noise fiter (FR-BILF, FR-BSFOI) tothe power cables (YO cables) of te inverter. ‘When a closed lp clout is formed by connecting the peripheral device wing tothe inverter, laakaga curent 8 ‘may flow through the ground cable of the inverter to affect the device. In such a caso, disconnection of the ound cable of tho dovice may cause the device to operate proper 32INSTALLATION AND: WIRING. + Data examples ‘By decreasing the carter Wequency, the noise terminal volage™ ‘can be reduced, Use Pr. 72 to set the carrer frequency to alow value (thH2), Though motor noise increases at a low carter frequency, selection of Sof-PWM in Pr. 240 wil make itunofending, Differences between Noise Terminal Voltages ‘at Different Carrier Frequencies 10 x {Igt + Ign + 3 x (Ig2tlgm)} Exaile of leakage current per 1kVin cable path during ‘commercial power supply ‘opecaion when the CV ‘able Is routed in metal conduit (200V 60H2) Leakage current example of S-phase Induction motor ‘during commercial power supply operation (@00V €otiz) lo, le: : leakage currents of cable path during al z cal ‘commercial power supply operation Emr Evo Ign’: leakage current of noise iter on Pe Bu inverter Bel [A ges input side i: i] Zo Igm = leakage current of motor during 7 ean commercial power supply operation em “kb means. abi sie (rn?) Neto eapacy (ty t ston<709 ot Te fa ben Note 1, The NV should be installed to the primary (power supply) side of the inverter. ee Le 2. Ground faultin the secondary side of the | Leakage current gt 33x St so17 inverter can be detected at the running frequency of 120Hz or lower. 3. Ifthe Y connection neutral point ground fault in the inverter secondary side. The protective ground resistance of the load equipment should be 102 or less. (2g 10) Teakage curentign O (without noise titer] Tom Leakage current ig2 sx wast Motor eakage curent ign 048 “Toll leakage current 268 7H. Reted sensi curent 5 ay 4, When the breaker is grounded on the secondary side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the rating. In this case, note that the eddy current and hysteresis loss increase and temperature rises. 37 For the leakage current value of the noise fiter installed on the inverter input side, contact the corresponding fiter manufacturer.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3.7 Instructions for compliance with the UL and CSA standards (The FR-AS20-0.4K to 55K, FR-A540-0.4K to 22K comply with the Standards. We are now applying for the other capacities. Since we obtained the approval of the UL and CSA Standards from the UL, the products conforming to the Standards carry the UL and cUL marks.) (4) Installation. ‘The above types have been approved as products for use in enclosure and approval tests were conducted under the following conditions. In enclosure design, refer to these conditions so that the ambient temperature of the inverter becomes 50°C or less. Tnvaror Type Control Box Sie (Unit im) Vand Hote Ara. Coating Fan FReAS200754 ween 1060 Not road -0.78K | control boxhaving | 210 x 360 x 175 fa a the size ofthe op and boon) Meese EW we Tala cooing fan at top of he encloaure FRASZOAIK 30x70 to suck intemal arto the outside. Soa _{bottom) (Fan ale low: 4.72m®imin or more) 100mm in H an aun WD Install a cooing an at top ofthe oncoaure FRaszozaK | S0mmin aS 33070 to suck ternal arto the outside. Eom {bottom Fan ar flow. 3.44mé/min or mor) wb wD | 4235492 (botom) FRAS2O-S8K 580 815% 300 | 128 126 (ootom x2) | ‘Pant oye 5 San Sion mor) Invortor size plus 12330 (otiom x2) 400mm in W, wD srassosax | 10ommintiand | WH D | soon aio com) | notroqued somm in D aoe 6048 _(botom) _| TW NDEa iWin Tretal cooing Tae at Tap oT the enclonure FRASAO-20K to suck intemal air tothe outside. 3606003240 | 30070 (ote) | Ran teow 21 fond stor) (2) Wiring of the power supply and motor Use the UL-approved power supply and round crimping terminals to wire the input (R, S, T) and output (U, V, W) terminals ofthe inverter. Crimp the terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal manufacturer (3) Fuse ‘The fuse used on the input side should be any of the UL Class K5 fuses having the ratings as listed below: ‘Applicable verter Type Rating (@) Rating FRLAS20-044 75010, 5 FRLASZ0-0 758 481020 FRASA0.0.75K 3 FRLAS20-1 5K 251030 FRCASAO-1 BK 10 FRLAS20-2 2K 30,1040 FRASAO-2 2K 20 FRLAS20-3.7K 451060 FRASA03.7K 38 FR-AS20-5 7510 90 FR-ASH0-5 5K 6 FRLAS207.54 30 0 125 FR-ASIO-7 5K 0 FRLAS2O-11K 115 to 175 FRASAO-TIK 80 FR-AS20-15K_ 7100 to 226 FR-ASA0-16K 10) FR-AS20-16 5K 725 1 300 FRLASA0-16.5K 725, FR-AS20-22K 265 1 350 FIVASAO22K 750) FR-AS20-30K 340 to 450 FR-AS2037K 37510 500 FR-AS20-45K 45016 600 | FR-AS20-58K 600) i (4) Short-circuit ratin This inverter has been put to the short-circuit test ofthe UL in the AC circuit whose peak current and voltage are limited to* and SO0V max., respectively, and conforms to this circuit Inverter ype * 1ERW fo STR, 000 — RW, BBA 70,000 38STONE 2.3.8 Instructions for compliance with the European standards (Only the FR-AS20-0.4K to 22K comply with the following standards. We are now applying for the other capacities. The products conforming to the Low Voltage Directive carry the CE mark.) (4) EMC Directive 1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the EMC Directive ‘Atransistorized inverter does not function independently. Its a component designed for installation in a contro! box and for use with the other equipment to control the equipmentidevice. Therefore, we understand that the EMC Directive does not apply directly to transistorized inverters. For this reason, We do not place the CE mark on the transistorized inverters themselves. (The CE mark is placed on inverters in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive.) The European power drive manufacturers’ organization (CEMEP) also holds this point of view. 2) Compliance We understand that the transistorized inverters themselves are not covered directly by the EMC Directive, However, the EMC Directive applies to machines/equipment into which transistorized inverters rave been incorporated, and these machines and equipment must camry the CE marks, Hence, we prepared the technical information "EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041- 202) so that machines and equipment incorporating transistorized inverters may conform to the EMC. Directive more easily 3) Outline of installation method Install an inverter using the following methods: * Use the inverter with an European Standard-compliant noise filter. * For wiring between the inverter and motor, use shielded cables or run them in a metal piping and {ground the cables on the inverter and motor sides with the shortest possible distance. * Insert a line noise fier and ferrite core into the power and control lines as required. Full information including the European Standard-compliant noise fiter specifications are written in the technical information "EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041-202). Please contact your sales representative. (2) Low Voltage Directive 1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the Low Voltage Directive Transistorized inverters are covered by the Low Voltage Directive. 2) Compliance ‘We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive and place the CE mark on the inverters. 3) Outline of instructions “In the 400V class inverters, the rated input voltage range is three-phase, 380V to 415V, SOHz/60Hz. * Connect the equipment to the earth securely. Do not use an earth leakage circuit breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth. * Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do nat connect two or more cables.) * Use the no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard. * Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category Il and contamination level 2 or higher specified in IEC864. {a) To meet the overvoltage category Il, insert an EN or IEC standard-compliant isolation transformer ‘or surge suppressor in the input of the inverter. {b) To meet the contamination level 2, install the inverter to a control box protected against ingress of water, oll, carbon, dust, etc. (IP54 or higher). * In the input and output ofthe inverter, use cables ofthe type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C. * The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A, B, C) should be 30VDC, 0.3. (The relay outputs are basically isolated from the inverter's internal circuitry.) Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance Guide" (Information number BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales representative. 39CHAPTER 3 OPERATION This chapter provides the basic "operation" for use of this product. Always read this chapter before using the equipment. 3.1 Pre-Operation Information ++++++++++++++++*+ 40 3.2 Operation ::+++eeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeea seen ees 48 CHAPTER 1 | OUTLINE CHAPTER 2 | INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 3 Seely 3 CHAPTER 4 | PARAMETERS CHAPTER 6 | PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 6 | SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 7 | OPTIONS APPENDICES3.1. Pre-Operation Information 3.1.1 Devices and parts to be prepared for operation The inverter can be operated in "external operation mode", "PU operation mode", “combined operation mode" and "communication operation mode". Prepare required instruments and parts according to application and running conditions. (1) External operation mode (factory setting) ‘The inverter is operated under the control of external operation signals (frequency setting potentiometer, start switch, etc.) connected to the terminal block. With input power on, switch on the start signal (STF, STR) to start operation Preparation + Start signal- sires esees Switch, relay, etc. + Frequency setting signal -+++++0 to BV, Oto 10V, 4 to 20mA DC signals from a potentiometer or outside the inverter Note: 1. Both the start signal and frequency setting signal are required to run the inverter. (2) PU operation mode The inverter is operated from the keypad of the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUD4) a This mode does not require the operation signals to be pay ‘connected and is useful for an immediate start of ia operation, Preparation + Operation unit +++ ++ + Connection cable Operation panel (FR-DU04), parameter unit (FR-PU04) To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter. FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the market: Connector : RJ45 connector Cable: Cable conforming to EIAS68 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable) (3) External/PU combined operation mode “The inverter is operated with the external operation and Tee PU operation modes combined in any of the following ways’ 41) The start signal is set with the external signal and the frequency setting signal set from the PU; or 2) The start signal is set with the run command key of the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUD4) and the frequency setting signal set with the external frequency setting potentiometer. 3) Set 3 in Pr. 79 “operation mode selection". 40Preparation] + Start signal sesvereee+ Switch, relay, etc. (for 4) + Frequency setting signal - (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA DC signals from a potentiometer or outside the inverter (for 2) +++» Operation panel (FR-DU04), parameter unit (FR-PUO4) ++1++++To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the + Operation unit - + Connection cable ++ market: Connector: RU45 connector Cable Cable conforming to E1A568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable) 3) Combined operation mode Change the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode selection’ as follows: Beseription Running frequency seting Siar signal PU [FRDUDAIFR-PUOS) Terminal signal 3 | + Dect setting and (UPIDOWN] key seting Setting "Terminal egnal + 0t0 SVDC across 2-5 + Oto 10VDC across 2-5 + 4t0 20mADC across 4-5 + Mult-speod seloction (Pr. 4 to 8, 24 to 27) + Jog frequency (Pr. 15) (4) Communication operation mode ‘Communication operation can be performed by connecting a personal computer and the PU connector with the RS-485 communication cable, The inverter setup software is available as an FR-AS0O inverter start-up support software package + Connection cable Connector: RU45 connector Cable Cable conforming to EIAS88 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable) + Personal computer Windows 3.1, Windows 95 {MB or more Floppy disk drive + One or more 3.6 inch floppy drives Mouse + ‘Mouse connectable to the personal computer a=e 3.1.2 Power on — Before switching power on, check the following: Installation check Make sure that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 7.) * Wiring check Make sure that the main and control circuits are wired correctly. Make sure that the options and peripheral devices are selected and connected correctly. (Refer to page ®.) * Switch power on. Power-on is complete when the POWER lamp is lit correctly and the operation panel (FR-DUO4) displays correct data. 3.1.3 Parameter check ‘The inverter is designed to perform simple variable-speed operation with the factory settings of the parameters. Set the necessary parameters according to the load and operation specifications. Use the operation panel (FR-DU04) to set, change and confirm the parameter values. For full information on the parameters, refer to "CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS" (page 62). '1) Operation panel (FR-DU04) With the operation panel (FR-DUO4), you can set the running frequency, monitor the operation command display, set parameters, display an error, and copy parameters, 1) Names and functions of the operation panel (FR-DU04) Sey — anc oly z sh (Ebel cote — tog eno psa tas an 1Mooe1 ay (0penten onan) tars Te Genes mn oy “IPWohferect ea iy [senter: |sroPnesen say Koy Description [MODE] key ‘You can seleat the operation mode or sating mode, [SETI Key ‘You can determine the frequency and parameter seting, ~ Used fo nerease or decrease the running frequency Consecullvely. Hod down this key to change the [UPIDOWN) Key frequency. + Press ths Key inthe setting mode to change the parameter setting consecutively REVI key Used to gle a reverse rotation command [FWo] key, Used to ge a forward rotation command Used to stop operation Used to eset the inverter when Its output is stopped by the protective function activated (major faut) {STOPIRESET] key 42OPERATION 2) Monitor display changed by pressing the [MODE] key enenonng noe Frequency ting ness) #Pannae sting noc scpesten nate store cs ies 50 Toes Gy) Ee) Ga: | eee = or Sarr arraes [ |j2 Note: The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode. AE L Peg (2) Key operation 41) Monitoring mode + Operation command indications in the monitoring mode EXT is lt to indicate external operation, PU is lit to indicate PU operation. Both EXT and PU are it to indicate PUlexternal combined operation mode. + The monitor display can also be changed during operation. stroiney pnt cmt ner — 702 Fagen sting mode se 3) Note: 1. Hold down the [SET] key marked 1 for more than 1.5 seconds to change the current monitor to the power-on monitor. 2. Hold down the [SET] key marked *2 for more than 1.5 seconds to display four errors inoluding the most recent one. 3. Shifts to the parameter setting mode when in the external operation mode. 2) Frequency setting mode + Used to set the running frequency in the PU operation mode. To Prana sting ede 43=a NON 3) Parameter setting mode ~ A parameter value may either be set by updating its parameter number or setting the value digit-by-digit using the [UP/DOWN] key. + To write the setting, change it and press the [SET] key 1.5 seconds. ‘Set "0" or "4" (factory setting) in Pr. 79 “operation mode selection" or select the PU operation mode. eter sranara be parameter met Nosslricntdgtieire Hida dota Los ete it etre Cr To) Operation nese 4) Operation mode hae 5) Help mode ew grt gy gg me gyn 1. EA 15). Er CLP toh | | me) o © To Moma nee 44Oza + Alarm history Four past alarms can be displayed with the [UP/DOWN] key. (-"is appended to the most recent alarm.) EHIS ‘Shows an alarm, (When no alarm exists, E.___0 is displayed.) Alarm display => Frequency at alarm occurrence is displayed, + Alarm history clear Clears all alarm history. + Parameter clear Initialises the parameter values to the factory settings. The calibration values are not initialized. (Parameter values are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection).) + Allclear Initialises the parameter values and calibration vaiues to the factory settings. Freon em + User clear Initiaises the user-set parameters. ‘The other parameters are initialized to the factory settings. 45aaa 6) Copy mode By using the operation panel (FR-DU04), the parameter values can be copied to another inverter (only the FR-A5O0 series). 41) Operation procedure After reading the parameter values from the copy source inverter, connect the operation panel to the copy destination inverter, and write the parameter values. PROUD ss oi io Note: 1. While the copy function is being activated, the monitor display flickers. The display returns to the lit-up state on completion of the copy function. 2. Ifa read error occurs during parameter read, "read error (E.rE1)" is displayed, 3. If awrite error ocours during parameter write, “write error (E.rE2)" is displayed. 4, Ifa data discrepancy occurs during parameter verily, the corresponding parameter number and “verify error (E.r3)" are displayed alternately. I the direct frequency setting orjog frequency setting is discrepant, "verify error (E.rE3)" flickers, To ignore this display and continue verify, press the [SET] key. 5. When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-AS00 series, “model error (E.rE4)" is isplayed. Reference: itis recommended to read the parameter values after completion of parameter setting, By writing the parameter values from the operation panel fitted to a new inverter after inverter replacement, parameter setup can be completed. 46OPERATIOI (3) Parameter setting check We recommend the following parameters to be set by the user. Set them according to the operation specifications, load, ete. (Refer to page 52.) Parameter aoa Name ‘Application 1 Wenn fequen + Moximun frequen Used to sot the maximum ard minimum output frequencies 7 ‘Accoleraton tie @ Deceeration time 4 Secon acnorateicanoaton a Used to sot tho accaeration and decoration times, “10 fi acoteraioneclaion Tit [ir dessteration tne ane ‘zed a aat ho carton of the wladvonis overran prolaaton Wo proteak he Q Electronic thermal OM relay ene Used to selec the oplimum odput cherclerstics which matah Whe | eae application and load characteris. Used to set the thermal characeisics of the elecionie overurent eae | eles protection according tothe motor used. Used fo select the specications of the Faquendy seting signal entered abe | eee sain across terminal 2:5 ta perform operation wih the voltage input signal. 35 | Fi tora eaibraton $B | elt en ‘Used to calibrate the meters connected across terminals FY-SO and AMS. 202 | Frequency seting votaga bas 203 | Frequency sting votage gain | Used to set tho magnitude (slope) ofthe output frequency relative tothe £04 [Frequency eating curent bias | frequency setting signal (0 to 5V, Oto TOV or 4 to 20MA DC) as desired 605 | Frequency seting curent gan 473.2 Operation 3.2.1 Pre-operation checks Before starting operation, check the following: * Safety Perform test operation after making sure thet safety is ensured if the machine should become out of control. ‘+ Machine Make sure that the machine is free of damage. * Parameters Set the parameter values to match the operating machine system environment. ‘+ Test operation Perform test operation and make sure that the machine operates safely under light load at a low frequency. After that, start operation. 483.2.2 _External operation mode (Operation using external input signals) ———————————————— EEE gna n_at 6OHz Step Description Image 1 | Switch power on and make sure that the operation command | [yrcc=somcmsmsacs indication "EXT is ti rr. (ifitis not it, switch to the extemal operation mode.) 2 | Tum on the start switch (STF or STR). ‘The operation command indication "STF" or "STR" flickers. Note: The motor does not start If both the forward and reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both switches are turned on during operation, the motor decelerates to a stop. 3 | Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full clockwise. The frequency shown.on the display increases gradually to 60.00Hz and the running status indication FWD or REV is it 4 | Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full counterclockwise, The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to 0.00Hz. ‘The motor stops running, 5 | Tum off the start switch (STF or STR). liven (2) External erati in Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation, and switch it off to stop, 1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration" 2) Select the external operation mode. 3) Switch on the jog signal. Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation 49CesT 3.2.3. PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04)) (1) Operation at 60Hz White the motor is running, speed can be varied by repeating the following steps 2 and 3: Step Description Image 1 | Switch power on and make sure that the operation command | | vaascsoaumcsaem] indication “PU" is lit (ifitis not lit, switch to the PU operation mode.) +) 2 | Set the running frequency to 60Hz. First, press the [MODE] key to select the frequency setting mode. Then, press the [UP/DOWN] key to change the setting, and press the | | (a) « (¥) [SET] key to write the frequency. 3_| Press the [FWD] or [REV] key. The motor starts running. The monitoring mode is automatically selected and the output frequency is displayed. Gee 4 | Press the [STOP] key. The motor is decelerated to a stop. (2) PU jog operation Hold down the [FWD] or [REV] key to perform operation, and release it to stop. 41) Set Pr. 15 “jog frequency’ and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration’. 2) Select the PU jog operation mode. 3) Hold down the [FWD] or [REV] key to perform operation, {lf the motor remains stopped, check Pr. 13 "starting frequency’. The motor will not star fits setting is lower __ than the starting frequency.) 503.2.4 Combined operation mode (Operation using the external input signals and PU) ‘When entering the start signal from outside the inverter and setting the running frequency from the PU (Pr. 79= 3) ‘The external frequency setting signals and the PU's FWD, REV and STOP keys are not accepted Step Description Image 1 | Switch power on. 2 | Set"3" in Pr. 79 “operation mode selection’ The combined operation mode is selected and the operation status indication "EXT" and "PU" are it. 3 | Turn on the start switch (STF or STR). Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and reverse rotation switches are tumed on. Ifboth switches are turned on during operation, the motor decelerates (when Pr. 250 '9999") to a stop, 4 | Using the parameter unit, set the running frequency to 60Hz. ‘The operation command indication "REV" or "FWD" is lit, + Select the frequency setting mode and make step setting Note: Step setting is the way of changing the frequency Ww ‘consecutively by pressing the [UP/DOWN] key. Hold down the [UP/DOWN] key to change the frequency. | Tum offthe start switch (STF or STR). ‘The motor stops running, 51MEMOCHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS This chapter explains the "parameters" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment. 4.1 Parameter List +++++++++++sesseeeee 4.2 Parameter Function Details ----- peer) G2) Breer) Se) Note: By making parameter settings, you can change the functions of contact input terminals RL, RM, RH, RT, AU, JOG, CS and open collector output terminals, RUN, SU, IPF, OL, FU. Therefore, signal names corresponding to the functions, are used in the description of this chapter (except in the wiring examples). Note that they are not terminal names. CHAPTER 1 } OUTLINE CHAPTER 2 | INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 3 | OPERATION CHAPTER 4 [A R CHAPTER 5 | PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: CHAPTER 6 | SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 7 | OPTIONS APPENDICES:8 3 3 i Fs i 4.1 Parameter List ‘inimam Rater Fune-] Parameter ‘tion | Number ame Setting Range ; as Factory Setting To 0 | Torque boost (Note 1) (Note 8) 00 30% On% ae Tasinom equaney Tete ‘oie 0h a Minune Oo 20H ovina OH 2 . Base toque. 0 400K otra aot 30 i z Bio bare oie oh si 5 idle eee e Oto 400K | D.0THE B0Hz Gl 3 esos Do ae ‘aire “ar at 3 Dio 200 sect Vi sec] Sawa aee 8 oneal Oto 360 sec 0.01 sec. (Note 6) bed 103800 sec 01 sec) | Ssealis seo deieticlead 0 to 360 sec 0.01 sec, (Note 6) Gg Electron thermal OM. rolay to 5008 0.01 aa 63 6 | Bt ejection brake operation Reauen: Tia he, woo _| oT aH ae 14 [ OC ejection ake operation te ‘Oo 10sec 0888 [0.1 seo Tsse0 ee Ta] BC rection brake votage 210 30% a. | ama (note) [6 73 staring toque Do sone athe ote 35 “14 [Load patie slecbon We d105 4 3 om 15 [Jog feaven Tin 400 cate ae 3. Tio 800 sect Ot ser 16 | Joo accelratonlscoleraton te poets ote 05 0 6 77] WS pt sfason 02 7 7 1a Fighepoed mexnun feauenay ite «core dane Tore a7 a | Base equa votape (te 1) Dio 00v, see, s068_ | — ov 3609 ar el ‘AcceleratodSocleraion reference 20 11040042 othe oot i frequency a Ea peitosesatin ie an 7 5 w 2 ieee Oto 200%. 9909 0.1% 150% 68 LP a | sstgeto eaten [ys acon, es 01% aa a 5 a ENE Tie aoths, se | oe rm = i i Oi 400n, 9990 [otk oo om i [ote «tora. o060 | — ore 3860 8 i : ‘Bo done. 9900 —[ 00TH 609 a0 28—_| Muth speed nput compensation Qu i 7 3 3 [Acosleraonideclaraton patra ai28 i o 70 30 | Regenerative haaton secon a2 1 . 71 31 | Freaueney ump 1a Tra soot, taoa [oor aoe 7 32 —[ Frequency jump 18 Dia 00H, sooo [aot 509 2 3a | Frequency ump 2A Tio 00h, 9990 [othe 3009 a 3a | Fesueney ump 28 Oto 00h, 690 | come 00 7% 35 | Frequeney jump 3A Dio are, 009 [001k 099 72 36 Freueney jump 38 Dio 40H 0999 [oot 209 a a | Speed dpi G10 9008 1 7 7 41 | Upto tequoney sone 010 100% oi 0% 74 2_| Output requany dtecton Tio 00H Gone rte 7H 43,__| Clu Reauency detection fer rvers® | go 4ooHz, 9008, oot e909 ™ Dewond | ora “44 | Second acceteratongecseaton tie pase m= see 75 § 45 | Second deceleration time 00 | anal 9999 8 8 0 ‘ee 2 [ae [eee tra boost at Tio 0,0 Ti a a S [CCRT second VF (base fequency) Note T) ——bto door, 9965 [0.00 e099 78 © [ET [ctl pvntonpraten cant] —— 010 a0 one eZ ° 45 | feeens Sat Prevention operaion | oto anor, 200 oot ° 5 | Seeons oil emeney etecion eae oath ihe % 52(aaa ‘ina Rater Func | Parameter cea ances Name SoutngRange | seting’ | Factory seting | “To s Incremants Page: 4 TG von wee, ra g +00 ‘ 7 7 Ey z S| Ged Sto 107.18 i 7 7 2 2 ~ 7103, Sto 14, z : 17,18,21 : zl Zi i 2 Do 00H a oie 7 A ‘Oto 500A COTA Rated output curent [79 2. Bee] 97 | Resta coasting te 0,0. 05s0e,0090 | ot see 00 eo an 25S] 58 | Restart cushion time 01060 sec 0. see 10800 80 as BE] 52 | remot seting incon selection 1 0 w g i__| igen made sector Tos o a H 61 | Reference for ivligent odo Tie 0a, 0, aor Ea) 5 62 | Rete netigent mode accel 010 200%, s069 o% os80 8 63 | Ror teriotigent mode dec Oia 20%, S660 0.1% 689 5 14_| Sarg froquoney for ebvator ode io THe 00 | 00TH 3009 5 | Rety slecbon Os i a 2 ial prevention operation vel oducion Om a0ore ote w 2 66 | starting frequency. eon al & [a Number oreties staan ooairence | Ow ToT oo 7 z cm [se rey wating tine 012 10506 Diss Tee 6 = [88 | Ret count tpi erase ° = a 2 3 ae To Teo BIT | — oy B [10 | specitrognerave rake ty ot 1) 01% % 7 & | 7 | Aepieamotr Tem Ie AA | a 5 i js oi z z a & [is | 0:5v0-10v seecion Tes, eis + o 0 74 Fir tne consent Te i a Ei | ne 1 1“ a 75_—_| Alarm cde ouput seecion THES 7 3 S 7 Panetta ine dab aT TY iz r oy 3 75__| Reveisefoaton prevenonselecion Ot, + ° 35 72| Operation mode seletion tes + ® 35 a0 | ote capac Do ssw, 9908 | — Cora 09 ED Gt | Number of motorpaes 746.12, 14,16, 9809 3509 38 a2 | Motor exciting cunt (6. To 0009 + 2000 70) 23] Rated moter votage 00 100 EV |aooao0y ate [100 £ [2 frat otortoguns 0p 120K oon ote 700 3 [88 T speed contol gain 010 200.9% on 0% 505 § [790 [motor constant i) ete), 010, 0900 2000 700 [at] ota constant 2) (Noe 4) 019, 900 3600 “00 & [oT note constant (1) ote) 019, 900 3600 “0 85 | Motor constant 02) (Note) 019, 999 3609 100 34 | Motor constant) O10 999 99 “0 86 | Onin suo tuning slecon om i o 106 36 | Avo tuning selina Tao 1 ° “7 100 | VFI (st Requency (Note Tio oor, so] | COW oom 108 e WT st Fequeny voags), “08 Se) [ma 0 10007 av ° 8 25 [toe | wo eocond requoney aw To wore, wa _—_| oT co cc a ‘VIF second requencyvatage) 2a] 10s 01m 10007 ov ° 108 Es Note 1) 85 | joa [vrs tn tenon oie 7 Tio ora, wae | Come ae cr 3 105” | ViFS (third frequency vottage) (Nate i) [Oto 1000 ov 0 “108, 106 [Vie fut trequeney) Note 1) Tia soot, 5009 | 0.01 a9 108 53ees ‘inom Roter | Name soting Range | “soting’ | Factor geting | “to Ingromants age: Bg | tor [Wester tecery voto 10007 anv ° ‘0 a3 EB) 100 | vrs ns tequoncy (note) oto 4oore, 00 | cote 900 100 zs 3 i ene vlane) BET ee | Wieam nme te ov 100 ov ° 1 Tia BH sa TOSGT | OF sOc.TT 110 | Third acclratondectoration ime even a 9609 109 2 an | ra comerton ime Tio 3800 seo 16560 | Ot secTT = 7 8 sec, 9600, see a To 30.0%, 0659 [0.1% a5 cc 113__| Tha VIF (ase fequeney) (aie 7 Oto 00H, 6002 | oot 3209 08 2 [ie Pe at pevertonepratin cea Gio 200% om sok [103 “15 | Tied sta preveron operation fequengy | 010 400% Dore ° “08 “16 | Ta ouput fequency detection Tio oot, £099 | othe oe ‘8 “7 — [Staton ruber Oat “ o 109 § [is commana sd 06,18 7 a2 108 3 vobveata 3-7 Gaia ena) B [119 | ston tina natn oe aa ee 1 109 5 [ix [Parco presenosTaboence O12 7 z cr} § [121 hamber of eommuniation eer Te 10, 6585, + o 708 2 | 122 | communication enack timo interval nos eeas st) 04 ° 109 g 2000 § [sig ie ong Tia Teoms, 5505 ine os “a8 “24 | OR LF presoncfabsonessalosion O12 4 + “08 “28 | PD acon selecton TO, 20,77 = 10 “1 = [120 [P10 proportnal band Tito 1060%, 0950 | 07 700% 1 [or eral tine Bite 3600 se, S669 | 0.1 seo eee 1 B [13 operat So 100%, 6509 a% 3890 1 2 [eT iower Oo 100%, 8899 a6 3609 19 7135] BO acon st pon far PU operation To 100% 01% % 9 134 P10 afferent ine Tie 10.00 sec 5565 | 0.01 see 3605 119 = Conmersel power sopninverer Ey | 195 | swtcrover sequence oulput femal on 1 ° 128 38 selection hi 736 MC switch-over Infeock time Dito 100.0 see Oi sec. TO sec 728 24 [ir | siatwatng tine 010 100.0 see Ogee D500 [126 a5 Commercial power — suppipinverer 5S |_ 1° _| svtenver select at alam eozuence es : 2 iw £ “hdomate hvetercommerial” power a er owaoois vow | oon owe | Backlash acceleraion stopping Fequency — 7 a wo | Bac 0 400r oot ‘00H 5 Gackash eccaleralon sopping tine cmon wae me i Cn ow 300 os os; 129 acklash deceleration oping [te ow 400K ootte ‘00H 129 fequency (Note 7) Backlash decleraion sopping ne Game we oe vas | Beck o1o.380 01 05: 129 B | 14 | sine sting sutorover eee aa ‘ 1 3 peed satin 04 108,18, 110 Be] 140 | sta prevention vel at oVinput 0 10200% on 150% 10 bf Be SE] 140 | sta prevention vel at 10V input 010 200% 01% 200% 10 54eas ‘ama Tater Pee ee Name Soting Range Setting | Factory Setting | To Inromenis re _, a ara omco Te oe Tae § § [ist [et eer doco aod Ties Oise . 138 98 [ie Pane cant catecten vt Te oe aE * 153, ‘Zero current detection period Oto 4 sec, 0.01 seo 05sec 431, Tataga ion aheion Sats Sal 2 184 | prevention operation ea y e ea § [ir seaad craton 70 i 7 Ta i ms 2 [ir Poc se wanng te Tez wes voad | Ee $ i 150 | Aa tinal ttn secon ase 1 1 104 5 a Ture ost star Fotrtneo a a 1 Q ts ase 163, First cushion time for restart Oto 20 sec 0.1 sec Osec 135 5 8| 164 | Fretcueion votage for reian 010 100% 08% om 135 1 iss — Resa aa penton pono Toa oa aoe [70 | wattourmetr ear 0 = 0 138 EB [arr [peut operant meter car o _— o 8 © [__173 | User group 1 resetraton 010 990 7 o 138 2 174 | User group t deletion To 999, 9909, 1 o 136 4 175 ‘User group 2 registration Do 999 4 o 136 3 176 __| User group 2 deletion Oto 898, 9008, 7 o 136, 10 ial onton sob Oia 008 1 a 735 (ist fiancee ston Cite cs i i i § [Cie emma tnasr mean Cis 8 1 z 38 © [iss [ar ena tren soso Ci 000 1 z 38 3 184 ‘AU terminal function selection ‘Oto 20, 9999 1 4 136, § [te [os ternal tren soci C1 68 i $ 738 & [iss [cota tne lean Tai 8 i 5 ‘38 2 [in — Prune tneton secon O10, i o 38 & [te 7 si terminal function selection 010 199, 2999 1 1 198. 3 [ise emt ection ete Di 08 i z 738 & [tes otternnaineton secon 908 i $ 38 r 194 FU terminal function selection 0 to 199, 9899 1 4 138, 8] sco | usesinta vat seting ots, 999 1 0 0 3 55Za inna Teter “ Pee | Peers Name Setting Range | “Setng’ | Factor Setting | “To 4 a Inert Page: re Programmed wparton mnaaeecond | 07 Wire second cy 200 _| selection 41,3: Hour, minute u 2 badd a ‘0-2: Rotatlon direction 1 0 Program set 0400, 999: Fequeney | athe 60 is g 201 | tto10 (0.99.59: Time Minato oF ° “ 5 : second a s (0-2: Rotation direction 1 0 3 Program set 2 400, 9099: Frequency | oH avo E | 2 awa 0900: Time Minute or ° a 5 second 2 Ti Rotalon recon 5 7 aay | Prooram sot 400, 0a: Frequency | othz oso ta 2030 9930: Tine te or ° second Zi Tamer sting Es — 7 Ta 7 aa arg ce aon oe aire Eo 75 ac ng anes Oia 00H, S809, om 208 rr Se = [ote wore coc0 ‘aire 3509. as 3 in 10-400, 8900, ‘o.0iHe 2800) 145 3 oe Do 00H, 8600 ‘Otte 00 a5 5 qi To doors, 1600 oath 3000 a5 3 z (0 o-400He, 9999, ote 3990 45) iat tr Ej 0 to 400Hz, 9999 O.01HE. 9999 145, EB] amo | sonpw catia on 1 1 45 : 3 | 244 | cootng an operation ssecion at 1 ° us as ZH] 250 | stopsetcion oto 100000, 900 | 0. see 2900 te | TF ae sn sn, a z z a { = ee eae come he ‘ar & [ass svoaaton staring feauon Tie ome, ad | — OT ae ia 2 [2 _[rovrtanre esaton tw ov 0000 1 ato ws | 12 | see | v7 3 | 265 | powertaiure deceleration tine 2 See 9999 “7 {SSE eo ver equonc ag separscortacod tren apeed 8 E | 770 | trequoncy contol section pias ' ° ve $8 5 mel ram Saat O10 200% om 50% ry Ws eam oe ee ii kaveapmaone | Ow oor, ooo | oni 3000 10 E* [bra | Givers averauina iter constant “to 4000 1 6 150 = Stop-orcoracl exclog cent ow 5 we gy |__| Setnanns se 010 1000%, 2600 1% 609 (aes) | 156 BE] are | stopor-conact Pum cane tequeney | 01015, 9900 ' sev9 now =) | 158 56waa ‘inimam Rater rer incaere Namo Setting Range Satting | Factory Setting | To rd Increments Page: 3] | Eo Brae opering omeney NOTES Toso aire we 157 rd 2 [27a Tera opening curent te 019 200% atm 130% 17 5 ? ra oponing eure detacion Une Ti see rf E | 2 [Base 0102 ee oases | 7 2 3 [2a — [crane proton tne tat Woe Diese ieee Tie Fy a 282 Brake operation frequency (Note 3) Oto 30H 0.08Hx GHz 157 ry § [235 [brake operation tne at too Note 3. ie 5 6 or Tes 17 3 [2a _ [aera sess rar ai ot T 3 ‘er 7S Overapesd delecionfemuenay Traine, os | — OE oe a7 600] FM trial cattration = = = cc § [801 [antennal eatbrtion — — — tet 3 [oz [reser stig vols Dov | Sosore | —oome | ov ore [168 2 [7 200 | Freaaey sting vtap gain owiv | giee, | come | sv | com | 100 § (ae [Femme cing mers TewaR | Oto soe | ome [anh ees 3 | 205 | Frequancyseting cure gan ow20ma] ico, | aot | zoma | conte | 169 i] 23 | c00 | euzzar contol on 1 1 15 32 Note: 1. Indicates the parameter settings which are ignored when the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode is selected. 2. The factory setting of the FR-A540 (400V class) is 400V. 3. Can be set when Pr. 80, 81 # 9999, Pr. 60= 7 or 8 4. Can be accessed when Pr. 80, 81 # 9999, Pr. 77 = 801 5. Can be accessed when Pr. 270 = 1 or 3, Pr. 80, 81 # 9999. 6. The setting depends on the inverter capacity. 7. Can be accessed when Pr, 29 = 3. 8. The half-tone screened parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation if 0 (factory setting) has been set in Pr. 77. (Note that the Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 settings cannot be changed during extemal operation.) 9. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.4K)/(1.5K to 3.7K\(5.5K, 7.5K)/(11K), 40.The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.4K to 1.5K)/(2.2K to 7.5K)/(11K or more). 574.2 Parameter Function Details Pr. 0 "torque boost” Related parameters Pr. 3 "base frequency" Pr. 46 “second torque boo: Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr. 112 "third torque boost" Pr. 71 “applied motor” Pr. 80 "motor capacity” Pr. 81 “number of motor poles" Pr, 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) ‘You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low frequency range to improve motor torque reduction in the low speed range. © Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque. © You can select any of the three different starting torque boosts by terminal switching, Parameter | Factory anne Settee_| Setting Range Remarks 0.4K, 078K | 6%. 15K 137K | 4%, ° 55K 75K [3% Or0 20% THK oc more |__2%. 6 ‘399 | 15 30%, 6600 | S000: Function val 112, 3909 | Oto 30%, $989 | 9998, Function inva SOS © aputcureye} Sav Fonny + Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%, set the OHz voltage in %. + Allarge setting will cause the motor to overheat. The guideline for maximum value is about 10%. + Pr. 46 is valid when the RT signal is on. Pr. 112 is valid when the X9 signal is on. Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal. Note: 1. When using a constant-torque motor, change the setting of this parameter as follows: OAK, 0.78K...6%, 1.5K to 3.7k, 4%, 6.5K oF more...2% 2, This parameter setting is ignored when Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 have been set to select the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode. 3. When the Pr. 0 setting is either ofthe following values for 5.5K and 7.5K, itis automatically changed when the Pr.71 setting is changed: (1) When Pr. 0 setting is 3% (factory setting) ‘The Pr. 0 satting is changed to 2% automatically when the Pr.71 setting is changed from [general-purpose motor selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)] to [constant-torque motor selection value (1, 13 to 18)] (2) When Pr. 0 setting is 2% The Pr. 0 setting is changed to 3% (factory setting) automatically when the Pr.71 setting is changed from (constant-torque motor selection value (1, 13 to 18)] to (general-purpose motor selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)]. 4, Increase the setting when the inverter-to-motor distance is long or motor torque in the fow-speed range is insufficient, for example. A too large setting may result in an overcurrent trip. 5. When the RT (X9) signal is on, the other second (third) functions such as second (third) acceleration/deceleration time are also selected. 6. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to 186 during use of the second or third functions, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals. before making setting 58aaa Pr. 4 "maximum frequency’ Pr. 2"minimum frequency” Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum frequency” Related parameters Pr, 903 "frequency setting voltage gain” Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain" Used to clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency. Used for high-speed operation at or over 120Hz. © Can be used to set the upper and lower limits of motor speed. Fararietr Factory Number. Setting ‘Setting Range i rar Oo OH z OH Cio 120K 8 oh 120 400K + Use Pr. 4 to set the upper limit ofthe output frequency. If the frequency of the frequency command entered is. higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency. To perform operation over 120Hz, set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr, 18. (When the Pr. 18 value is set, Pr. 1 automatically changes to the frequency in Pr. 18.) + Use Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency. Note: When the frequency setting analog signal is used to run the motor beyond 60Hz, change the Pr. 903 and Pr, 905 values. If Pr. 4 or Pr. 18 is only changed, the motor cannot run beyond 60Hz. Z\cauTion ‘As When the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency by merely switching the start signal on, without entering the command frequency. 59aaa Pr. 3 “base frequency” Related parameters Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" 71 “applied motor" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 47 “second VIF (base frequency) Pr. 81 “number of motor poles” Pr. 113 “third VIF (base frequency) Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage” Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr, 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating ‘* When running a standard motor, generally set the frequency rating to 60Hz, When running the motor using the commercial power supply-inverter switch-over, set the base frequency to the same value as the power supply frequency. Parameter Factory Paes eae Setting Range Romarks 3 ‘cole to 400 3558: 36% of power to 1000v, 8888, | supply voltage 7 $988 9989 9999: Same 95 power supply voltage a7 350 Oe 400He, 9968 _| 9990: Function invalid nS, 9960 (Oo 400H2, 9969 | 9999: Function invalid 8 i + Use Pr. 3, Pr. 47 and Pr. 113 to set the base frequency (rated motor frequency). Three different base frequencies can be set and the required frequency can be selected from among them. + Pr. 47 is valid when the RT signal is on, and Pr. 113 is valid when the X9 signal is on. Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal. + Use Pr. 19 to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage). Note: 1. Set the base frequency to 60Hz when using a constant-torque motor. 2. When the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode has been selected using Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, Pr. 3, 47, 119 and Pr. 19 are made invalid and Pr. 84 and Pr. 83 are made valid 3. When '2" (5-point flexible VIF characteristics) is set in Pr. 71, the Pr. 47 and Pr. 113 settings are made invalid. 4, When the RT (X8) signal is on, the other second (third) functions such as second (third) acceleration/deceleration time are also selected. 5. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to 186 during use of the second or third functions, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting 60TSE Pri4 igh speed) Pr. 5 "3-speed setting (middle speed)" Related parameters Pr. 1 “maximum frequency’ Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" Pr. 6 "3-speed settin dd)" Pr. 46 "jog frequency” Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation’ Pr, 24 to Pr. 27 “multi-speed setting Pr. 28 "acceleration/deceleration ne pattern" Pr. 79 “operation mode selection” re 39 “multt-speed settin Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) {speeds 8 to 15)" Used to preset the running speeds in parameters and switch between them using terminals. © Any speed can be selected by switching on-off the external contact signal (RH, RM, RL or REX signal) '@ By using these functions with jog frequency (Pr. 15), maximum frequency (Pr. 1) and minimum frequency (Pr. 2), up to 18 speeds can be set, © Valid in the external operation mode or in the PU/external combined mode ("3" or "4" set in Pr. 79). Parameter” T Factory Setting | Setting Range Remarks < Sore Toso 3 30H Ot AOD 3 ore Bo 400HE Bow 5999 Tio Abe, 9650 | — SERS. Nol watacied 22 19250 3999 Ot dOdHz, 9099 | — 9009: Not selected + Set the cunning frequencies in the corresponding parameters. + Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 400Hz during inverter operation. Alter the required multi-speed setting parameter has been read, the setting can be changed by pressing the [UP/DOWN] key. (In this case, when you release the [UP/DOWN] key, press the [SET] key to store the set frequency. When using the FR-PU04 (option), press the [WRITE] key.) + Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the REX signal Note: 1, The multi-speed settings override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5, 4-5) 2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode. 3. For 3-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the frequency setting of the lower signal 4, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them. ‘The parameter values can be changed during operation, 6. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to 186, the other functions may be affected Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting 61PARAMETERS: Pr. 7 “acceleration time’ Pr. 8 “deceleration time’ Related parameters Pr. 3 "base frequency” Pr, 29 "acceleration/deceleration Pr.20"% ration/deceleration reference frequency’ en Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 21 “acceleration/deceleration time increments” Pr, 44 “second acceleration/ i w Pr. 45 "second deceleration time’ Pr. 110 “third acceleration/deceleration time” Pr. 111 “third deceleration time” Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time. Set @ larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease, aay ee Seting Range amar Takes [Sse 7 PERE [Ste oto sto sa 260 ee Takers [Sane 3 Piskariss [Sst 1 gio ans 8000 2 oa Tate Ft z at TURE TOT Takase oa PESEERE | Se _| cto otn soto 80.0 ve PEKeuWss | soeo | oie 300 eco 20 se, ase | SACHIN NES vio [ESRC | soso | ein aeo0 secon 20 ec, a0 | 558 Funcion vate Taker S55: Reraton tive Tar PESSenH | see | ore seta sx io 0 ee, 000 fentne= Ae { — I = Use Pr. 21 to set the accelerationideceleration time and minimum setting increments: Set value "0" (factory setting) «++ 0 to 3600 seconds (minimum setting increments: 0.1 seconds) Set value"? + 0 to 360 seconds (minimum setting increments: 0.01 seconds) + Use Pr. 7, Pr. 44 and Pr. 110 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set in Pr. 20 from OHz. + Use Pr. 8, Pr. 45 and Pr. 111 to set the deceleration time required to reach OHz from the frequency set in Pr. 20. + Pr, 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on, and Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid when the X9 signal is ‘on, When both RT and X9 are on, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid, + Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal + Set"9996" in Pr. 45 and Pr. 111 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44, Pr. 110). ‘When "9999" is set in Pr. 110, the function is made invalid 62aaa Note: 1. In S-shaped accelerationideceleration patter A (refer to page 70), the set time is a period required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 3, ‘Acceleration/deceleration time calculation expression when the set frequency is the base frequency 2 higher 4 3 Pray xe+8 T T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (seconds) f, Set frequency (Hz) + Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the base frequency of 60Hz (OHz to set frequency) Frequoncy setting (22) a 60 20 200 400 [decelerationtime (seconds) 5 = 2 a TOE 15 15 35 a 205 2, Ifthe Pr, 20 setting is changed, the settings of calibration functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905 (frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged, To adjust the gains, adjust calibration functions Pr. 03 and Pr. 905, 3, When the setting of Pr. 7, 8, 44, 45, 110 or 111 is "0", the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04 seconds. At this time, set 120Hz or less in Pr. 20. 4, When the RT (X9) signal is on, the other second (third) functions such as second (third) torque boost are also selected. 5. Ifthe shortest acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system's GD* and motor torque. Pr. 9 “electronic overcurrent protection” Related parameter Pr. 71 "applied motor’ ) Set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect the motor from overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed. Paramalar Factory Seting | _Seting Range 3 Rated capa coment | 0195008 *0.4K and 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current, * Set the rated current [A] of the motor. (Normally set the rated current of the motor at base frequency operation.) + Setting of "0" makes the electronic overcurrent protection (motor protective function) invalid. (The inverter's output transistor protective function is valid.) + When Mitsubishi's constant-orque motor is used, set "1" or any of "13" to "18" in Pr. 71 to select the 100% continuous torque characteristic in the law speed range. Then, set the rated motor current in Pr. 9, Note: 1. When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. Install an external thermal relay to each motor. 2. When a difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic overcurrent protection will be deteriorated. in this case, use an external thermal relay. 3. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. Use an external thermal relay. 63asia Pr. 10 "DC dynamic brake operation frequency’ c= Parameters Pr. 14 "DC dynamic brake operation time” Pr, 13 “starting frequency" Pr. 71 “applied motor” Pr. 12 "DC dynamic brake voltage” By setting the stopping DC dynamic brake voltage (torque), operation time and operation starting frequency, the stopping accuracy of positioning operation, etc. or the timing of operating the DC dynamic brake to stop the motor is adjusted according to the load. Parameter | Factory aametet | Ses |_sesing Range | Remarks 3588, Operated at 10 3Hz | Oto 12042, 9999 | or below Pr. 13, value. ‘8888: Operated " 05sec | 0 to 10 sec, 8888 | when X13 signal ~ switches on Creston taser Takoress | a me "2 [ikormere [2% 080% I eganane, | al | nwsen ge [EE] operon sine = Use Pr. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC dynamic brake application is started By cetting "9090" in Pr. 10, the motor is decelerated to the frequency set in Pr. 13 and braked. = Use Pr. 11 to set the period during when the brake is operated. By setting "8888" in Pr. 11, the DC dynamic brake is operated while the X13 signal is on. + Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X13 signal. + Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage. = When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), change the Pr. 12 setting as follows: 3.7K or less...4%, 5.5K or more...2% Note: 1. When the Pr. 12 setting is either of the following values for 5.5K and 7.5K, it is automatically changed when the Pr.71 setting is changed: (1) When Pr. 12 setting is 4% (factory setting) The Pr. 12 setting is changed to 2% automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is changed from [general-purpose motor selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)] to [constanttorque motor selection value (1, 13 to 18)] (2) When Pr. 12 setting is 2% The Pr. 12 setting is changed to 4% (factory setting) automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is changed from [constant-torque motor selection value (1, 13 to 18)] to [general-purpose motor selection value (0, 2 to 8, 20, 23, 24)) 2. When Pr. 11 ="0 or 8888" or Pr. 12 Z\ caution A\ In the orientation (using option) mode, do not set "8888" in Pr. 11. The motor may not be stopped in the correct position. A\ Install a mechanical brake. No holding torque is provided. 64 OC dynamic brake operation cannot be performed.aa startin ‘You can set the starting frequency between 0 and 60Hz. © ‘Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is switched on. Parameter Faciony Number Sorting Sotting Range 8 sre o.0 to Gone Not: The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13 "starting frequency’ For example, when SHz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will start running when the frequency setting signal reaches SH7 Related parameters Pr. 0 “torque boost” Pr, 80 "motor capacity” Pr, 81 "number of motor poles” Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, (input terminal function selection) Pr. 14 "load pattern sele: You can select the optimum output characteristic (VIF characteristic) for the application and load characteristics. Parameter Factory no Number Setting ee ore t 14 0 TBs a) (=) om Recomeyeced eyatauetraa oats arta aston. Ozetng Bost ow oaton. sea roan ovnatrasany He ovpatraeney (2) ovoattacereycm Danaea recressn S| me [eeoaereaen aes ofa ees caeea Pec sae «| erm [Bierce ee TET eam ncn eee eee eel spisig intone 5 RT signal [OFF..For constant-lorque Ft, boost for forward rotation 0% (samme as in| as Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when Pr. 80 and Pr, 81 have been set to select the advanced ‘magnetic flux vector contro! mode. 2. When the RT signal is on, the other second functions such as second acceleration/deceleration time and second torque boost are also selected. 3. When the setting is 4 or 5, X17 signal may be used instead of the RT signal. Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr, 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X17 signal. Related parameters Pr. 20 “accelerationideceleration reference frequency” Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments" Pr. 79 “operation mode selection” Pr. 180 to Pr. 188 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 15 "jog frequency’ Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time" Inthe external operation mode, jog operation can be started and stopped with the start signal (STF, STR) after selection of the jog mode (JOG signal ON). In the PU operation mode, jog operation can also be performed using the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PU04), © Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation Parameter Factory e —- anes eae Setting Rang Remarks 15 BH te 400He, Do 3600 see, When Pr 220 16 Os see (010360 see When Br? arateceyn CB Sains oo [ee remwersensre SET] i ovee rtsn STR Port Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A, the set time is a period of time required to reach Pr. 3 "base frequency" 2. The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog operation, 86Used to select the logic of the MRS signal ‘When the MRS signal switches on, the inverter shuts off the output. Parameter Factory Number Setting Setting Range 17 ° a2 Pea Seting Spesiteatons of RS Signat o emai span pa 2 Normally cosed input (NIC earlat input apecifeaons) + For sink logic (ose et) aE Ear meee = 67naa Related parameters Pr, 48 "second stall prevention operation current” Pr, 49 "second stall prevention operation frequency" Pr, 73 "0-5VI0-10V selection” Pr, 114 “third stall prevention operation Pr, 22 “stall prevention operation level" Pr, 23 “stall prevention operation level I 5 66" vent atio reduction starting frequency" current’ Pr, 148 "stall prevention operation level eee ancy Prevention operation at OV input 136 “sal prevention operation selection” Pr. 149 "stall prevention operation level at 10V inpui Pr. 154 “volta i ic ing stall prevention operation” © You can set the stall prevention operation levels. © For high-speed operation at or over 60Hz, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not increase. To improve the operation characteristics of the motor in such a case, the stall prevention level in the high-frequency range can be reduced. This is effective for operation of a centrifugal separator up to the high-speed range. Normally, set 60Hz in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23. © For operation in the high-frequency range, the current in the locked motor state is smaller than the rated ‘output current ofthe inverter and the inverter does not result in an alarm (protective function is not activated) ifthe motor is at 2 stop. To improve this and activate the alarm, the stall prevention level can be reduced. © In order to provide torque during stall prevention, Pr. 154 is factory-set not to reduce the output voltage. The setting of reducing the output voltage further decreases the probability of overcurrent trip occurrence. © The stall prevention operation level can be varied by entering the analog signal into terminal 1 Parameter [facto | seuing Range Remarks 2 Sot | 010 200%, 9900 _| GOOD, Anatag waa zB S860 | Oto 200%, 9009 | 0000: Constant accolng PEE 5 or Oto ator ia 150% D0 200% Baa) 7 2% Tie 200% (Gain T Gupat wetage resuend i y ot 1: Ouipa wotage nol edleed Seta xampa P2260, P2260, Proton) ov 1 etvcoge (Getta tng tema +5) Sta raven pean ees) 68Aiea + In Pr. 22, set the stall prevention operation level. Normally set itto 150% (factory setting). Set "0" in Pr. 22 to disable the stall prevention operation + To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high-frequency range, set the reduction starting frequency in Pr. 86 and the reduction ratio compensation factor in Pr. 23. Calan expression fe stat prevention epraton ve Sia prevention operation vel o2s-t00 Pr. a) P2218), Pr (Me) «Pr 2006 “output frequency (Hz)’ ~~ 400Hz «y seting 009" acon sein nr. 23, the sl prevention operation eves constant athe P.22seting upto 402 + Set"9999" in Pr. 22 to vary the stall prevention operation level using the analog signal (0-5V/0-10V) entered to. tne fequeny ting suelnynpultermina 1 (Use > 79 9 set beeen 10Y ard 3) + Use Pr. 148 and Pr. 149 to adjust the gain and bias of the analog signal. "Set" mr Toa reduce te euputvelege dung stat reventon operation where, A Note: 1. When Pr. 22 ="9999", terminal 1 is exclusively used for setting the stall prevention operation level, ‘The auxiliary input and override functions are not activated Z\ caution ZA Do not seta too amall value as the ofall prevention operation current. Otherwise, torque generated will reduce. A\ Test operation must be performed. Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation during constant speed may change the speed suddenly. Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance. Related parameters: Pr, 59 "remote setting functior Pr, 73 "0-SVI0-10V selecti Pr. 28 “multi-speed input compensation" By entering a compensation signal into the frequency setting auxiliary input terminal 1 (Note 2), the speeds (frequencies) of multi-speed settings or the speed setting made by remote setting function can be compensated for. Parameter Factory voaing Range Smarke Number See tte | seen aco oan a c SURE |icsreanaaiies Note: 1. Use Pr. 73 to select the compensation input voltage between 0-26V and 0-10V. 2. When any of "4, 5, 14 and 15” is set in Pr. 73, the compensation signal is entered into terminal 2. (Override functions) 69Rass Related parameters, Pr. 29 “acceleration/deceleration patten . 3 "base frequency" . 140 “backlash acceleration stopping frequency" / Pr. 7 "acceleration time Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 444 “ba time’ Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" Pr. 142 “back! .celeration stopping frequency" | Pr. 44 "second acceleration! deceleration time" Pr 143" celeration stopping time" Pr, 45 "second deceleration time” Pr, 110 "third acceleration! deceleration time’ 114 "third deceleration time" Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern. Also, you can suspend acceleration/deceleration at set frequencies and for the time period set in the parameters, Parameter Factory oe Scare Setting Range Remarks 29 0 Ties 3 Bacash compensation "40 Toor Tie s00r Vaid when P29 3. at 05 see Dio 350 see | Vai when Pr.29 = 3. a2 “100K O10 400H2 Wal when Pr. 29= 3, 135, see Die 350 see | Vaid when Pr. 29= 3 (Savana (tees easrccteatten) | (ated secraviertctens | aageconsimteniecrtens} | __Baaion conpersten nse i 2 Z, = i i i z (eb [ra] : ; or gel : i tne [8 a 8 nee tm |S ‘ime | 8 Aa - n(ecra] aa Fe Sumy |_Funetion Description Tear © | acceleration | Linear accelertion/deceeration is made upldoun tothe preset frequency (acory stn). exertion Formachie too spindles Sepud | Tho acingis ned ments nceaay omake acclraboneceraonina short pio esos 1 | eeston! | Srhigher speed range. Into eosaatonecteraton pater, fb (bose Tequnoy) & abvays the — inflection point of an § shape, and you can eat the accsleraiondeceleraton time accorting to the eco) ‘eduction in tor torque inthe 60Hz or higher constant-outbut eperaton range Snape | Prevention of argo colapse on conveyer, ec 2 [S206 ., | seting pres Sanapad sccoleraonlseceeatin fom (2 (Curent reuency) to #1 arse accetraton! | equency), easing an acceeraion!eceleraion shock. This paltem has an elect onthe prevention of Eo cargo colapse, ec. Backlash compensalion for reduction gear, ete. Backlash | This funeson stops the speed change termporerly during accelerationdeceleaton, reducing a shock 3 | compensation | cenerated when a reduction gearbackash is eliminated suddenly. Use Pr. 140 to 143 tose the stopping {Note 2,3) | mos and stoping frequencies in accordance wit the above slagrams. Note: 1. For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to reach the "base frequency" in Pr. 3, not the "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency’ in Pr. 20. For details, refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 2. Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 is accessible when "3"is set in Pr. 29, 3. The acceleration/deceleration time is increased by the stopping time. 70Aaa Pr. 30 “regenerative function selection’ Pr. 70 “special regenerative brake duty” Related parameters, 180 "RL terminal function selection” 181 "RM terminal function selection" 182 "RH terminal function selection” 183°°RT terminal function selection” 184 "AU terminal function selection” 185 "JOG terminal function selection’ 186 "CS terminal function selection”, Pr, Pr. Pr. Pr. Pr, ‘© When making frequent staris/stops with a 7.5K or less inverter, use the optional "high-duty brake resistor" (FR-ABR) to increase the regenerative brake duty. ‘© Use the optional “high power factor converter (FR-HC)" to reduce harmonics, improve the power factor, or continue the regenerative mode. ee oe Remarke = 3g Tea oe Tee TROT 7» o% oioa0% 22K 107 5 o% Tikormere 4) When using the built-in brake resistor, brake unit, power return converter + Set"0" in Pr. 30, The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid. ALUhis time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows: *FR-AS20-0.4K to 3.7K 3% *FR-AS20-5.5K to 7.5K 2% “FR-AS40-0.4K t07 5K: 2% (2) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) + Set"1" in Pr. 30, + Set'"10%" in Pr. 70. (3) When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) 1) Set"2" in Pr. 30. 2) Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the following signals to the contact input terminals. + X10: FR-HC connection (inverter operation enable signal) (Note 3) To make protective coordination with the high power factor converter (FR-HC}, use the inverter operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output. Enter the RDY signal of the high power factor converter. + X11: FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection signal) When the computer link inboard option (FR-ASNR) is used and the setting is made to hold the pre- instantaneous power fallure mode, use this signal to hold that mode. Enter the instantaneous power failure detection signal of the high power factor converter. 3) The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid. Set "10" and "11" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to allocate the terminais used to input the X10 and X11 signals, 71AAWeaess ‘The Pr. 70 setting is invalid for the inverter of 11K or more. Pr. 70 “regenerative brake duty” indicates the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation, ‘The setting should not be higher than the permissible value of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can overheat, ‘The X10 signal may be replaced by the MRS signal When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to 186, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting, Z\warnine ‘AX The value set in Pr. 70 must not exceed the permissible value of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can overheat. Pr, 31 “frequency jump 1A" Pr, 32 "frequency jump 1B" Pr. 33 "frequency jump 2A" Pr. 34 "frequency jump 2B" Pr. 35 “frequency jump 3A" Pr. 36 “frequency jump 3B" © When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of 2 mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area, © The value set to 1, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this frequency. Parameter Factory Number | Setting | Seta Range cee eae 3 ses5 | Creare, ES | VEST Finebonaie | p 5 32 9569 | Oe 400H2, $989 | 9996: Function inva] § 38 3889 | Oto 400H. 9960 | 9509: Funetoninvaia | 8 34 19969 | Oe 400Hz, $999 | 9995: Funcioninvaig.| f° 35 9999 Oto 40H, 2960 | 9609: Functioninval| 3... 36 963] Oto 400Hz, 9099 | 9995: Funcion inva ]~ "3 + To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr. 33 and Pr. 34 (30Hz and 3SHz), set 3sHz Pata in Pr. 34 and 30Hz in Pr. 33, cae + To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 36Hz, set 36Hz in Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34. ea “ Praksos [ Note: 4. During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid 72Pr. 37 "speed display" Pr. 144 “speed settin -ovel Related parameters, Pr. 82."PU main display data selection" Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection” jotor capacity" jumber of motor poles” The units of the running speed monitor display of the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUD4), the running speed setting in the PU operation mode, and the parameter setting used for frequency setting can be changed from the frequency to the motor speed or machine speed. Parameter Factony Number Setting eee nena betes a ° 31a BE Sr Frequancysating added aad : 024 + To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation. + To display the motor speed, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10) or the number of motor poles plus 400 (102, 104, 106, 108, 110) in Pr. 144. + When values have been set in both Pr. 37 and Pr. 144, priority is as follows: Pr. 144 = 102 to 110 > Pr, 37 = 1 to. 9998 > Pr. 144=2 to 10 Hence, the half-tone screened settings in the following list become valid + When the running speed monitoring has been selected, the parameter setting unit and the running speed setting unit in the PU operation mode depend on the combination of the Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 settings as indicated below: Running Speed Parameter Seng Unit Monitor Disp Running Speed Seting Unit_| __°F-37 Seta Pr 144 Setting Saad of poe moter (mi 3 o te o Tea Motor speed (min) Ts ones Ho nin aa! wen He BET ° eens amin So tesa: Zio 10 Note: 7. In the VIF control mode, the motor speed is converted from the output frequency and does not match the actual speed. When the advanced magnetic lux vector control mode has been selected in Pr. 80 and 81, this display shows the aspeed (estimated value found by motor slippage calculation). 2. During PLG feedback control, the data displayed is the same as in advanced magnetic flux vector control. Note that the speed displayed is the actual speed from the PLG. 3. When the running speed display has been selected with "0" set in Pr. 37 and "0" in Pr. 144, the monitor display shows the speed reference for a 4-pole motor (1800rimin is displayed at 60H2). 4, To change the PU main monitor (PU main display) or PU level meter (PU level display), refer to Pr. 52 and Pr. 53. 5. As the operation panel display is 4 digits, "9999" is displayed when the monitored value exceeds Z\ caution AX Make sure that the running speed and number of poles set are correct. Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine. 73sagan Related parameters Pr. 190 “RUN terminal function selection® Pr, 191 "SU terminal function selection” Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection’) Pr. 193 “OL terminal function selection” Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection’ Pr. 195 "ABC terminal function selection” ‘The ON range of the up-to-requency signal (SU) output when the output frequency reaches the running frequency can be adjusted between 0 and +100% of the running frequency, ‘This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached or used as the operation start signal etc. for related equipment. Parameter Factory Number Setting Sooo 4 10% Die THK . Lo ast nae t4—— usr a oe Pr. 42 “output frequency detection” Pr. 43 “output frequency detection for reverse rotation" Pr. 50 "second output frequency detection” Pr. 116 “third output frequency detection’ A signal is output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc. ®@ You can also set the detection of the frequency used exclusively for reverse rotation. This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical ift operation, ete. Parameter Factory aamete cae Setting Range Remarks a2 GH, io aor ‘SHOE Same a2 Pr E 43 209 0 to 400Hz, 9988 ae % or Os aor 116 3398) Tio aDGe, 9559] 6505 Function aval 74PAWS Refer to the figure below and set the corresponding parameters: + When Pr. 43 # 9999, the Pr.42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr.43 setting applies to reverse rotation, 5 Fema 4 50 j lie : ‘Ne Ne eerste l eee = 2 = Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminals used to output the FU2 and FUS signals. Note: 1. When the inboard option unit is used to exercise PLG feedback control, use the RUN (running) signal, (if the FU1, FU2 or FU3 signal is used, the brake may not be opened.) 2. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to 195, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting Related parameters Pr. 48 "st stall prevention operation current" pr, 22 "stall prevention operation level™ Pr, 23 stall prevention operation level Pr, 49 “second stall prevention operation ‘at double speed frequency" Pr, 66 “stall prevention operation level a . 7 reduction starting frequency” Pr. 114 “third stall prevention operation Pr. 184 "voltage reduction selection current" during stall prevention operation" ae . . Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 Pr. 115 “third stall prevention operation {input terminal function selection) frequency" 2 The stall prevention operation jevel can be changed within the range from OHz to the frequency set in Pr. 49 or 116. '® The stall prevention operation level can be changed by switching the external input signal on-off. Paramaier Factory ae ay Number Setting eee el 48 “50% Dio 200% a9 ° Tie 400H2, 9555 114 som 010 200%, Lt 15 o Dio 400H2 amore spent [Bea rennng rest a] 75 + Set the stall prevention operation level in Pr. 48 and Pr. 114. + Refer to the following list to set values in Pr. 49 and Pr. 115, + Pr. 114 and Pr, 118 are made valid by switching on the X9 signal. Set"S" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to allocate the terminal used to input the X@ signal Fe dO ing [Pa TS Sating Spenaiion 3 Second Ghia) sal prvention neon nt ached Second (hire) sal prevention funeion = actvaiedaccordng Te ireaueney a8 shown sbowe, Second tal prevention finion we aalvatedaccoring oe RT anal 9999 Cannot beset | RT signal ON ss": Stallvel Pr ARF sfnal OFF «+ Stal fvel Pr 22 0.032 to 400H2 Note: 1. When Pr. 49 = "9999", setting "O" in Pr. 48 disables the stall prevention function when the RT signal switches on. When Pr. 49 + "9999" and Pr. 48 = "0°, the stall prevention operation level is 0% when the frequency is equal to or less than the value set in Pr. 48. 2. When the stall prevention operation level signal input function is selected (Pr. 22 = 9999), setting "9999" in Pr. 49 changes the stall prevention operation level from the value of the stall prevention operation level signal (terminal 1 input) to the value set in Pr. 48 when the RT signal switches on. 3. When both the RT and X@ signals are on, the third stall prevention function is selected 4. When the RT (X9) signal is on, the second (third) functions such as second (third) acceleration/deceleration time are also selected 5. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to 186, the other functions may be affected Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting, Z\ caution | ZX Do not set a too small value to the second (third) stall prevention operation current. Otherwise, torque generated will decrease. 76SaaS in display screen data selectio: Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection’ Pr. 54 "FM terminal functi ion” Related parameters 37 "speed display" Pr, 86 “frequency monitoring reference” Pr, 56 “current monitoring reference” Pr. 170 “watt-hour meter clear" Pr. 171 “actual operation hour meter clear’ Pr. $00 "FM terminal calibration" $01 "AM termina calibration” Pr, 158 "AM terminal function selection" © You can select the signals shown on the operation panel (FR-DU04)/parameter unit (FR-PUO4) main display screen and on the parameter unit (FR-PUO4) level meter and signals output to the FM and AM terminals, © There are two different signal outputs: FM pulse train output terminal and AM analog output terminal. Select the signals using Pr. 54 and Pr. 188, Parameter Facto > Number ‘Setting eer 2 0 Dio, 22 100 3 “ 0103, 510 14,17, 18 Be a Tio 3, $1014.17, 1.1 158 i Tie3, sto 14, 718,21 Set Pr. 2 to Pr. 54 and Pr. 188 in accordance with the following table Parameter Seting Display [Pre fr.s3_[ Peet | Prise Full-Scale Velue of ome unt [ou | POT Putevet| rm | AM FM, AM, Level Meter LD | moar | meter | tominat | terminal Teds =o x r = Output eaten a oT 1 + Pe Output current ‘| no0|orc0| z z Pr 56 Ouiputvolage ¥—[-aie0-|-ori00-| 3 3 3 EBV 6 8667 Alem pi =| w99 | on00 | x 5 = Frequency set mops > ts 5 5 Pras Running speed min 6 s 6 8 6 | Pe. $8 value converted into Pr. 37 iota torus ea z, 7 | Rated argue of appied meters? Converter ouipotvolage | —V oe 5 3 400 or <00¥ Regenerative brake duty |v | 9 ~| 8 3 3 Pe 70 Serene ; Protection operation level _protection joad factor is a 2 hi a se Oxia uen peak a pap fw fo fs res input power a Output power | te [ig 4a Tat poner of iver tng «2 inputtemia'gaue [| P F r = ‘Output terminal status x a x «| — Load mer era P85 Motor exiting caret Sa Pos Poston suse ss : r — Cumuatve operation 5 . — can w fof» | « THAOHE aig to FAT erin Reference vonage output | —— | x |» » | ar | 21 | Futescate votage is output to Ab terminal Greriaion sats Te eee x = ‘Aeiual spat tine wf * 5 = ofr oad factor [ae [2 r x Rated vera eure ‘Gumus power [ass = 5 = 77na aia ‘When 100 is set in Pr.52, the monitored values during stop and during operation differ as indicated below: (The LED on the left of Hz flickers during a stop and is lit during running.) Pr ae 2 00 Baring oporationinung stop | _Puingstop | During operation ‘Guiput Requency Output frequency Set Fequency | Output frequen ‘Output current ‘Gutput current Cuiput votage Output voltage ‘Alarm disp ‘Alam display Note: 1. During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence is displayed. 2. During MRS, the values are the same as during a stop. During offine auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority. Note: 1. The monitoring of items marked x cannot be selected. 2. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of “output frequency to alarm display" can be selected in sequence by the SHIFT key. 3. “Frequency setting to output terminal status’ on the PU main monitor are selected by “other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04). 4, "The load meter is displayed in %, with the current set in Pr. 56 regarded as 100%. 5, The motor torque display is valid only in the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode. 6. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 52 is calculated using the inverter operation time, (Inverter stop time is not included.) Set "0" in Pr. 171 to clear i 7. When Pr. 53 = "0", the level meter display of the parameter unit can be erased 0. By setting "1, 2, 5, 6, 11, 17 or 18" in Pr. 63, the full scale value can be eet in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56. 9. The cumulative operation time and actual operation time are calculated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and recalculated from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DUO4) is used, the display shows "~ have elapsed. Whether 9999 or more hours have elapsed or not can be confirmed on the parameter unit (FR-PUOA), 10. When the operation panel (FR-DUO4) is used, the display unit is Hz, V or A only. 11. The orientation status functions when the FR-ASAP option is used. If the option is not used, may be set in Pr. 52 and the value displayed remains "0" and the function is invalid " after 9999 or more hours 78ave Pr. 55 “frequency monitoring reference’ Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference’ Related parameters Pr. 37 “speed display" Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection" Pr. 54 *FM terminal function selectior Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection Pr. $00 "FM terminal calibration" Pr. 901 “AM terminal calibration” Set the frequency or current which is referenced for display when the frequency or currentis selected for the FM and AM terminals and PU level meter display. Paranctsr[— Factoy oe oe es s care Tea 6 Rated 2452 | oto soon “eppanten emai ep enn ‘sapteees on — seers PORT en Feelin a i 5 8 3 i ea) ater 22) Referring to the above figures and following table, set Pr, 55 and Pr. 56: 7 Cave splay — | FW Ternal Function | Ai Tina Fano Monitoring Reference | wonitored Data Seacion | Selection Saaction Selection thas Pr. 83 Setting Pr. 54 Setting Pr. 158 Setting Saipan a) Hi ‘ 7 Frequency mentors [Frequency sting =) 5 5 Running speed (37 a 6 = Suet eet (8) 2 2 z Current montaing [Ouiput cent peak value i 7 i tsfrencePr.se [Used meter (7) 7 a7 a7 elo exting cae a a io Saiiowate nePU | Seionake be | Sto make a a using er #0, level meter ndleaton to | terminal PM ule tan | tein AM ep eee car! be in full-scale, ‘output to be 1440 voltage to be 10V. pusetiee Note: 1. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulsesisec, If Pr. 55 is not adjusted, the output of terminal FM willbe filled to capacity. Therefore, adjust Pr. 56. 2, The maximum output voltage of terminal AM is 10VOC. 79eas Pr. 57 “coasting ti 01 instantaneous power failure/commercial pow ly-inverter switch-over” Pr. 58 "cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/comm: switch-over" Pr.162 “Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection" Pr.163 “First cushion time for restart" 164 “First cushion ve for " Pr.165 "Restart stall prevention operation level © Youcan restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting) when the commercial power supply is switched to the inverter operation or when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure. (When automatic restart operation is set to be enabled, UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals will not be output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.) Parameter Factory a ies ame Setting Range Remarks 57 ‘3989 [00.110 5 eee, 9908 608: Ne restart 58 T0see Dio 60 sec, al . ae Fegunoy sar No Faaarey 1s, 586) Disa see, 16a % ‘Oto 100% 165 150% (Oi 200% 80PARAMETERS: Refer to the above figures and following table, and set the parameters: ra) Seting Description 3 Taquaney seach nade Frequency son ch ade af dtacton of an ntantaneouspowoure 162 No requncy sear 1 Indepenseiy of tne motor coasting speed the opt votage i racuay increased cae Regan ea as prea THRWTE [Ose cosing ts o [sake SK — [Losec caring une Generale iis sting ‘ik otmers [2.0 sec, easing te a Wating ine fo: rwaraciiagered ran afr power vei fom an RSananaois oxtessec | pover‘are (Sets tme fetveen 0 sane Stee Seeding teh nia moment (G0") and torque of the load) 3 heres ES Tinos 163 Oia 20se5 | Nowmaly te motr may e ron wih the actor setings. These values are asta to 64 215 100% | te oad Greta meme ae). 165 316 200% Note: 1, When restart operation is selected, UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals are not output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. 2. Ifthe inverter capacity is more than one rank higher than the motor capacity, an overcurrent (OCT) alarm may take place, disabling the motor from starting, 3. When Pr. 57 + 9999, the inverter will not run if the CS signal remain off, 4, When Pr. 162 ="0", connection of two ar more motors to one inverter will make the inverter function Improperly. (The Inverter will not start property.) 5. When Pr. 162 = "0", the DC dynamic brake is operated instantly on detection of restarting speed. ‘Therefore, ifthe inertia moment (GD) of the load is small, the speed may reduce. 6. When Pr, 163 ="1", the output frequency before an instantaneous power failure is stored and output at the time of restart. If the power of the inverter control circuit is lost, the frequency before an instantaneous power failure cannot be stored and the inverter will start at OHz. 7. The SU and FU signals are not output during restart but are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed, Z\ caution 4, Provide mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2. The inverter will be damaged if power is entered into the inverter output section. & When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Stay away from the motor and machine. When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places. 81Raa Pr, 59 "remote setting function selection" Related parameters Pr, 4 "maximum frequency’ Pr. 7 "acceleration time” Pr. 8 “deceleration time" Pr. 18 “high-speed maximum frequency" Pr. 28 “multi-speed input compensation Pr. 44 “second acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. 45 "second deceleration time” If the operator panel is located away from the control box, you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals. © By merely setting this parameter, you can use the accsleration, deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed setter (FR-FK). © When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be compensated for as follows: Extemal operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus extemal running frequency other than mull-speeds (Set "1" in Pr, 28 to select the compensation input (terminal 4).) PU operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus PU running frequency Parameter Factory Number Setting | Setting Range 33 o Oa a tees secon ee) FIL Deeron i) ch RL) a rr a a Refer to the following table and set the parameter: ‘Operation, r.s9Seting | Ronotescting function | Freawency seting storage function a We — a Yes Yes z Yes No. = Use Pr, 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether the frequency setting storage function in the remote setting mode is used or not. When "remote setting function - yes" is selected, the functions of terminals RH, RM and RL. are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RU). Note: 1. The frequency can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) between 0 and the maximum frequency (Pr, 1 of Pr. 18 setting) 2. When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, the set frequency varies according to the slope set in Pr. 44 or Pr. 45, The output frequency acceleration/deceleration times are as set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8, respectively, Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual output frequency. 3. The frequency setting storage function stores in memory the remotely-set frequency (frequency set by RH/RM operation) when the acceleration and deceleration signals remain off for more than 1 minute or as soon as the start signal (STF or STR) switches off. When power is switched off, then ‘on, operation is resumed with that value. 82PARAMETERS. A\caution A\ When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to the machine. Related parameters Pr. 0 “torque boost" Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 13 "starting frequency" Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage” Pr. 80, Pr. 81 (advanced magnetic fux vector contro!) Pr. 278 to Pr. 285, (brake sequence functions) jent ‘The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for operation. © If you do not set the acceleration and deceleration times and ViF pattern, you can run the inverter as if appropriate values had been set in the corresponding parameters. This operation mode is useful to start operation immediately without making fine parameter settings. Paani | — Frei Number, Setting Setting Range [a 3 Tes Pe Taree St rant, [operation ode Description ronal | Oa opeaton ode Sao anaaecloaie We ROOT he nee. Te —— inverter ates acseran/decsleraton nthe shorts te sig 1.2 [2 saar | snsbisies Guns cocateraton anisieen bake eapestymeay cause | pe 7 eg sccleraton! | tn regenerative overatage ala (.0V3) “7 Sat prevertton operation evel 150% “2: Sia prevention operation evel 180% on Optimum oreo canbe card out by Tay Wang he ive ap abes Optimum "7 in the continuous rating range. 3 | ctesaton! | Stticaring sutomateaty sts the corespondng parameters so matine | r.0,P.7, Pr 8 rage cron angacclatniceetraton ogi othe ted caret Gore) Appropriate for applications where the load will not vary by a large ammount, Tires re nverr cup voage nine rnmize tre ver 4 [Enemsaing | cut votage sing constant pees operation Outpt tage 5) _| Resonate fo energy-saving apotealans such a anand pum uteratealy con the rive er ouput vofege 9 deiver bo eovatormaae | mesma toque inbotnthe diving ana regenera modes, Aprons 5.6 fora counernanced seston 0,74 19,19 Wiote 3) ‘Stall prevention operation level 150% "Stal prevention operaon level 160% Technica oake 5 opening Cermplebon sgn | This uncton causes tne veer put ne mechani brake sequence | ng trate operon ing signal or eevating apocaton. mmoce Tiechaniea’] or uncon detate ad rete parameter sting, eer 'o Brave opening | Pr270iePs 205 (orate sequence uncon 8 completion sina ot np 83Pass Note: 1. When more accurate control is required for your application, set the other parameters as appropriate. 2, Because of the learning system, this control is not valid at the first time in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode. Also, this mode is only valid for frequency setting of 30.01Hz or more. 3, When the advanced magnetic flux vector control has been selected using Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, the settings of the energy-saving mode and elevator mode are ignored, (Advanced magnetic flux vector control has higher priority.) 4, fan overvoltage (OV3) trip has occurred during operation in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (setting °3"), re-set Pr. 8 "deceleration time” to a larger value and restart operation in this mode, 5. When the “energy-saving mode" (setting "4”) is used to decelerate the motor to a stop, the deceleration time may be longer than the preset value. Also, overvoltage is likely to occur in this mode as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics, set the deceleration time toa longer value. 84eee Pr, 61 “reference current’ Pr. 62 “reference current for acceleration’ Pr. 63 “reference ot for Pr, celeration’ Pr. 64 “starting frequency for elevator mode" Related parameter 60 “inteligent mode selection” © ‘Set these parameters to improve performance in the intelligent mode, Parameter Factory i ‘ramet mae Setting Range Remarks et 9999 O=H00R, S08 | 9558, Referenced fom rated inverter curent 2 3908) 0~200%, $989. ss 3308 (0=200%, 8989 4 9995) ‘020%, 9999 4) Pr. 64 “reference current setting" Seating Reference Current 9505 (actor setting) Referenced fom faled inverter curent Ot 500A, ‘Referenced from seting (rated motor curren) (2) Pr. 62 “reference current for acceleration” between the shortest accelerationideceleration mode and optimum (The ‘reference value differs accelerationideceleration mode. ) The reference current setting can be changed. Setting Reference Current Remarks 0% (TT) is the tit value ‘Shores acceleration/deceleralion mode 19999 (factory setting) 100% isthe optimum value. ‘Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode The seting of O to 200% i Te Ini val ua. | Shortest acesleration/decsleration mods to 200% The seting of 0 200% i the optimum Optimum accelerationideceleration mode 3) Pr. 6: (The reference value differs acceleration/deceleration mode. ) “reference current for deceleration” between the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum ‘The reference current setting can be changed. Saning Reference Curent Remarks SORE TBO) the Kent value, ‘Shortest accueraton/aecsieraton ode (9989 (factory seting) 700% i the optimum value ‘Optimum acceleration/decaleration mode The soting of Oto 200% is Te Teva jue_| Shortest acceleation/Geceleration mode to 200% “The setting of Oto 200% is the optimum ng ‘Optimum acceleration/éecslaration mode 1. 64 “starting frequenc\ for elevator mode” Setting Reference Curent GD (coy seting) Bilas the saving Fequeney Dio tHe The seting of Oo TOHz is th slang frequen: Note: Pr. 61 to Pr. 64 are only valid when any of "1 to 6" is selected for Pr. 60. 85eaten Pr. 65 “retry selectio: Pr. 67 “number of retries at alarm occurrence" Pr. 68 “retry waiting time" Pr. 69 “retry count display erasure’ When an alarm occurs, the retry function causes the inverter to automatically reset itself to make a restart and continue operation. You can select whether retry is made or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries made, and waiting time, Parameter Factory Number Setting een keane 65 o TS 7. 0 01510, 101 10 cd Tse ‘Dio 10 see 6s oO ° Use Pr, 65 to select alarms to be reset for retry. ‘Errors Reset for Ret Satin Display. 2 Oct E.0C2 E.0cs OV EOvz OVS ETH ETH. IPF: Eu FIN BE. EGF ELF Eout Our OPT EOP EOP2 E.0PS PE EPUE RET ECPU EMBT EMBZ EMES Mea MES: EMBs MB? EP2e ECTE Note: ® indicates the errors selected for retry. 86Vasa + Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence. Pr br Seting — ‘Number of Retries ‘Alarm Signal Output @ etry isnot made. Te 10 110 10 times Net ouput 404 to 110 to 10times Tr ‘Output. + Use Pr, 88 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart in the range 0 to 10 seconds, + Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retry. The setting of "0" erases the cumulative number of times. Note: 1. The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "" when retry operation is regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without any alarm occurring during a period four times longer than the time set in Pr. 68 2. Ifalarms occur consecutively within a period four times longer than the above waiting time, the operation panel (FR-DUO4) may show data different from the most recent data or the parameter unit (FR-PUD4) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the alarm which occurred the first time. 3, When an inverter alarm is reset at the restart time, the stored data of the electronic overcurrent protection, regenerative brake duty, etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.) Z\ caution ‘Ay When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm When you have selected the retry function, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places. 87Pr, 74 “appli Set the motor used. PARAMETERS Related parameters Pr. 0 "torque boost" Pr. 12 "DC dynamic brake voltag Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage Pr. 60 “intelligent mode" Pr. 80 "motor capacity” Pr. 81 “number of motor poles" Pr. 96 “auto tuning selting/status’ Pr. 1000 Pr, 109° Parameter | Facto Number_| _ Setting eee VIF frequencyivoltage" 7 o [UeE Bea + Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used. pert “Thermal Charactersis of Eletronle Overcurrent Protection SS Seting Stanaare | Coosa | Fiera arse Ses matching» genet pnoes mate 3 I Theta nascar matting the MESODSH conten tre mI z S| Thera saractrstes matching = gerertpurpoe moto A po fouble Vir charset Se eral charstarss fr atvancod agree Ra wer COMI ane MIRDDRN gone] 5 purpowe motor Soa (Koos) 3 [Sansa meter a TS | Constntioreve naar . : 23 ‘Witoubiohi general purpoce moter SF-IRAP | Select “offline auto tuning setting’ ° (sew arise) 3 Z| Standart moter 3 TE [ao tring dala GND aT OTSTAIEW—| ogatantorque motor 3 gap lfsubishi generatpupese motor SF-JRAP | Constantive mo a (kW or iss) S| Standard meio 3 45, “Constanttorque motor Star connection ‘Motor constants can oO | Standard motor Seenees reat.” [—O 16 ‘Constant-torque motor, el eee o 7 | Standard motor z 77 | Genser rave ate Stercomeston | Dhactmatr | 3 3 Standard motor taney 3 18 ‘Constant-torque motor (Deis connote | cemrueceeae o ~ For the 5.5K and 7.5K, the Pr. O and Pr. 42 settings are aulomatcally changed depending on the Pr. 71 setting Fit [oiieaa ae TBs Po a Zk Pie ry 2 Note: 1) When "9506" Is set n Pr 19, "2" cannot be set in Pr. 77, To set'2" in Pr 77, set the appropriate value (otner than "9896" in Pr. 19 2, When 2"is setin Pr. 77, Pr. 100to Pr, 109 are displayed on the parameter unt (FR-PUD4).n other settings, if any of Pr. 100 fo Pr, 109 settings is changed, the new seting is not displayed in the “INITIAL VALUE LIST" and "CHANGE LIST". 3, Refer to Pr. 96 for offline auto tuning. 4. Set any of 2, 7,8, 13, 17 and 18" to perform offline auto tuning, Z\ caution AX Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn. 88Rimes Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection’ Pr. 240 “Soft-PWM setting” You can change the motor tone. © By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor tone. © Soft-PWM control changes motor noise from @ metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone. Parameter Facto —— oo Number, ‘Setting ‘Setting Rang ae 72 2 Tee Sr yare, eS 260 ‘ oF 1: Sof-PVM vals + Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Parameter | Factory Setting Description Number Y 7 72 Otis) Bait earir Feuaney can be changed ‘The sing dspayad fan [He Note hat Oineates Taz and 1 nccates 14 siz 240 3 Soft PW iva 4 When any of°0 fo Si sein Br 7, SoR-PWMs made vale Note: 1. A reduced PWM carrier frequency will decrease inverter-generated noise and leakage current but increace motor noise. 89aaa Pr. 73 /0-10V selection’ Related parameters, Pr. 22 “stall prevention operation lev Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage bias’ Pr. 905 “frequency setting current gain" You can select the analog input terminal specifications, the override function and the function to switch between forward and reverse rotation depending on the input signal polarity Parameter | Factory Number ‘Setting Setting Range a Dies tot F573] Terminal AU | Terminal] Terminal] Tonia Tapat Setting ‘Signal__| input Voltage | input Voltage |__4 to 20mA Override Funetion 3 sow iv | Ow a10v 5 soi sv Oto x10 2 #0 to 10V, Oto 25V. * No, 3 0s Oto 25v (vote 3) # die 107] Hote 107 5 5 ofr ‘Diosv | ~s0t0 5 mvc i ‘e) Hote iv] oto s1007 1 S010 sv dio s10v 72 #0 to 10 O10 28 tb a 43 #0 to 5V ‘Oto s5V_ a is Dio fo] Hote stv 3S 15 Diosv | #0105 ° Bio S107 f Dio s10 2 invalid Oto s5V x No z Oto s5v (set) 2 vem] 5 on ‘Oto sv ovals Yes 2 i (es) Desi x if Dip 210 a Iva oes es = 17 Oto s5v ie Dew in oa ae ° Note: 1, The value of terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the main speed setting signal of terminal 2 or 4. 2, When override has been selected, terminal 1 or 4 is for the main speed setting and terminal 2 is for the override signal (50 to 150% at 0-5V or 0-10V). 3. Indicates that a negative-polarity frequency command signal is not accepted, 4, To change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum frequency command voltage (current), use the frequency setting voltage (current) gain, Pr. 803 (Pr. 905). At this time, the ‘command voltage (current) need not be input. Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope upldown to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting, 5. When the Pr. 22 setting is "8999", the value of terminal 1 is for the stall prevention operation level setting. 6. % indicates the main speed setting, 90Pr. 74 "filter time constan’ ‘You can set the input section's internal filter constant of an external voltage or current frequency setting signal © Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit, ‘© Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise. A larger setting results in lower response. (The time constant can be set between approx. ms and approx. 1 sec. with the setting of 0 to 8, A larger setting results in @ larger filter time constant.) ae Pr. 75 "reset selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selectio! You can select the reset input acceptance, PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUD4) connector disconnection detection function and PU stop function. © Reset selection © PU disconnection detection © PU stop selection ‘You can select the reset function input timing. When it is detected that the PU (FR-DUD4/FR-PUO4) connector is disconnected from the inverter for more than 1 second, the inverter outputs ‘an alarm code (E.PUE) and comes to an alarm stop. When an alarm occurs in any operation mode, you can stop the motor from the PU by pressing the [STOP] key. Parmalat | Factors Number, Setting Setting Reve 75 i Tas Weir 1 setiey a om om oe Ph sy man et open P78 1p Selection ae Reset Selection U Disconnection Detection PU Stop Select (0 _| Reset input normally enabied 1 Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated the PUis dsconnectee, operation willbe continued Z__[ Reset input normally enabied 3 Reset input enabied ony when Be protective function s acvated, When the PU is disconnected, the Inverter outputs shut of Pressing the [STOPI key decelerates the moto: oa stop only in the PU ‘operation mode. Ta Reset input normally enabled 16 ‘Resat input enabled ony when the protective function s activated. It the PU is elsconnected, operation wil be continued, 16 | Resetinput norma enabled. When the PU is disconnected, the inverter outputs shut off 7 ‘Reset inp enabled any when the protective funetion i activated Pressing the [STOP] key decelerates the motorta 2 stop in any ofthe PU, ‘external and communication operation modes, otASW How to make a restart after_a stop made by the [STOP] key from the PU during external operation (1) Operation panel (FR-DUO4) 1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal. 2) Call the operation mode select screen and press the (SET] key. 3) Switch on the STF or STR signal. (2) Parameter unit (FR-PUO4) 1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal, 2) Press the [EXT] key. 3) Switch on the STF or STR signal. Note: 1. By entering the reset signal (RES) during operation, the inverter shuts off output while itis reset, the data of the electronic overcurrent protection and regenerative brake duty are reset, and the motor coasts 2. The PU disconnection detection function judges that the PU connector is disconnected when itis removed from the inverter for more than 1 second. If the PU had been disconnected before power-on, itis not judged as an alarm. 3, To resume operation, reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is connected securely. 4, When PU disconnection detection is set and the PU is then disconnected during PU jog operation, the motor decelerates to a stop. The motor will not stop if a PU disconnection alarm occurs. 5. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time, Also, if parameter (al) clear is executed, this setting will not retum to the intial value 6. When the motor is stopped by the PU stop function, PS is displayed but an alarm is not output When the PU connector is used for RS-485 communication operation, the reset selection and PU stop selection functions are valid but the PU disconnection detection function is invalid 7. The reset key of the PU is only valid when the protective function is activated, independent of the Pr. 75 setting Z\ caution A, Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on. Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, which may lead to hazardous conditions. 92aaa Pr. 76 “alarm code output selection” Related parameters Pr. 79 “operation made selection" Pr, 190 to Pr. 195 (mult-function outputs) Pr. 200 to Pr, 231 ‘When an alarm occurs, its code can be output as a 4-bit digital signal from the open collector output terminals. ‘When programmed operation has been selected, this parameter also serves to output a graup operation signal The alarm code can read by a programmable controller etc to show its remedy on a display. Also you can look at the progress of programmed operation, Paramotar Factory 5 Number Setting Setting Range 76 0 ows + Alarm code output Output Terminals ered! 30 I iF I ob I Fo 7 ‘Alarm code is nol ouput Depends on Pe. 19010 Pr. 125) 7 Hismeode ots | Alarm ence bt? | Alarm code bit 1 ‘Alarm code BRO, 2 ‘Wren an alarm occurs, an alarm code signals ovfout, (Output signals the same asin 1.) |When operation is normal, an operation status signal i output. (Output signal is the same as in 0.) 3 (during programmed | Output at ime-out | During group 3 operation | During group 2 operation | During group 1 operation operation) Note: 1. For alarm code definitions, refer to page 170. 2. The Pr. 76 setting overrides the Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 settings, Therefore, ifyou assign other signals to output terminals SU, IPF, OL and FU using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, these terminals provide the output signals as listed above when any of "1 to 3"is set in Pr. 76. This should be noted when using the functions which use the output signals to exercise control. Example: When using the brake sequence functions (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285), assign the brake opening request signal (BOF) to the RUN terminal by setting "20" in Pr. 190. 93(aaa Pr. 77 “parameter write disable selectio! ‘You can select between write-enable and disable for parameters, This function is used to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by accident. Parameter Facto Number Setting Setting Range 7 2 Diz PT Setting Funetion > We enabied dang a sop only Parameter values may ony be wren during a sop in he PU operation ode We dsabed Valies of P75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 “operation mode selection” may be wien z Wie enabled even during operation operation when changing their parameter settings. Note: 1. The values of the parameters half-tone screened in the parameter list can be set at any time. (Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 values cannot be set during external operation.) 2. If Pr. 77 = "2", the values of the following parameters cannot be written during operation. Stop — — Number hol Number Lod Ta pa TON TH 23 | Saupe 100 [vet at rmueno) ce | Seams evnton operation tot | vrt et revere tage) Sean wal povenion aor ae (eas ae ee Go [neligent node sieion a Se Sto Robes sot Tt [ VES Fema Sia proven open econ : 66 starting frequane 105, VIF3 (third frequency voltage) [posted tr os Wr ream 7 Spe nas Scion oy | VEE fea even gS) So wo cach oe ves ce Si Numbers 5 — [Vrs ta fen gS) Carney usp nvTer ee 2 See icmin scion a TTT ne er ToS SS [Rhereol de selon 13 | Serta tne Ss ce | Attar setinlsitus 128 | steer sccton of are — ie power supply switch-over frequenc 3, By seting "in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited + Parameter clear + allolear ~ User clear 94PAWS Pr. 78 “reverse rotation prevention selection ‘This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the misoperation of the start signal © Used for a machine which runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump. (The setting ofthis function is valid for the PU, extemal and communication operations.) Parameler Factory Number Setting Setting Range 78 o Taz Pr Te Sting Funaton o Gath onward a reverse lane alowed 7 Reveise lation salowed 2 Forward rotation isalowed 95Saas Pr. 79 “operation mode selection’ Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. Related parameters 18 jog frequency" Pr. 4 to}, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr.232 to Pr239 “multi-speed operation” Pr, 76 "alarm code output selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) 200 to Pr. 231 “programmed operation ‘You can choose any of the operation modes: operation using external signals (external operation), operation from the PU (FR-OUO4/FR-PUO4) (PU operation), combination of PU operation and external operation (extemal/PU combined operation), and computer link operation (when the FR-ASNR option is used) Parameter Facto Number Sorting _|_Setina Range 75 ° Tes Pe 7a Seti Funetion 2 PU orexornal operation can be seloaed 4 PU operation mode z ‘xderel operation made ExermalPU combined operaon Ode 3 Running frequency =" Set om the PU (FR-OUOAFR-PUDA) stectseting, [UPIDOWN] key) or externa signa out (muthspeed sating on) Sta signal External sigal input (erminal STF, STR) Bema PU combined operation mode 4 Running frequency +>» External signal input (terminal 2,4 1, og. mult-speed selection) Stat signal Input from the PU (FR-DUOATER-PUSA) (FWD) kay, REV] key) Programmed operation made ‘You can set 10 diferent operation staring tines, ctation directions and running frequencies for each of tree 5 ours Sporaon stan. +--+ STF, tier reset. = STR Group selon ----- RM, RMP RL Switchover mode 8 Swic-over between PU operation, external operation and computer ink operation (when the communication pion such a ie FR-ASNR is used) modes can be dove while ruaing Exceral operation made (PU operation inieriock) 7 ‘X12 slgnal ON" May be stoned to PU operation mode (output stop curing extemal operation) Xi2 signal OFF Surthing to PU eperatan made inne wiching o other than extemal operation mode (cealowed dung operon) 8 ‘16 signal ON. == +""++ Switched 1 external operation mode XiG signal OFF Suntcned 1 PU operation mose Note: 1. Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PUfexternal combined operation. These settings differ in starting method 1) Programmed operation With this function, you can set 10 different operation starting times, rotation directions and running frequencies individually for each of selected three groups to perform automatic operation under the contro! of the internal elapsed time counting timer. For full information of this function, refer to the explanations of Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 96PARAMETERS: (2) Switch-over mode. You can select between PU operation, external operation and computer link operation (when FR-ASNR option is used). ‘Operation Mode Switching ‘Swiehing Operation/Operating Status Extemal operation to PU Wy Selec the PU operation mode. operation ‘Rotation irection isthe same as that of extemal operation. ‘+ Sot frequency is as set by the potentiometer tequency seting potentiometer). (Note that the setting wil disappear when power is switched off orth invertors reset) ‘Extemal operation to computer | 7) Mode change commane to computer Ink mode is iransmitted fom the computer, link operation * Rotation ditetions the same as that of extemal operation, + Set frequency is as set by the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer. (Note that the setting wil disappear when power s switched off or the inverter is reset PU cparation to eternal 7) Press the external operation key ofthe parameter unt ‘operation + Rotation diction is determined by the external operation input signal = Set frequency is determined by he external fequency setting signal PU eperalion fo computer ink] 7) Moce change corsmand fo computer link mode Is tansmitied from the Computer cperation + Rotation direction and set fequency are the same as those of PU operation. ‘Comauter tak operation © | 7) The swich-over command ta the external mode is sent from the computer. external operation ‘+ Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal + Sel frequency is determined by the extemal frequency seting signa. ‘Computer Ink oparailon t PU | 7) Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit operation “Rotation direction end set frequency are the same as those of computer link operation. (3) PU operati lock ‘When the PU operation interiack signal is switched off, the operation mode is forcibly changed to the external operation mode. This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode. 1) Preparation + Set"7" in Pr. 79 (PU operation interlock). + Using any of Pr, 180 to Pr. 186 (multifunction input terminal assignment), allocate the terminal used to input X12 (PU external interlock signal) + When the X12 signal is not assigned, the function of the MRS signal changes from MRS (output stop) to PU external interlock 2) Function KAZ MRS) Signat FunctionlOperation ‘utput stopped during extemal operation oa ‘Operation mage can be switched to PU eperstion mode. Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation mode. PU operation allowed, Foreibly swiched io exiemal operation mode, OFF | External operation alowed Switching to PU operation mede inhibited 97Sa SeaGCSRHIG | oprson aa ‘Operation Mode Operating Status Parameter Write ° perton | aiaue |” Sina operation = se) ra BOF Ss eee Dung op ‘tone Graowed | Biaowed Taaalopeian bu ‘in ssemat_| frequen sung ard at ig, | ogo Sona eres Aoned-+deatowed | Disaoved Sportonperomedin fags SESH tena Hat Rod During Sto [ON —> OFF During stop Disallowed = disallowed | Disallowed Sera OFS ONT] cera! [Haaioned= dunia [ Sesioneds aslewad | Dasiowed certen | ON OFF Bung Fen alowed» dasloved | Ditloved output stop = = Note: 1. When the Pr. 79 setting is 7 and the PU operation interlock signal is OFF, network operation such ‘as computer link cannot be used. 2. If the X12 (MRS) signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode ‘when the start signal (STF, STR) is on. 3. The operation mode switches to the extemal operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off. Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is switched off with either of STF and STR on 4, When an alarm occurs, the inverter can be reset by pressing the [RESET] key of the operation panel 5. When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, switching the MRS signal on and rewriting the Pr. 79 value to other than 7 in the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to provide the cordinary MRS function (output stop). Also, 2s soon as 7 is setin Pr. 79, the MRS signal acts as a PU interlock signal 6, When the MRS signal is used as the PU extemal interlock signal, the signal logic conforms to the PR. 17 setting. When Pr. 17 = 2, read ON for OFF and OFF for ON in the above explanation. (4) Operation mode external signal switching function 41) Preparation ‘Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. 79. Using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection), allocate the terminal used to input the X16 (PU-external operation switching) signal 2) Function When the X16 signal is switched on in the PU operation mode, the operation mode is forcibly changed to the ‘external operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched off in the external operation mode, the operation. mode is changed to the PU operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched off during network operation ‘such as computer link, the operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode as soon as the switch-over ‘command to the external operation mode is sent from the computer. Note that this switch-over may only be made while the inverter is at a stop and cannot be made during operation ie Signal Operation Mode ‘ON ‘Bernal operation mode (cannot be changed tothe PU operation mode) OFF. 'BU operation mode (cannot be changed fo the extemal operation mode) Note: When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to 186, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. 98PARAMETERS: Pr. 80 "motor capacity” Pr. 84" f. _ Related parameters Pr. 74 “applied motor" Pr. 83 “rated motor voltage” Pr, 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr. 89 “speed control gain" Pr, $0 to Pr. $4 (motor constants) Pr. 95 "online auto tuning selection" Pr, 96 “auto tuning setting/status” Pr. 180 to 186 {input terminal function selection) Pr. 89 "speed control gain’ You can set the advanced magnetic flux vector control. © Advanced magnetic flux vector control Provides large starting torque and sufficient low-speed torque. Effective for great load fluctuation. Ferameer | FS69 | Geting Ronse emarte a 3698 | aK DW, 9H VF coal st Ses E611, 10, 20 558. UF cont a 00% Tie 200% If any of the following conditions is not satisfied, faults such as torque shortage and speed fluctuation may occur. In this case, select VIF control + The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. + The motor type is the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 0.4KW or more) of Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 200V class 4-pole motor of 0.4KW to 45kW. When any other motor is used, offiine auto tuning must be performed.) + The number of motor poles is any of 2, 4, and 6. (4 poles unly for the Constant-lorque ute) + Single-motor operation (ane motor for one inverter) is performed The wiring length between the inverter and motor is within 30m, (Ifthe length is over 30m, perform offiine auto tuning with the cables wired.) Advanced magnetic flux vector control + By setting the capacity, number of poles and type of the motor used in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, the advanced ‘magnetic flux vector control can be selected, Parameter | Setting Description so aoa WF cantor Tist0 55 | Set the motor capacly sppled [Advanced magnetic fax vecior contd 999 VIF contol 2.4.6 | Setthe number of motor pales, Aavanced magnetic Tux vector contol VF contolis selected when the X18 (agate Tin steh-ovet signal switches on. a (nis selection isnot made during operation) tarare | Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 fo assign the termina 98 | used fr X18 signal input 12: For 2-pole motor 14; For 4-poe motor L 16: For 6-poie motor + When using Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA), se perform the offine auto tuning .) + When using Mitsubishi's standard motor (SF-UR, 4P, 1.5kW or less), set"20" in Pr. 71 "in Pr. 71. (When using the SF-JRC, 99eas) Note: 1. Speed fluctuation is slightly greater than in the V/F control. (Advanced magnetic flux vector control is net suitable for machines which attaches importance to litle speed fluctuation at low speed, e.g. grinders, lapping machines.) 2. When the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is used between the inverter and motor, output torque may reduce. 3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to 186, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting, For adjustment of motor speed fluctuation due to load variation Pr. 89 can be used to adjust motor speed fluctuation when the load varies. (When you have changed the ‘conventional model FR-A200E series for the FR-ASOO series, advanced magnetic flux vector control is effective when motor speed does not match.) ry . 82 "motor Pr, 83 “rated motor voltage’ Pr, 84 “rated motor frequency” Pr. 90 "motor constant (R1)" Pr, 91 "motor constant (R2)" Related parameters 7 “acceleration time" Pr. 8 “electronic overcurrent protection” Pr. 71 “applied motor" Pr. 80 "motor capacity’ Pr. 81 "number of motor poles” Pr. 95 “online auto tuning selection” Pr. 196 "stall prevention operation selection” Pr. 92 "motor Pr. 93" constant (L2) Pr, 94 "motor constant (X)" Pr. 96 “auto tuni i ‘When you use the advanced magnetic flux vector control, you can perform the offline auto tuning operation to calculate motor constants automatically © Offine auto tuning is made valid only when other values than "8899" are set in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 to select the advanced magnetic flux vector control © Tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to another inverter with the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUD4) © If the motor used is not Mitsubishi's standard motor or Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor (e.g. motor of another company make) or the wiring distance is long, the motor can be run with the optimum operating characteristics by using the offline auto tuning function © Offline auto tuning ‘Automatically measures the motor constants used for advanced magnetic flux vector control + Offline auto tuning can be performed with the load connected. (As the load is smaller, tuning accuracy is higher. Tuning accuracy does not change if inertia is large.) + For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode or rotation mode, Note that when making selection for the online auto tuning, the motor-only rotation mode should be selected. + You can read, write and copy the motor constants tuned by the offine auto tuning, + The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DUO4/FR-PUO4) 100eo remarks 2 8 a 5 2e0v ote 1000v oted mse votage a oR Toe OE 30 08 Die, s000 | He a saa st 3 ig 9999—| EB subst anced ret 2 8 Cie se50 | goes Mash since motor 35 S58 Die 8999 —[ GPE MisuB ancard eter se 38 ip see8 | Goa: Mis stance motor = a Oi 01 No tng + The motor is connected. + The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (0.4KW or more) + The maximum frequency is 12042 + Special motors such as high-slip motor and high-speed motor cannot be tuned. + When "101" (offine auto tuning with motor running) is set in Pr. 96, note the following! 1) Torque may not be enough during tuning, 2) The motor may be run at nearly its rated frequency (Pr. 84 setting) without problem, 3) The brake is open. 4) No extemal force is applied to rotate the motor. + If "1" (tuning without motor running) is set in Pr. 96, the motor may run slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. Thi n must be followed espe Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning pertormance Is unartected tion: Note: Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed when the reactor or surge voltage suppression fiter (FR-ASF-H) is connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning Par: r sett * Using Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, select the advanced magnetic flux vector contro. * Refer to the parameter details list and set the following parameters: 41) Set "t or 101" in Pr, 96 * For setting of "++ + For setting of 101" +++++ 2) Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr. 9 3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr. 83. 4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. 84, 5) Select the motor using Pr. 71 * Standard motor: + “P74 * Constant-torque motor Pr 723 ~ Mitubishi standard motor SF-IR 4 poles (15KW or less) Pr, 71="23" + Tuning without motor running. Tuning’ with motor running. Note: Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are only displayed when the advanced magnetic flux vector control is selected (Pr, 80, Pr. 81) In these parameters, set the values given on the motor plate. When the standard motor has more than one rated value, set 200V/60Hz or 400VI60Hz. 101Sa 1 Parameter details, ae seting Description 3 Tie OA _—__| Sethe ated mater caren Etconic overeuren rolecion ternal Charauaraca sulle geetarauboe u motor 7 Cecne BveTeTent POSCIGR Weral CRaTaGaTates Butea Tor Miso ansartioraue moot econ ov ren rSaTon Waal aaGnics sae Tr SeerarpUBIRE 2 mote Spo fexble VIF charseerstes yo iikagihts SFARUP general purpose Walt (USK waa), Eason overcame prclecionthrmal chatacters or advanced magne Mx vedo? cone z Sladard motor 3 Constant ore Boa : - . Gensantsegue at | secon auto tring sting 71 et) (ister less) z Standard motor i Constantsorque ma Ato tung ead or change sting 28 Miscbishs SFIRAP standard metor | enabled (1.84 ots) A Standard motor 5 5 Consietorque Maar Six comecsoal a | usa noo é Sianasd meta eta connection | enabled is Consiettorve mar 7 Slandard motor aa Sande mete! Starconnesion | Drectinput ot g Standard moor Se ass 18 ‘Constant-torque motor akan Zi 3S Tis 19907 | Sat te ated motor vlaga et 30 1208s | Se erated motor fenuency GE 0 Cio, 9999 st O10 0009 Ea 068998 | Tuning data EF Tia 8599] (Valse measured by ofne auto uring re set automaticaly.) 0 i ‘Oto 100% 3 fine ato tung ra peor 96 (Note 2) 1 Of ato uring is pelomed wihoa mato una 01 fine aio uring perfomned wih moar nnn Note: 1. The electronic overcurrent protection characteristics are also selected simultaneously, 2. Select "101" to increase tuning accuracy. (2) Tuning execution + For PU operation, press the [FWD] or [REV] key. + For external operation, switch on the run command Note: 1. When "101" is set in Pr, 96, quard against hazards because the motor rotates, 2. To force tuning to end + Switch on the MRS or RES signal or press the [STOP] key to end. + Switch off the tuning start command or make a forced stop. 3. During offline auto tuning, the following W/O signals are only vali: + Input signals STOP, OH, MRS, RT, CS, RES, STF, STR + Output signals RUN, OL, IPF, FM, AM, A, B,C 4, Special caution should be exercised when a sequence has been designed to open the mechanical brake with the RUN signal 102a aaee (3) Monitoring the offline tuning status ‘When the parameter unit (FR-PUD4) is used, the Pr. 96 value is displayed during tuning on the main monitor ‘as shown below. When the operation panel (FR-DUO4) is used, only the same numerical value as on the PU is displayed + Parameter unit (FR-PUO4) main monitor (For inverter trip) 1 Satlag [Tang pares |. Compiaion [4 rare oo 1 mT TT oy 2 | Le [en [--- stor, ste Fwo_Pul [STF sno ‘a TTT oepiay ee Babe? sor | > prune soe Le [BE nd? ~ + Operation panel (FR-DUO04) display {For inverter trip) 7. Sating_— [Toning regions [3 Goplavon [a ora and Displayed 1 +e 2 = 3 5 hoes 401 ~~ 402 > 403 + Reference: Offline auto tuning time (factory setting) ns ats Tag Sting Te Thevaaba es ee eee —_ {Glin cto urn ine vais wi acceleration and deceleration tne setngs as 2 Rota a indicated below: ita ss ang ra acelraton ti + dean ne + sor. 300 ) Ending the offline auto tuning 41) Confirm the Pr. 96 value + Normal end: "3" or "103"is displayed + Error-activated end: "8", "91", "92" or "93" is displayed. 2) When tuning ended normally For PU operation, press the [STOP] key. For external operation, switch off the start signal (STF or STR). “This operation resets the ofne auto tuning and the PU's monitor display retums to the ordinary indication (Without this operation, next operation cannot be done.) 3) When tuning was ended due to an error Offiine auto tuning did not end normally. (Motor constants have not been set.) Reset the inverter and start tuning all over again 4) Error display definitions ErorDag iT) aay 3 art AE n ee sane gectner te % Tver uu vatapeeaced 5% TST | reco uct of owe ua vlage Sema ae wg a No connection with motor will result in 93 error, 103Paaiae Note: 1 ‘The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data is held unti the offline auto tuning is performed again. ‘An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) is on, the ‘motor runs in forward (reverse) rotation. When "8888" is set in Pr. 11, the tuning is forced to end and the DC dynamic brake is started upon input of the MRS signal, Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored. ‘The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is OHz. A\ caution 4 Note that the motor may start running suddenly. A\ When the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to insufficient torque. ‘The motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. £4) may be set as desired in either of two ways; the data measured in the offine auto tuning is read and utilized or changed, or the motor constants are set without the offine auto tuning data being used, To utilize or change the offine auto tuning data Set "801" in Pr. 77. Only when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999", the parameter values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can be displayed, Though the parameter values of ‘other than the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can also be displayed, they are parameters for manufacturer setting and should be handled carefully without misuse. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71: + Standard motor «++ Pr71="4" + Constant-orque motor « + Pri" + Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.5KW or less) +> Pr. 71 In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values, (Note 1) Paramater Seting | Factor Number cea seting Range | icromorss | Setting @2___| Woler exingcument | Oto ne, 0085 al 9909, ‘90 Weior constant Rt Oto =e, 8899. 7 9099) ‘91 | Wiotor constant 2. Dio we, 0999. 4 9998) ‘82 _| Motor constant Lt 4 3099) '93__| Motor constant Lz 4 9999) (94 | Moior constant x Oto se, 9999) 1 3099) Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value. 104EWaiaas 1999" Note: 1. Pr.90 to Pr. $4 values may only be read when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected). 2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor). 3, Set”3" (standard motor), "13" (constant-torque motor) or 23" (Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4P (1.5W or less!) in Pr. 71 fo use the constants measured in the offine auto tuning. Set “4 or 14 or 24” in Pr. 71 and change the motor constants to change the values measured in the offiine auto tuning. 4, As the motor constants measured in the offiine auto tuning have been converted into internal data (7) refer to the following setting example when making setting: Setting example: To slightly increase Pr. 90 value ‘When Pr. £0 is displayed "2516", set 2642, i.e, 2516 x 1.05=2641.8, in Pr. 90. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Hence, simple addition of a given value to the displayed value has no significance.) = To set the motor constants without using the offiine auto tuning data ‘The Pr. 82 and Pr. 93 motor constants may either be entered in [2] or in [mH]. Before starting operation, confirm which motor constant unit is used. © To-enter the Pr. 92 and Pr, 93 motor constants in [2] 4. Set "801" in Pr. 77. Only when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999", the parameter values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can be displayed. Though the parameter values of other than the motor constants (Pr. 80 to Pr. 94) can also be displayed, they are parameters for manufacturer setting and should be handled carefully without misuse. 2. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71: ‘Siar Connection a Delta Connection Motor Sanda moer 5 3 Setieg [Corsiantiorue maar 15 16 3. n the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values: Parameter 5 Seting | Facto Number eeu Setting Range | increments | Setting 30) Moorseasaniai | 01 Toa, 668 | 0.0o1a | 9999) 31 Motor eonstant 2 | 016 10n-989 | 0.001 |__9998 a ‘Meter constant xi | Oto 100, 9999 | _0.0010. 2909 93 Major constant x2 | 016 100, 9699 | 0.0010 9989 2 ‘olor epnstantx | “0 19 8000, 8689_[_ 0.010. 9589 4, Refer to the following table and set Pr. 64 Parameter Setting] Factory Number Name Setting Range | increments |__ Setting a4 Rated motor fequengy | _S01 10H | O01He. GOH 5, Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value. Note: 1. Pr.80 to Pr. 94 values may only be read when the Pr, 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than 9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected). 2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor). 3. If "star connection” is mistaken for “delta connection” or vice versa during setting of Pr. 71 advanced magnetic flux vector control cannot be exercised normally, 105(zane © To enter the Pr. 92 and Pr. 93 motor constants in [mH] 1, Set "801" in Pr. 77. Only when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "2999", the parameter values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can be displayed. Though the parameter (Pr. 82 to Pr 99) values of other than the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can also be displayed, they are parameters for manufacturer setting and should be handled carefully without misuse. 2. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71 + Standard motor +++++++ + Constant-torque motor « + Mitsubishi standard motor SF-IR 4 poles (1.5KW or less) 3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values: Parameter a Setting Factory Number Name ae Increments | _ Setting '30_| Motor constant Rt Die 500, 8999 ‘001 3999 at Motor constant R2, (to 50n, 9999 2.0012 3999. 82 | Motor constant Lt Dito 1000mif, 3898 ‘Aime 13999. 33] Motor constant L2 ‘to 1000mH, 9999 O-1me 3999 ‘34 | Motor constant X (00 100%, $899 0.1% 3999 4. Refer to the following table and set Pr, 84: Parameter Setting Factory Number a Setting Range | increments | _ Setting 36 Raled molar Fequangy 010 ORE O.0tHz eoHz 5, Return the Pr, 77 setting to the original value. Note: 1. Pr.90 to Pr. G4 values mey only be read when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than 9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected). 2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor), Related parameters 71 “applied motor" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 81 "number of motor poles” Pr. 83 “rated motor voltage” Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency” Pr. 89 "speed control gain” Pr, 90 to Pr. 94 (motor constants) 96 “auto tuning setting/status” Pr. 95 “online auto tuni By online auto tuning, the motor conditions are tuned rapidly at the start, This enables precise operation unaffected by motor temperatures and steady high-torque operation down to super-low speed. After setting the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 values, select online auto tuning with Pr. 95. © Gling auto tuning Use this function when steady high-torque operation is required for low-speed operation under advanced magnetic flux vector control. + Before starting the online auto tuning, perform the offline auto tuning. Data must be calculated, 106aaa oe renars 5 3 ar 7 Sain a a + Data required for online auto tuning is calculated in offline auto tuning. Before starting the operation of this, function, always execute the offline auto tuning once more, The offline auto tuning is also required for use of the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR) or constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA). Offline auto tuning should be carried out with 101 (motor running) set in Pr. 96 and with the motor disconnected from the load, (The motor may be connected with inertia load.) 1) Read the Pr. $6 value and make sure that its setting is "3 or 103" (offline auto tuning complete). 2) Set"1" in Pr. 85 fo select the online auto tuning. 3) Before starting operation, make sure that the following parameter values have been set. Parameter aa “aromete Descrintion 3 [Used as air te raled moter current or elecvonic overcurrent protecion parameter) 71 ‘Applied motor En Motor capacity (down @ one fank lower, batwean 6 ARV and SSK) Bt ‘Number of motor poles 4) Give the run command in the PU or external operation mode. Note: 1 if any of the inverter starting conditions are not satisfied, e.9. when MRS is input, ifthe set frequency is lower than the starting frequency (Pr. 13) value, or during an inverter error, the online auto tuning is not activated. For a restart during deceleration or DC dynamic brake operation, the online auto tuning is not activated The online auto tuning is invalid for programmed operation or jog operation. ‘When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, it overrides the online auto tuning For use in vertical lft application, examine the use of a brake sequence for brake opening timing at the start. Though the tuning ends in about a maximum of 500ms after a start, enough torque is not provided during that period. Therefore, note that the load may drop with gravity Zero current detection and output current detection are also valid during the online auto tuning, The RUN signal is not output during the online auto tuning, The RUN signal switches on at a start When programmed operation is selected (Pr. 7 executed IF the period between inverter stop and restart is within 4 seconds, the online auto tuning is executed but operation will not reflect the tuning results, ), the online auto tuning is invalid and is not Ei Se = Belen to Be a2 107Aaa Pr. 100 “V/F4 (first frequency)" Pr. 104 "VIF1 (first frequency voltage)" Pr. 102 "ViF2 (second frequency)" Related parameters Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage” Pr. 103 "V, frequency voltage)" Pr. 113 "third VIF (base frequency)" Pr. 104 "VIF3 (third frequency)" Pr. 105 "VIF3 (third frequen e)"" Pr. 106 "V/F4 (fourth frequency)" Pr. 107 “VIF4 (fourth frequency voltage)" Pr. 108 “VIF5 (fifth frequency)’ Pr. 109 “VIF5 (fifth frequency voltage)" You can make a dedicated VIF pattem by using VIF (frequency Voltage/Frequency) contro! to set VIF characteristics from the start to the basic frequency and basic voltage as desired. © Desired VIF characteristics can be set by presetting VIF1 (first frequency voltage/first frequency), VIF2, VIF3, \ViF4 and VIFS in the corresponding parameters. Parameter [Facto ameter | Eanioy | _seuing Range Remarks te seo | Dione SSS 101 0 te 10000 02 Be [ Tie 0H 7] pe v1 and a a ; SE P| setzin 71 anda ve [oT 3383, Oto 400Hz, 9999, Ces i 405, o (Oto 1000" eee actvate when ano © 108 Sea Wi oar saso | FNS es 107 0 Dre 1000 ioe Sa Bio cook, 3885 io a Te 10000 ssa roa ay te mon free ° oie (1) Confirm the settings of Pr. 19, Pr. 60 and Pr. 71 Parameter umber Basaran a Satie aied otorvoage Ths incon not sete fs value "0500" fain setng w Set orn opereton moc) Ti Se Spot fel haradral 108Mas (2) Set the desired frequencies and voltages in Pr. 100 to Pr. 109, + The setting must satisfy the following relationship: F1#F2#F3+F44F5#Pr. 19 "base frequency’ If the set frequencies are the same, a write error occurs, If any frequency setting is "9999", its point is ignored. Note: 1. The VIF S-point flexible characteristic functions for VIF control only. It does not function for advanced magnetic flux vector control 2. The VIF S-point flexible characteristic does not function when Pr. 60 is selected. 3. The frequency voltage setting should be equal to or less than the Pr. 3 and Pr. 19 settings. 4, Pr. 19 must be set. (When Pr. 19 = "9990", Pr. 71 cannot be set to "2" (S-point flexible VIF characteristic).) 5. If'2"is set in Pr. 71, Pr. 47 and Pr. 113 do not function, 6, When "2" is set in Pr. 71, the electronic overcurrent protection is calculated for a standard motor. Pr. 117 “station number" Pr. 118 “communication speed” Pr, 119 “stop bit lenath/data length’ Pr. 120 “parity check presen: ence” Pr. 121."number of communication retries" Pr. 122 “communication check time interval Pr. 123 "waiting time setting” Pr. 124 "CR, LF presence/absence selection” Used to make the required settings for communication between the inverter and personal computer. Using the inverter setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP-WY)}, parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be done efficiently @ The motor can be run from the PU connector of the inverter through RS-485 communication. ‘Communication specifications ((Confoming sande ASA (Number ofinvetes conmacied TN (mae To verer) ‘Corvuriestion speed Seleciod between 16200, SEDD and aB00DpS onto protocl ‘synchronous Communieation meted Hatecupiex ‘Character system ‘ASCII (7 baa bis) SeleoaTe 2 E[ Steps engin Selaciable Bebveen 1b and 20S 25 Hrermnator RIL (qresencelabsence selectable) 28 Paycheck Seietes bebveen prasance (eveniode or absence 5 Bl oocovmen [Ere ccm 8 * [ating te seting Selecabl Debweshprovence or absonoe 109aaa © For the data codes of the parameters, refer to the data code list in the appendices. Parameter | Factory 5 Number Setting eee it 0 Tesi 118 12 95,182 Datalenghe [Ot = 1 Powers [0-17 725) z iz 728 5 Tie 10, 8555 12, o Die 998.8 sec, 965 "23 Ses ‘Oo 150ms, $899 24 1 O12 To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, the communication specifications must be set to the inverter initially. If intial setting is not made or there is a setting fault, data transfer cannot be made. Note: After making the initial setting of the parameters, always reset the inverter. After you have changed the communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made if the inverter is not reset. Parameter a — eet SS Tene Teton foe PU GSS v7 | Sten omsi | sane anion nism hen bo rere hess orp one penne Soo ss Saar ee CT 18 | coon 3 Tie oe ef com) om [S| Senta tae to Eee + setae leoaiiies | 1-5-1 ss Bs TBE EC Say oem (oa 120 | pew! + — tea sneer Seo ae Sets gece Tumba lies W oar Oa wale oer Te ow10 | saber otcnncaine enon exceeds he pamdsovae, be ver wee vo Nam! Ta Sa ton ETar OGG, a Teer oan ams op A communes: |_| arte menor an cnsteste aap) RS of REGET pet aE, _| Bul are estat top Ff avert op electro FAS a es allel ad oes Paid tence Toman [a og [oon [armas [Sine amauta eerie pe ' check time ‘000 TT no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible ime, the amet ns Sao] airy [Hiss | Sen nti in botnet Ga mas is mara apes Soettkeg | See St ee oR ee en tn emen ae beance 2 [win Rae 110(aaa (4) Communication protocol Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the following procedure: 1 sate beatin “1, Ifa data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation from the user program, The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting “2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns “retry data 3" to the computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting. (2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows: Bun] Rusning | Paramer | tert Tyownorag | Parameter oS Operation commana | Frequn Wete | Reset 3 | Tea Commaricaion requests sont othe 1 |inverer in accordance with tne user x A A A 8 8 rogram. [neta data-processing te Teese | Tresent_| Present | Absent Teesent | Tresent No enor € Reply date from the ce ° a e es Request scoped = 3) |(Oata tis enecked fo | win enor err eee | no . 0 | Absent | F "F_ | Corpater processing ably ime Assent | Absent Absent | “Absent [6 S Answer rom Moan ent | Absent | Absent | Absent | computerin response [No processing |_ "=" © 5) |toreny data 3 {Date Si eneckedfor{ win erord5ta | prsen | apeont | amsont | aosent | h ern 3is output (3) Data format Hexadecimal data is used. Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter. 1) Data format types (1) Communication request data from computer to inverter oor Tae as ete seman — [53] ion | agen Je} aa | Sn | onameg EET TF eter rts fomas, —|_3,| son, | itaten find am,Aaa Note: 1. The inverter station numbers may be set between HOO and HIF (stations 0 and 31) in hexadecimal 2. ‘indicates the control code 3. “4 indicates the CR or LF code. ‘When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made from the inverter according to the computer. Also, the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. 124. 2) Reply data from inverter to computer during data write (ects wera (on ror oa romac — |,3| Sion | « roman |e] Simm [EP | og 3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read 1 tr tec (oa oes, seme |,3) Sion, resccs | e%) SU | oa Fomat soma [oh] soi | Sy ex Ak | + ni a 7 44) Reply data fron computer to inverter during data read eds eerie (oa errs tomas |, Ser | fom 3] cor]. (4) Data definitions 1) Control codes ‘Signat_[ ASG Gods Besarption STK Ho] Star of Yew (Sta of esta) En HOS | End of Text (End of ala) ENG Hos | Enavi (Gommuniestion r2au65H ACK 08 | Acknowiedg (No dala erorcetecaa) F HOA | Une Feee. ca HOO [ Carriage Rata A His | Negative Acknon/adge (Date evar dalaaed) 2) Inverter station number ‘Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer. 3) Instruction code Specify the processing request (e.g. operation, monitoring) given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate 4) Data Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to Appendix 1.) 112a WaiaaSs 5) Waiting time ‘Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter form the computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150msec in 10msec increments (@.g. 1 = 10msec, 2 = 20msec), ios compe | _________ on a recess pe i Sarg nck ieetducntomses) “amet 6) Sum check code The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the ower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data (expe) scent To Fe he FS try ot } esmon sce tes| [ote etn 7) Error code If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code. Note: 1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept that data 2. Any data communication, e.g. run command, monitoring is started when the computer gives a communication request. Without the computer's command, the inverter does not return any data. For monitoring, therefore, design the program to cause the computer to provide @ data read request as required 3. Data for link parameter expansion setting differs as indicated below between access to Pr. O-Pr. 99 values and access to Pr. 100-Pr. 905: Tnstrustion Code = ead _| hie [HOO Pr Oo vals ae aos HOO Pr. 010 Pr 8 ales are accessBle re HOT Pr 100 to Pe 180, Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 and Pr, 800 to Sat Pr 905 values are acoassbie expansion seting | Wrte | HEF | ia: Pr. 1600 Pr. 199 and Pr. 292 to Pr. 285 values are accessble Hoo. r. 880 value is accessible 113Pease Instructions for the program (1) When there is an error in data from the computer, the inverter does not accept that data, Therefore, always insert a data error retry program in the user program. (2) Since any data communication, such as operation command or monitoring, is always requested by the computer, the inverter will not return data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, ete. as required. (3) Program example When the operation mode is switched to computer link operation 004 -CoM: 500,68, 2.NOr ASEH meray 30.0N COM (1) GOSUBTREC porn ‘eeoueroM prey Sone vireo recon sp me (rs en oor ro yoron Tove os) irene masntce oe convene faase sensei Beas ounce et. icone {oir toe pmo mevnerunn Tesi ‘zapna nus(woe 6) ee were aaa 1 reat + [Sosa tna fioret + |obsis eat (bum seen Oseeen sy La Z\ caution AS When the inverters communication check time interval is not set, interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazard. Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation. A\ Data communication is not started automatically but is made only when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc, the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE). The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off. AQ If communication is halted due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted. 114Vass After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data and start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring, Tratrueon Number of No. tem aa Description eee TOUT Bema opraton + [operon [Reet | H78 | noon: Communeaten eoeation, a mode Game | re] HOOD: Exel operation 0002: Communication operon ODDO To HFFFF: Ouipat frequency (exadecina) in OOF outpat tequeney Ineremenss tspeea} HEF | Speed (heradecira) in eminincements#Pr. 37 sto9000] 28H forPr. 14421010, 1020 110] ——) wo [ROOD FFF Oupat ewant ease OTA) agin as wa | 0 FRFFF Out eae easel ON] gage a Tye [HO HF ones aa sd yan le) eas HOT 1oHOE Monitor selection aia ee od ver [, _ [eons | ooo [| one Read | H73 em Re Seecal monitor cos Secon ok fm ots eecion No = [emma ow [ow [SS [oom vos [FEY [awe | woe [meses | anv wie | 43 | [ros [rrmaipne | om [vee [reuse or tar [erin [ore | rae [ovmapons | one 2 2 H0000 0 HFFFF: Two most recent alam defoions 212 ‘Read data: [Example] HOA 2 (revs lar... THT) {ost recent ala, OPT) = 8 war =] [ole] +] ]o]o}ofo] Jo] [ofo]e]ofo i I | es Frovous am Most recent tm reo) tan) Alem data as [ Dwotnion | baa | Secon [ tom | Boeteion am detain —|wraton77 | [mo | touom [wo | er [ver | oe 2s a 115aaa Wamber Description of Data Digits Instruction | No. tom rue HOO Io RFF. Ron command oe bt: Foard rotation (STF) 2: Reverse rotation (STR) 3 |Run command nea | (Forexample 1) se 2 gts [Example 1] 02 ba Fenward rotation 26: {Example 2} 00 6 Stop vr. HOO ta HF Inver satus moaior Bo: Inverter euning (RUN) * bi: Foard rotation (STF) 2: Reverse rotation (STR) (For example 3: Upto frequency (SU) * 4 | lecerer stats 7A | (Example 1} HO2 'b4: Overload (04) * 2digits monitor During foward rtstion _—S: Instantaneous power {Example 2) 80 faite (PF) * ‘Stop de to alam bs: Frequency detection (FU) * 7: Alarm occurence * ~The cutout data depends onthe Pr, 100 to Pr. 195 stings Runaiag Wequenay 70000 te HCAO: 0,01He increments (hexadecimal) 5 | wie Hee — | To change the running frequency consecutively, write data to the | 4 digits (Rom inverter RAM. (Instruction code: HED) HOSS6: Reseis the inverter 6 | Inverter recat HED | Asthe voto is reset on star of communication by the computer, te | & digits inverter cannot send realy data back ta the computer. ‘All parameters return f the factory setngs. ‘Any of ou diferent clear operations is performed according to the data nics [0 © 7 | Altetear Hee ieee a 4 dots ° When al parameter clear is executed for HEG8S or HSSGS, communication-elated parameter seltings also reluin to the factory settings. When resuming operation, set the parameters again "HO65S; User clears made. Jo} Jol ofofofo commune | caaton | omer. | ie 8 | Userciear HEC eon hee 4 sits o x a 0 | Parameter write | HBG to HES | Rafer to the data lat (Append 1) and wile andlor road parameter values as required igs 10 | Parameterread | HOOtOH69 | Note that some parameters may not be avcessibe Read | HIF | HOO te HSC and H80 to HEC parameter values are changed Link HOO: Pr Ofo Pr. 98 values aro accessible. parameter HO%: Pr 100o Pr. 159, Pr. 2000 Pr. 231 and Pr. $000 Pr. 905 values expansion | write} HEF are accessible eating Ho2: Pr. 160 to Pr. 199 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 285 values are accessible. 109: Pr. 980 value is accessible Reed | HeG | H20 to isa HBD to HAD When code FF 00: Running f Hot: Time 02: Rotation divection 2 digits con quency parameter 12 | changing (Coce FF write} HEC | HSE 10 HEA oom HDE to HEA When code FF = +00: Offsetgain HO": Analog 1102, Analog value of terminal ) 116eases ‘The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in any communication request data form the computer. ey em Detnton Inverter Operation The Biber of ero conseouely ceased Sonn Ho | computer NaK enor | requos sta fom the computer greater then slowed number o fey tines a yaar Tha party cai eau dose not math the pected pay 2 | Sum enah anor) Te 90m check cade the copier doesnot match ht oe | SOURS an ala slop data reeled by te vert foe ene ieee ‘ta received by the inverter sin the wiong protoca, data ecewe | eminwously mace. than a | Prtcterer | enotcompsteduitinthegventine, or RandLFare staat |e SM inthe paranet Ta —| Framing enor ——[ The stop bit ng ola sealed Tew data has Boon sent by te compar before Be vere CSEe | ead completes receiving the preceding data ES = — cparthan oto AWE. cone DOSE TH REGEN 7 [cnwncareror | asancarechecs nab onertano105.AWF cot! Soawiensouptis coe) alarm stop, as — = #8 — — avaneier wee wae staged hoarse Comput ioe uae | eaccenel operation mode of during inverter operation. Does not accept or [aac cous ror | The species command eoes rote tecahe data But not Tv data has been specie for parailer wile, Feqiency | brought alarm stp. He [Datarage noe | il en a = — HE — = = HE — = — 117ates ications for RS-485 communicat in Operation Mode Commanieton Operation Location tem Exteral | Computer Link Operation Operation rom PU | Greration | (hoard option sed) Ain conand waa] erable Diabla Disab Enable Running frequency seting | Enable (Combined table ‘moos cae Program vie | Monitoring Enable Enable Enable arate Erabie (a) [Disable (2) Disb CH Parameter rad Enable Enable Enable Inver reset Enable Enable Enable Stop command Enable Enable Enable Fun command Disable Disable Enable) Running Fequency SeHing_ | Disabie Disable Enabis 1) onion Enable Enable Enable eae program vis Parameter wie Disable ("4) Disable ("4) Enable ("4) Perrier read Enable Enable Enable Tnverir reset Disable Disebe Enable Si conenand Enable enable Enable Inver reset Enable Enable Enable Conta creut termina! [Run eornand Disable Enable Enable Fanning frequency San Disb Enable Enebie [1 (71) As sel in the operation and speed command write parameters. (2) At occurrence of RS-485 communication fault, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer. (3) As set in Pr. 75; (74) As set in Pr. 77, (6) Operation at alarm occurrence ‘Operation Mode Fault Location Description Se External comet ‘Operation ae Operation (PU connector) e inboard option used) Tiwerer operation ‘Stop Sap ‘Stop Inverter faut BU connector Coninuaa Continued Continued Communication |~irboard option Continued Continued Continued ‘Communication ever | Inverter operation ‘Slopieontinued (@) | Continued Continued (Communiaton | Communication | PU Soanector ‘Step Stop. ‘Stop from PU connector) ion |inboard option Continued Continued Continued m i Tiverer operation Continued Continued ‘Sioplcortinves (3) ommnunication efor PU connediar Continued Continued Continued (inboard option) | Communication Fr Sore ioe oe eae “5: Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop). (7) Communication error Fault Location Error Message Remarks Commariation ror {Communication fom PU connector) ‘Communication error {inboard apton) Soa Notalsplayed | Error code is €.PUE 118MMs Pr, 128 "PID action selectio1 Pr. 129 "PID proportional band” Pr. 130 "PID integral time” Pr. 134 "upper limit” Pr. 132 “lower Related parameters 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection” Pr. 79 “operation mode selectio Pr, 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal assignment) Pr, 191 to Pr, 194 (output terminal assignment) Pr. 902 to Pr, 805 (frequency setting voltage (current) biases and gains) int for PU operation” Pr. 134 “PID differential tim ‘The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g, flow rate, air volume or pressure. © The voltage input signal (0-5V or 0-+10V) or Pr. 133 setting is used as a set point and the 4-20mA current input signal used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control. Fase cee Setting Range Remarks 1 0 To 20, rm ook Oct i000, S555 —| HE: Ne propatonl cot 130 see 0.116 3600 ss, 9995 | 9999: No nigral cont 731 8 Cie 100%, se68 | 9600: Funcion inves ‘32 S58 Tie 100%, 5558 | 3595: Function inva 33 oi Tie soo% is Er ito 10.00 ss GS | SNe a coil (1) Basic PID control configuration ean person “A Ap Peerertceniet Te ipaline §:Opeaer Te Ore re (2) PID action overview 1) Plaction ‘A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for providing manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with time. [Operation example for stepped changes of process value] Been Saget Note: PI action is the sum of P and | actions. e la 119Aisne 2) PD action Acombination of proportional control action (P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic. [Operation example for proportional changes of process value] Note: PD action is the sum of P and D actions, 3) PID action ‘The Pl action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control Note: The PID action is the sum of P and | and D actions. 4) Reverse action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point - process value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative. eat sept coe-ep xe fie Shown a 5) Forward action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point - process value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive. Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency) Deviation Positive Negative Roveise scion 2 2 Forvatd action = a 120Paes (3) ing ex: Sink logic Prt89 = 14 Pr192=16 p99 = 14 Pri94=16 tomtom P>—Osr8 vom FO} ‘0 se] faa eam Fae ~eeves me.) TY fR. Laas oan at even sou 4 Seer | | conics 1 I oe iil = Ti ie 4 ACI — a a Nole 1 The power supply must be selected n aocordance withthe power specications of the detector used. ‘The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 191 to Pr. 194 settings. ‘The input signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings. 121Pa Waiaass (4) 1/0 signals Tea : Sorat | | Feneton Desepon Fema or coeaPo owe Say 10.1, x4 | Dionne | po earl aeton | SwicnenXeiw ase PO a Saye EP | Sepang ri tet oP EP 1 [1 [BRisOr#OT | ener duiion sa esis ecenay sua pun] ETS ESOGR HES a a Fone iw a Pe ve input | getector. : Sip RS Re a a z FUP Uppeinoven | CUSTER DDS t eerzasan.2| = Ts wancama | Subic ee al ace VE HT : 4g LEON] vonsntig oo erate ioe ea : Bnet ea cmman | el neste tne apa RES : 3] Fonard ese) | Me aanterance own iain Fwbyor | 2090.1,| 8 7 Cover hte vere maten enor | a2 | " ‘stop (STOP). 3 SE SE Queutieminst | commento terminals FUP, FDN and RL © To start PID contro, performed without the PID action being performed. © Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-6 or into Pr. 133 and enter the process value signal across inverter terminals 4-5. © When entering the externally calculated deviation signal, enter it across terminals 1-5. At this time, set "10 or "41" in Pr. 128, switch on the X14 signal. When this signal is off, ordinary inverter operation is Te Ey Deseription Set OV as 0% and SV as 100%. eo demu oe oe | eae | Scare ae aera When "0, 2,4, 10, 12 or 14°18 setin Pr 73 (10V seecios for terminal 2) pm PETS | Sette set pont PTS Set SV a8 100%, OV as O% and HV aS | When 75,5 10, Doris wean PL TS Deviation | pcrge termina 1-5 (HOO (SV selected fr termina 1) signal Sel 10V a8 OO, OV as OH and HOV S| When 0, 1,4 10, 11 or Bact Pr TS 00% Process | across teminas 45 | 4mA is equivalent o 0% and 20mA to 100%, 122(Aw aiaes) (6) Parameter setting Paranaor aansior | setng ome Deernion Towne ” Forneaing esse cons. et | Devaionvaie | Sean Sal np ae tein oo vs 1 |toscten [reso ag 2 Fortean. praveue conta we | Prose ae mea [POSE towns) om x Forage Ba Te proporina band's aon para Sng BN he aT pOTST ‘arab vans ety wna igh range te poet ai Herc ashe van | 11 1000% | eo croorena | Sopra! bard nao. spore sre ae) pees bu fe bane Sibi eterrten og tamthg ooo Sant popeinattane Ea fie panbtia aaa Sie ned or oe aged () asin e poe Te save Wand ott e00 see ino | veel nator propo acon he tap ne ceteaes, 130 Liam ‘the set point is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily ea Reiegatonel wae oe Sete eper i Ta onan aw, FUP STAT ‘31 Umer | spt lease au ofthis ecules O% and SORA 9 100%) ca Ren Ste Gos fe pace ave es ae ag arg, aT vex | 2t0100% | sing |ssnbe sun tn he nen pcs va of ta wept iO aa Soma 0%) ea te rcton po scegan | Cale aA ie A paso Pa aT vss] orton | pot FFU | Feel pean, the volageacoss 25 isthe st ont eperati (Pr, 902 value is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 value to 100%.) ea egune tro rena (acon esos fe Same OOS tot [ore ro0nsee| piven | ta shelf srapetiona aston Ao ecient ine netesee ine pene en OE ern 3 ‘eaten Soa (7) Ac rocedure Parametcsoting | Acst he PIO cont parameters, Pr. 128 r. 133, Selihe UO terminals on PID cont tering. ‘eminalseting | prtzento,11-20,21 ‘Sian X14 29nal O8 123PARAMETERS: 8) Calibration example (A detector of 4mA at °C and 20mA at 50'C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25°C under PID control ‘The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0-5V).) START Deterine he setpoint ‘Setine room temperature to 2576 ‘SelPr 120 and guehon he X14 signal enable PO conte. Crier he pata Panto eed Sse eter peters her Sete dhs speacafes hat is tt Camusuanentocirese | Yra'at'Su sont ie siponctase sr teeuse on = pntomecceccroapse | pha won ent am e Tasca ]-~-ppen esto stg pw $9 ad eet 0 ‘maymatecaracl sans ag catenin ama setpoe= 0% ae, [See We petictos teint 2 uch ato silt Eneravateetoszese | Soy eae our 2avae wm? tne Open “or operate. to se po (0 10) 18 thang aon ste poratetoons eg steneto ara pepeep oad fd Ee pormimteensart | Sel eeeNtesaniicteeceesalice oes ingle yer | Sante etree ae om cpotion ee he ‘Dianne ater Sime | oe sn ad cpa ore ad cee te dette signs! 1s the process ale Steady? ‘naiaanane, J Caines faunas) Seine operat ances |_| ee prone vos Sey Sopa Gee tostguy ne | sl operat at net ite estat ane | | pany be aics oe te peste ewervcue waa | | efoonta tee cesad eet tabe. Sapien open ——<—— END “yineneaitraton is requ. use Pr 902 to Fr. 90 fo calivate the dstaciorouout and st pont sting Input inthe PU ode dung an invert stp. 124 1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (2.9. OV) to across terminals 2-5. 2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this time, enter the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. OH2). 3. Apply the voltage.of 100% set point setting (e.g. SV) to across terminals 2-6. 4, Make calibration using Pr. 903, At this ime, enter the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 6042). 1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) to across terminals 4-5. 2. Make calibration using Pr. 904. 3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) to across terminals 4-5, 4, Make calibration using Pr. 905. Note: The frequencies set in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 should be the same as setiin Pr. 902 and Pr, 903, The results of the above calibration are as shown below. (Setporetr) (Detter ve ipa MC o@ ee) 100 oevten i) Note: 1. Ifthe multi-speed (RH, RM, RL) signal or jog operation (jog) signal is entered with the X14 signal on, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started. 2. When "20" or "21" is set in Pr. 128, note that the input across inverter terminals 1-5 is added to the set point across terminals 2-5. 3. When "S" (programmed operation mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID control operation cannot be performed. In this setting, programmed operation is performed, When "6" (switch-over mode) is selected for Pr. 78, PID is made invalid 5, When "9999" is set in Pr. 22, the stall prevention level is the value entered from terminal 1. When using terminal 1 as the edit input terminal for PID, therefore, set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 22. 6. When "1" (online auto tuning) is selected for Pr. 95, PID control is made invalid 7. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to 186 and/or Pr. 190 to 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings, 125aaa Pr. 135 "commercial power inverter Related parameters switch-over sequence output terminal selection" Pr. 11 "DC dynamic brake operation time" Pr. 17 "MRS input selection” Pr. 87 “restart coasting time” Pr. 58 "restart cushion time" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 {input terminal function selection) Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection Pr. 136 "I IC switch-over interlock time’ Pr. 137 “start waiting time" Pr. 138 "commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence’ Pr. 139 "automatic i F-commercial power supply switch-over frequency" ‘The inverter contains a complicated sequence circuit for commercial power supply-inverter operation switch- cover. Hence, the magnetic contactors for switch-over can be interlocked easily by merely entering the start, stop or automatic switch-over select signal Parameter | Factory okanwe oa Number Setting Setting Range Remarks 135 ° 3 136 Osea T0003 ‘37 Ose. Q 100.0 sec 28 3 o1 TEBE. No aaa 129 3599 040 60.0, 9909 a (1) Wiring example Sink logic, Pr. 185 = 7, Pr. 186 = 6, Pr. 192 = 17, Pr. 18, Pr. 194 = 19 ee Tie! “This slc-overfncton& used the extemal operation a trode, Avays connect tena Ri, Sta aire power Topo (power supp ere rom he on Or Mr) fo ane aga | oer are pone operation NEB = — | || Pema :MC2 and MC3 must be mechanically interlocked. = y 4 ©) “1. Note the sequence output terminal capacities. The terminals used le ¥ epund on te 190 fo Probe segs. St aul ggetnes roes sos [Outpt Terminal Capaciy —[Permisabte Outpt Terni ad] ‘eae = Tavs apn coflectr olpis “bc ona foocenne SOT WPROL FU) 2ev0C0. ior Pog, BWA OSA eee 5 FFUASAR (onion ous) aav0c 028 Externe er jon “2. When connecting an AC power suot, comet the FRASAR option 7 and useihe contact ut ‘nen connecting 2 S¢ power supply, instal the folowing protective je doce. Fregney stig ia i? ot “2. The terminals used depend on the Pr. 180 o Pr. 188 setings. 126A tae + Roles of the magnetic contactors (MC1, MC2, MC3) 1) When this function is used (Pr. 135 Magnetic ae ee Place of Installation Role Mot power supply and inven | Noaly shared with the folowing exception: ‘Opened only when an inverter fault occurs (shorted again by resetting) Mc2 | Between power supply and motor | SPerene” “Shorted fer commercial power supply operation, opened for inverier ‘Shorted when an inverter faut occurs (selected with parameter, except for ‘external thermal relay operation) cs | Between inverter output and motor | operation ‘Opened when an inverter fault occurs “Shorted for inverter operation, opened Tor commercial power Supply 4"), the input signals are switched on-off as indicated below: ‘Signal | ‘Terminal Used Function on-oft ‘Commercial power supp | —-O — 7 Inverter operation enable Operation enabielcisable snseess ON aaa mas selection Commercial power suppy- | x | Unchanged inverter operation isabie recast OFF cg. | Depending on Pr. | inverter-commarcial ere o “ ° 18010 r.185 _| power supply svteh-over | Comeren a Pov ope ° ° x Taverer operation Forward (versa) rotation © * © STF ste command (invalid for ON (str) (STR) | commercial power Slop ----s00 OFF ° x ° supply) (Note) “on | Depending on Pr | External thermal elay | Motor normal ON o = = 12010 61185 _| input Motor fault 222 OFF. x. x x ‘Operating condiion | ialization ---- ON | Unchanged x | Unchanged RES = intiatization Normal operation OFF ° = — Note: + In the above MC Operation field, [-] indicates that MC1 is on, MC2 is off and MC3 is on in inverter operation and MC1 is on, MC2 is off and MC3 is off in commercial power supply operation, [Unchanged] indicates that the status before signal-on or -off is held, - The CS signal only functions when the MRS signal is on, STF (STR) only functions when MRS and CS are on. + MC1 switches off when an inverter fault occurs. + If the MRS signal is not switched on, neither commercial power supply nor inverter operation can be performed, 2) The output signals are output as follows: Signa [ Tord Used Deseiaia nicl TET opera waa OUT Tie] Orvendng on Pr. 190. Tez operation sali opt es ESS operon ral cut 127(2) Parameter setting Paani Name Setting Description a © eee opi nak proved Pr 106, 107, 88 and 13D So ‘supply-inverter ignored.) pete eae Sequence oul proved. Seana 1 | Wen Mt to MCS ore assigned with Pr. 100 to Pr 195 (output terminal Sea function selector, open colecoroutouts are provided. When thy ar nat assigned, relay outs are povided from he FRAASAR (pn. ae | Me awcraver—] “De THT] Sel the Cz and MCE operation intro fine iter te ae Tie 10.5] Sata sigh anger SSSA TA oO sc) vale Tan re Tive Tom when he ior ‘Start wating time sec. ON signal enters inverter operation MC3 to when it actually switches on. Stops inverter opaaton and coats the motor - 0 | Theinverer sts when an inverter fauk occurs (bth MC2 and MC vite Sommer ower i 120 | ppb everter Stops weft opealion and aomaNealy SERGE TVSRS operation To tee fl commercial power supply operation ‘non an inverter fuk occas, ivertr operations automaticaly swiched to commercial ower sippy opealon (MCE. ON, MC3. OFF Quoi Iwenee “The motors started and run bythe Inver up ho sat requoncy, and wih Aaa ee | wots | He ouput fequenc eachesorexcaeds he sa requecy, inverter operation sq | ammercal power is automaticaly vtec fo commercial power supply operation. Stan and frequency stop are controlled by the inverter operation command (STF of STR). 3Hao [Automatic swich-over snot done Note: 1. Pr. 139 functions when Pr. 135 setting is other than "0". When the motor started by the inverter reaches the automatic switch-over frequency, inverter operation is switched to commercial power supply operation. Ifthe inverter's run command value is then lowered to or below the switch-over frequency, commercial power supply operation is not automatically switched to inverter operation. ‘Switch off the inverter operation command signal (STF or STR) to switch commercial power supply operation to inverter operation and decelerate the motor to a stop. poe ¢_L oe secon sre cr ee ee cn oe Et nn nT (69) OFF Fa lomaraercion tne) Cee 128(3) Operation procedure 1) Operation procedure for running Operation patter ane + Pr. 135 = "1" {inverter’s open collector output terminals) T 7 ssteaee "137 £10 se (lth vaio equa to or longor han etme — Pies papea thoi i int conned. WH shay, fda a nl Uton prope. «pear Sene Texetereprson 7] P68. eat (Amaye st parte vnn conor power r cin outers pha steer oraons mapa a Seen [orn pr 2) Signal on-off after parameter setting RSL ee Rana — Ore | or | ore] Gro | — Grr | OFF On | Enanal operator ade corm | crm | orm [erro | corm _| orrow | eu amraton moe) Meat [orr-on | oFF-on | oFron | on | orf | on Rar eos Constant speed Nez ewiches on CGonmace | on | onsor | on | on | oFt-ow | onsorr | tr coasts uring tis power p04) fore ating tre 3c, Saratis ter MCE aso meter es ses on Gpentontr | on | ore-on | on | on | onsorr | oFF-oN | thotr coats curing is cheotraton fered) twat (tng une se, Sp a Tar Paro or Too Note: 1. This function is only activated when R1 and S1 are connected to a different power supply (power supply which is not connected to MC1). ‘This function is only-valid in the extemal operation or PU (speed command) + extemal (run command) operation mode wien the Pr. 135 value is other than "0". When the Pr. 135 value is other than "0" in the operation mode other than the above, MIC1 and MC3 switch on, MC3 is on when the MRS and CS signals are on and STR is off, but when the motor run by the ‘commercial power supply was coasted to a stop at the last time, if restarts after the time set in Pr. 437 has elapsed. Inverter operation is enabled when the MRS, STF and CS signals switch on. in other cases (MRS is con), commercial power supply operation is performed When the CS signal is switched off, the motor is switched over to commercial power supply operation. Note that wnen the STF (STR) signalis switcned off, the motors decelerated fo a stop 5y the inverter. When both MC2 and MC3 are off and MC2 or MC3 is then switched on, the motor restarts after the waiting time set in Pr. 136 has elapsed. ifthe Pr. 136 sting i ther than 0, the Pr, 196 and Pr, 197 setings ae ignored in the PU operation mode, ‘Aso, the inverters input terminals (STF, CS, MRS, OH) return to their ordinary functions, When the commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence is selected, the PU operation interlock function (Pr. 79 = 7) is not activated if it has been set, ‘When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to 186 and/or Pr. 190 to 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings, EES ees 129aaa Related parameters Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) © Ifthe output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during invetter operation for longer than the ime set in Pr. 161, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter’s open collector output Pr. 150 “output current detection level Pr. 151 “output current detection tims terminal (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output.) cnimeae Factory Setting ‘Setting Range 150 150% Oto 200.0% 351 2 Oto 10sec ott rae ore on Lore sacctan sol out Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Parameter Number 150 Sel the oulput current detection vel 100% isthe rated inverter eurant, aa ‘Set the output current detection ie. Seta period of me from when the ouiput current rises To or above the Pr. 150 setting to when the output curent detection signal (¥12) is output Description Note: 1. Once switched on, the output current detection signal is held on for at least 100ms. 2. This function is also valid during execution of the online or offline auto tuning 3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. 130waa Pr, 152 "zero current detection level" Related parameters Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 Pr, 153 “zero current detection time" (output terminal function selection) When the inverter’s output current fas to “0, torque will not be generated. This may cause a gravity drop when the inverter is used in vertical lift application. To prevent this, the output current “zero” signal can be output from the inverter to close the mechanical brake ‘when the output current has fallen to "zero’. © If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter’s open collector output terminal. (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.) Parameier | Factory Sottng | _ Seting Range a sa TRE a same TS, LRN Fin poston Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Pare ana Desson et aac mv ametnioionl Set this parameter to define the percentage ofthe rated current at which the zero curont wil be datecte, ‘Set the zero current detection time. 153 Set a perod of ta from when tha output current drops to or below the Pr. 162 setting to when the zero curent detection signal (Y13) is output. Note: 1. Ifthe current falls below the preset detection level but the timing condition is not satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms. 2. This function is also valid during execution of the online or offiine auto tuning, 3, When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. Z\ caution AX The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection time setting not be too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output current, A\ To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety backup such as an emergency brake, 131Saas Pr, 155 "RT signal activated condition selection" Related parameters Pr. 14 “load pattern selection’ Pr. 44 to Pr. 49 (second function selection) Pr. 81 “number of motor poles” Pr, 180 tor. 186, (input terminal function selection) © Set the condition of activating the RT terminal to select the second control functions by switching on-off the RT signal. Paramaler | Factory cy on Setting Range 155, ° oi Refer to the following table and set the parameter: Pe 185 Salting Dassription ° Made veld womedately by switching the RT signal (a only when the RT signals on at constant 10 | speed (valk dung aceleratin/seceeravon) “stall prevention ion selection” Related parameters Pr. Pr 22 “stall prevention operation level" 23 “stall prevention operation level at double speed” Pr. 47 “second stall prevention operation current" Pr. 48 “second stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation current" Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation” 1. 187 “OL signal output waiting time” Stall prevention and fast-response current limit can be disabled and the OL signal output delayed, Parameter Factory Number, Setting Setting Range 156, 0 Desi, 10 132PARVETaRSS Refer to the following table and set the parameter as required: Fast Response ‘Stall Prevention ‘OL Signal Outpot Currant Limit ©..Activated ©...Operation continued Ou.hetivated @::Not activated ©..operation not @::Not activated | ~Aeseloration | Constant speed [Deceleration | continued (Note 1) o o Pr, 156 Setting je|0}o]o}o}oJofolo . o o . . © o . . o o ° jelelejelo 10/0] oo}o]o}o}o] oo}o]o]o}o}o/o| 9} eoJolo}ojelelelelololojo|ejelelelolo}olo lo}o}o}ofofofolo} Je|o}o]e|e}o]o}e e/0o]e|e/o]0} je|o}ojofole| 2 o o © ° o Dig © 400 ¢ 2 Regenerative |] Note 1: When "Operation not continued for OL signal output” is selected, the "E.OLT" alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped. {Alarm stop display "E.OLT") Note 2: If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, the stall prevention may be activated and the motor not stopped in the preset acceleration/deceleration time. ‘Therefore, set optimum values to the Pr. 156 stall prevention operation level. (When the output voltage reduces during stall prevention operation, an overcurrent trip will be less liable to occur but the torque decreases. Set "0" in Pr. 154 when the torque may be reduced.) Z\caution A\ Always perform test operation. Stall prevention operation performed during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes. Stall prevention operation performed during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance. 133(Zea) Pr. 157 “OL signal output waiting time" Related parameters Pr, 190 "RUN terminal function selection" Pr, 191 "SU terminal function selection” Pr, 192 "IPF terminal function selection" Pr, 193 “OL terminal function selection" Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection" Pr, 195 "ABC terminal function selection" Use this parameter to set whether the overload alarm signal (OL signal) is output immediately or a preset period of time after occurrence of an overload status, Paramator | — Factory om Ect | _Seting Range Remarks 187 3 Dow ve, 800 | VOGT. No signal oT Ovtoes snot ena __ ZZ Lavine Sao et) Refer to the following table and set the parameter: Petar a Description 3 | Oxipa inmate Tio 75 — | Oxtut afer the set ia (sosona] have dpsed 09 [Overload alan sna isnot ouput 134aa Pr, 160 “user group read selection” Pr, 173 “user group 4 registration" Pr. 175 “user group 2 registration” Pr. 176 “user group 2 deletion" Among all parameters, a total of 32 parameters can be registered to two different user groups. The registered parameters may only be accessed. The other parameters cannot be read Pee [ESET [sina mange Rema ic 0 Sito 3 3 o1oa88 ie n Sis S05 i re i . Ts 0, BD aa ating Sasa ee 1 [Use goip 5 preret ad 10 [User gig 75 pret ead Ti [user atup ant nies a + Parameter registration to user group Write the parameter numbers to be registered to Pr. 173 (user group 1 registration) or Pr. 175 (user group 2 registration). Write the parameter numbers one by one, + Parameter deletion from user group ‘Write the parameter numbers to be deleted to Pr. 174 (user group 1 deletion) or Pr. 176 (user group 2 deletion). Write the parameter numbers one by one. ‘Writing 9999 means batch deletion of the registered parameters in each group. + Using Pr. 160, make user group 1 andior 2 valid or invalid Pe60 Note: 1. Pr. 70, Pr, 160 and Pr. 991 values can always be read independently of the user group setting, 2, The Pr. 173 or Pr. 174 value read is the number of parameters registered to group 1, and the Pr. 175 or Pr. 176 value read is the number of parameters registered to group 2. 3, "0" set in the second digit of the 2-digit Pr. 160 setting is not displayed. However, itis displayed when "0" is set in the first digit only 135Gases Pr. Related parameter Pr, 82 "DUIPU main display data selection" eter clear” Pr. 174 “actual operation hour meter clear" ‘You can clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour monitoring function. Parameier] Factory Number Setting ‘Setting Range 170 3 z ri ° o Write "0" in the parameters to clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour. Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection" Pr. 181 "RM terminal io ction" Pr, 182 "RH terminal function selection" Pr. 183 "RT lection” Pr. 184 “AU terminal function selection” Pr. 185 "JOG terminal function selection" Pr. 186 "CS terminal function selection” Use these parameters to selectichange the input terminal functions. Fafansior | Terma | FES | pastor set Terminal Function | Sating Range 10 a anand open Samad RL] —| 05 5, me iat 7 {fits Speat salon comand (| Di 8596 i att 2 [Hibsieed eaten coma FA) | ot 99.668 188 cu 5 en secon Sig 9-588 rr aU 4 ceratinnatslston 20) i 9 6S rT rd So apaiton section COG) Soe teri att aes hia ce S power failure selection (CS) ote cai eeees 136aaa Refer to the following list and set the parameters: "erminal sting | Termina Functions Frsd=o Peaoe a Parae ee Prawns 3 FL | Lew-s5e0d operation | Remote sating Programmed operation] Stop-or contact command {aceslertion group selection solacion 0 7 Fan | Midaispo0d operation | Remote seting Programmed operation ‘command (deceleration) up selection High-speed operation | Remote soting Progrommed operation 2 La command (setting clear) group selection 3 rt | Second function selection Soe z a 3 JOG [Jog operation selection 3 ‘CS | Automatic restart ater nalantensous power alure selection 7 ‘OH —[ External ermal ay input 3 TREX | 15-spaed selection (combinaion wih RL, FM, RAD 2 X9_—[ Tied funtion cn X10 FRC connedion (veri operation enable) cn Xi [FRLHC connection (nstantaneous power aiure Geeaion) 2 712___ | PU operation external interock 3 343 | Estemnal OC dynamic braking stat 2 314] PO contro vais terinal 15 ‘RI | Brake opening compotion signal 16 X16___| PUcextemal operation switeh-over a7 X17 [Load pattern selection fowardlrevarso rlalion Boost cr Xid [Advanced magnetic hxc vector VIF switeh-over 19 X19" Load torgus high-speed frequen To99) No function change as listed above. "1 of 2", Pr. 79 '5", and Pr. 270 = "4 or 3", the functions of the RL, RM, RH and RT signals Note: “1. One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the terminal inputs are ORed 2. The speed command priorities are higher in order of jog, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL) and AU. 3. When HC connection (inverter operation enable signal) is not selected, the MRS terminal shares this function. 4, When advanced magnetic flux vector-VIF switch-over and load pattern selection forwardireverse rotation boost are not selected, the second functions (RT) share these functions. 5, Use common terminals to assign programmed operation group selection, multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually. (Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed setting and need not be set at the same time.) 6. Stop-on-contact control selection, Pr. 270 = "1 or 3", shares RT with multi-speed setting (low speed), and its allocation cannot be changed. 7. When FR-HC connection inverter operation enable (X10) signal is not assigned, the MRS terminal shares this function 8. When "7" is set in Pr. 79 and the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned, the MRS signal acts as this function. 9. When the load pattem selection forward/reverse rotation boost (X17) signal is not assigned, the RT signal shares this function. 40.When advanced magnetic flux vector-VIF switch-over (X18) signal is not assigned, the RT signal shares this function. 137aaa Pr. N terminal function selection" eum Pr. 76 “operation mode selection" Pr. 191 “SU terminal function selection” Pr. 192 "IPF terminal functi ion” Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection” Pr. 194 “FU terminal function selectior Pr. 195 “ABC terminal function selection" You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals. Paretar | Terninal”| — Fasiany | Facing Sat m Number ‘Symbol Setting Terminal Function | Setting Range [no Of inang|O ist 30 [opto meeueny — ot oa Tenino 1a PF 2 [ingens re | toto, a0 iH a S| tad tm —| 0 9 Tat 7 a —[ ren ean [Os 1 is Ane fata O10, Refer to the following table and set the parameters: sing —T,, Tama] ig funtion Operation = tae abo yop en a BB | 100 | RUN |invenerrning feu) foe ‘or above be Cann — regen TP wo lopwmonney ee Gh A SRR AT |g Taare Foner ars OupU wor 7 aa PT B 102 [IPF | undervoltage undervaliage occurs. Susi wrk sal paver ncn @ [aE 8 = ee cee eee activated. 448, 149, 154 + [sar [eu [pu taqueney anectan [RECO PAD GU TERI Ty an ay 5 | 105 | Fu2_| secon ouput tmavoncy acon] Reet F 5 HON OUR TORTS 0 & | 108 | Fue | nsoapu teqaneyaniocon [Remo 17 dot Fequrey en 7 _[_107_| oP |reoeeratve tak reat | CMU Wn Roeper Bake |, 7 Sup oan eave eon 2 | se | rap [Bectenc vrcurnt stcton| ecient scion vate eaeedexotthe | P.8 7 [preset level, a Paw | eee Troparmea mane Capt ne ONSTAR VET] AT Ai spain me Spa wa ie PL pao nea soe P17 0S Cpt won Iver canbe sted wl Gute | uecnce| eencearatcc switching the start signal on or while tis running. |___—— v2 | 12 | v2 [oupaawertcowcion —[RORYOPY feandieteapitewrest even i [a [Wor crea Tf Pend 1 Gs eG | PT, 1S oe a Teter lo Prats (Sn 15 [ 15 FUP PID per et Pr tanto 04 Tete n To tad rrr oi 138Bion vnton foes si Function opera rene Sen RR pave sn et RORTS PTT TTT achat tc! Siriner we Scrat por Cairne eo wca_ fare em 1st 8 Comat pt apa g MC3 | suitch-over MCS mo | 120 | BOF [eat owing reas Ree RE aon To aaio zt [iss ran an oi Spal wien a ao = Biba tne be top 2 | a | rm |rmornentpeatam rot sih oe tnvenentpacctoe = ‘erpatus aa es ie rea Va ay wan FEAEIP S| oreo en oat) 5a eect anes _ [stan et | Orr ST Sy TT SLs angie sa SAT [ae wen PRAAP on ad Se St re TORT — Sapo an tar poate none a bd eeelae put activated to stop the output (major fault). i emma — = (0 to 89: Positive logic 4100 to 199: Negative logic Note: 1. Under PLG feedback control (when the FR-ASAP option is loaded), the operations of the up-to- frequency SU and frequency detection FU, FU2, FUS are as follows: ‘SU, FU: The actual speed (frequency) provided by the PLG feedback signal is output at or above the frequency specified for detection. FU, FU: The inverter output frequency is output at or above the frequency specified for detection. 2, When the frequency setting is varied with the analog signal or the [UP/DOWN] key of the operation panel, note that the output of the SU (up-to-frequency) signal may alternate between ON and OF F due to that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed dependent on the acceleration/deceleration time setting. 3. This signal is output when "5" is set in Pr. 79 “operation mode selection" and the external operation mode is selected (the inverter goes into the programmed mode). 4, The same function may be set to more than one terminal. 5. When the function is activated, the terminal conducts with the settings of 0 to 99 and does not conduct with the settings of 100 to 199. 6. Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 do not function if the values set are other than the above. 7. When Pr. 76 = 1 or 3, the output signals of the SU, IPF, OL and FU output terminals conform to Pr. 78, When an inverter alarm occurs, the signal outputs are switched over to alarm code outputs. 8, The output assignment of the RUN terminal and alarm output relay conforms to the above setting independently of Pr. 76. 139Za Waaass Pr. 199 “user's initial value setting” Related parameter Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection” ‘Among the parameters, you can set user-only parameter initial values. These values may be set to 16 parameters. By performing user clear operation from the operation panel or parameter unit, you can initialize the parameters to the user-set intial values. Note that the parameters of which initial values have not been set are initialized to the factory settings by user clear operation. © You can read the user's intial value lst in the help mode of the parameter unit (FR-PUO4), Parameter | Factory Number Seting Setting Range 09 ° Tio 0, SD ‘The read Pr. 199 value is displayed as the number of parameters registered. (1) To set "1" in Pr. 7 and "2" in Pr. 8 as user's intial values. (Operation from the FR-DUO4) Set" ergot nal vali) in PT r 2) Sat-2 targat ial value) a Pr 8 r '3) Prose the [SET] Koy to read Pr. 190. Tha numbor of parameters having wer’ nal valuos ae than spayed. z 4) Further press the SET] key for 1.5 seconds. “The parameter sting screen ls then lplayed. z 15) Select Pr. 7 and Pr. € wih the [UPIOOWN] kay and ress the [SET] key fr 1.5 seconds t eter. z 6) Trough the above steps he ial values of r.7 and Pr 8 ae registered, The settings of the parameters whose numbers are set in Pr. 199 (i.e. Pr. 7 = 1, Pr. 8=2 in the above example) are users intial values. (2) Deletion of users initial values By writing "9999" to Pr. 199 (and pressing the [SET] key for 1.5 seconds), the user's intial values registered are batch-deleted. Note: 1. When user's initial values for Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 are set, one parameter uses the area of two parameters for registration. 2. As this setting is concemed with user-cleared initial values, the parameter numbers which cannot be cleared cannot be set, 3. The operation panel (FR-0U04) cannot be used to refer to user's initial values. 4, Values cannot be registered to Pr, 204 to Pr. 231 140aaa Pr. 200 "program minute/second selection” Related parameters Pr, 201 to Pr. 210 “program setting 1 to 10" Pr, 211 to Pr. 220 "program setting 11 to 20" Pr, 221 to Pr. 230 "program setting 21 to 30" Pr. 234 “time-of-day setting" In programmed operation, automatic operation is performed under the control of the intemal timer in accordance with the preset time of day, running frequency and rotation direction, ‘© This function is made valid when the following parameter is set to the following value: + Pr. 79 = "5" (programmed operation) © You can select the time unit for programmed operation between "minute/second” and “hour/minute". © The start time of day, rotation direction and running frequency are defined as one point and every 10 points are grouped into three: + Group 1: Pr. 201 to Pr. 210, + Group 2: Pr. 211 to Pr. 220 + Group 3: Pr. 224 to Pr. 230 © Use Pr. 231 to set the time of day when programmed operation is started, Pr, 76 "alarm code output selection” Pr. 79 “operation mode selection” Parameter | Factory 5 None Sein Setting Range Remarks 0,2 minutelsecondy 200 a eee 4,3 [hourdinute) O12, 012: Rotation direction 2orto210 | 0,9999,0 | Oto 400, 9009, 0 to 400, 9998: Frequency 010 99.59 0 to 98.58: Time D102 (012: Rotation direction 2itto20 | 0,99990 | 010 400, 9909, (0 0 400, 9968; Frequency 010 99.89 (0 t0 99.59: Time, (012: Rotation dvedion | 02: Rotation dracion 22110230 | 0,999.0 | 0t0 400, 9999: Frequency | 0 10 400, 9999: Frequency 010 99.50: Time 0 to 99.59: Time, Bi a 010 90.58 + For sink logic coo stcen ( Tae orl amo enintncion P76 up seaicanmen 141iz 753 (1) Set the time unit for programmed operation in Pr. 200. Select either of "minute/second” and “hour/minute”, Setting Bascription (0__| Minutetsecond unt (votage monitor {| Hourminute unit voltage monitor) 2 Minute/second unit (reference tine of day monty '3- | Hourfminute unit (eferonce time of day monitor) Note: 1. When "2" or "3"is set in Pr. 200, the reference time-of-day monitor screen is displayed instead of the voltage monitor screen 2. Note that when the Pr. 200 setting is changed, the units for Pr. 201 to Pr. 231 setting will change. (2) The inverter has an internal timer (RAM). When the reference time of day is setin Pr. 231, programmed operation is started at this time of day. 1) Setting range The time unit depends on the Pr, 200 setting. Br, 200 Setting | Pr. 251 Setting Range | Pr. 200Seting | — Pr 231 Setting Range. 0 Tax. 9 minutes 59 seconds 2 Tax, 99 minutes 59 second 1 ‘Max. 99 hours 59 minutes 3 ‘Max. 99 hours 69 minutos Note: The reference time-of-day timer retums to "0" when both the start signal and group select signal are entered. Set the reference time of day in Pr. 231 when both signals are on. 2) Resetting the reference time of day The reference time of day is cleared by switching on the timer reset signal (STR) or by resetting the inverter. Note that the reference time-of-day value set in Pr. 231 is also reset to (3) Program setting ‘The rotation direction, running frequency and start time of day are 201 to Pr. 231 are used for this setting sane Pent en On, Foe, thaw ea Parameter 5 Factory Number — Setting Range | Setting ____Remarke Totaondietian salina aor wo2ve | omammed persion | 0102 © | esto. Fonvar tation, 2. Reverse rotton ee Tioabonz | — S595 — | Frequeny sting O10 99:58 | Ti of day seting 142 (Example: Set point No. 1, forward rotation, 30Hz, 4 hours 30 minutes) 1) Read Pr. 201 value. 2) Enter "1" (forward rotation) in Pr. 201 and press the [SET] key ({WRITE] key when using the FR-PUO4 parameter unit) 3) Enter 30 (30Hz) and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PUO4 parameter unit). (Note 1) 4) Enter "4.30" and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PUO4 parameter unit). (Note 2) 5) Press the [UP] key to move to the next parameter (Pr. 202), and press the [SET] key ([READ] key when using the FR-PUD4 parameter unit) to display the current setting, Hereafter, press the [UP] key to advance the. parameter one by one. Note 1: Tomakea stop, write "0" in the rotation direction and frequency. Set "9999" for no setting, Note 2: An error will result if 4.80 is entered (59 minutes or 59 seconds is exceeded). + Assuming that operation has been programmed as indicated in the following table, the operation pattern is as shown in the figure below: We. ‘Operation Parameter Setting 1 | Fama lation, 20Re 1 Four eeeneatartianl ‘Stop, 3 outs 0 rinutes Pr 305 0,0, 500 3 [Reverse tan, 0H # Rous eee ataena [Foran ian, or 6 ars peaace noon 3 [Forward rate, SFE 7 ous 90 etaseaana BI Stop, 9 hours Ominss Pr. 206 = 0, 0, 8:00 spon zs eae fase tote a 7 730 "5 Teno, (4) Input signals ‘ame Saipan Signa amas Tap sal eros Used sett tho goof roared rin tgoup2) sport, pee here sae RL (group 3) iaolated. ‘transistor. When ic = 10mA, Timer reset signal (STR) input to zero the reference time of day ‘so! Vec<0.5V should be satisfied. Fg oa tar Frans eae ee (5) Output signals Tama eon Sana at ‘is Sal on caap as opaTon eT Tine-cut sel (SU) tReseloded goup an eareson tna, = 2 am ranaaar | omy| | Bean Group select signals seed en ere utput (| ‘Only when Pr. 76= 3 (Fu, aro ror 143aaa (6) Operation 41) Ordinary operation After completion of all preparations and settings, turn on the desired group select signal (any of RH (group 41), RM (group 2) and RL. (group 3)), then turn on the start signal (STF). This causes the internal timer (reference time of day) to be reset automatically and the operation of that group to be performed in ‘sequence in accordance with the settings. When the operation of the group ends, a signal is output from the time-out output terminal. (The open collector signal of SU is turned on.) Note: Use the programmed operation function with "5" set in Pr. 79. Programmed operation will not be performed if any of the group select signals is switched on during PU operation or data link operation. = eee stg Se OR ont te astaans orem 2) Mult-group select operation ‘When two or more groups are selected at the same time, the operations of the selected groups are ‘executed in sequence of group 1, group 2 and group 3. For example, if group 1 and group 2 have been selected, the operation of group 4 is first carried out, and after that operation ends, the reference time of day is reset, the operation of group 2s started, and the time-out signal (SU) is output after the operation of group 2 ends. suvogu _SSSNSSSSRSESESSSS ong 1th SR oar q io ont Tem —_______ ESS sata (7) To repeat the operation of the same group, reset the timer using the time-out signal as shown below. 7) To repeal the operation of only group 1 2) To repeat the operalion of groups 1 and2 aa sit [ot sth ‘coup (ors (mn (om ‘eno ain (cows Note: 1. Ifthe inverter power is switched off, then on (including an instantaneous power failure) during the execution of the programmed operation, the internal timer is reset and the inverter does not restart if the power is restored. To resume the operation, tum the programmed operation start signal (STF) off, then on, (At this time, when itis required to set the reference time of day, switch the start signal on before setting.) 2. When the inverter is wired for programmed operation specifications, the following signals are invalid:AU, STOP, 2, 4, 1, JOG 3. During programmed operation, the inverter cannot be operated in any other mode. When the programmed operation start signal (STF) and timer reset signal (STR) are ON, the operation mode cannot be switched between PU operation and external operation, 144Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selectior You can control the operation of the cooling fan builtin the inverter (200V class, 1.5K or more). Parameter rameter | “Factory Setting | _Sating Range 2a o oi Seung Description 2 ‘Operaied a power on (ndependeny of whether the invere’unring or aa sap) ‘Coolg fen orf contol valid 1 (The cooing fan is ahvays on wnke the Ivete runing. During a stop the inverter status is ‘montored and the fan svtches on-off according to temperature) In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and the fan fault (FAN) and light fault (LF) signals are output. Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (multi-function outputs) to allocate the terminals used to output the FAN and LF signals, 1) Pr, 244 ="0" When the fan comes to a stop with power on, 2) Pr. 244="1" When the fan comes to a stop during the fan ON command or the fan starts during the fan OF F command. Note: When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to 195, the other functions may be affected Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting, 145Related parameters Pr. 7 "acceleration time” Pr, 8 “deceleration time” Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration| time" Pr. 45 "second deceleration time" Pr, 110 “third acceleration/deceleration time’ Pr. 111 “third deceleration time" Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal (STF/STR) switches off Parameter Factory hammer Sea Setting Range 250 9999) Oo 100 see, 8885) (1) Pr. 260 = "9999" When the start signal switches off, the motor is decelerated to a stop. ute L_ (2) Pr. 250 = other than "8999" oF Dezelaaton te i sn Pr 8) ‘The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal had switched off. The motor coasts to a stop. sa spat oseut f tecpacy Note: 1. The RUN signal switches off when the output stops, 2. When the start signal is switched on again during motor coasting, the motor starts at OHz 146Waa Pr. 261 “power failure stop selection” Related parameters ft a Pr. 12"DC dynamic brake voltage" Pr, 262 "subtracted frequency at deceleration. Pr, 20 "acceleration/deceleration start” reference frequency” Pr. 263 “subtraction starting frequency Pr. 264 “power-failure deceleration time 1" 5 "power-failur leration time 2" 1. 266 “power-failuri ler -over ‘When an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop. © Remove the jumper from across terminals R-R1 and S-S1 and connect the control circuit terminals R1-P and S1-N to route the power supply wiring of the other system, aaa naar oo i a Parametor "ramet Setting Description D Coasting To sop 261 When undervoltage or power falure occurs, the inverter output is shut of 7 ‘When undervotage or power failure occurs, the inverler is decelerated fo @ top Normally, operation can be performed wth the factory setting unchanged, The frequency can 282 0t020H2 | be adjusted within the range 0 to 20Hz according tothe load specifications (inertia moment, torque) Ifthe output frequency at occurrence of undewollage or power falure ls equal fo or greater than the frequency set In Pr. 283, deceleration stars atthe value found by subtracting the to 120Hz | frequency set in Pr. 262 from the output fequency at that time. Ifthe output frequency at 283 ‘occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is less than the frequency set in Pr. 263, the inverters decelerated to 2 stop, starting af tho outpu frequency at that time, ‘e09 | The inverter is decelerated toa stop, staring atthe value found by subtracting the fequency set in Pr. 262 from the output fiaquency al occurrence of undervoltage or power allure, 264 [izi= 0_| G10 3600 see | Set s deceleration slope down to the fisquency sat in Pr. 268. Set the slope in tems of time Pr2t= 1 [010 260 sec | required for deceleration from the frequency set in P. 20 to OMe, Pr21=0 | Oto 3600 sec_| Sel a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr. 268. Set the slope in terms of time 265 [[Pr21=1 [O10 360 sec] required for deceleration from the frequency set in Pr. 20 to OHZ. 3909 Same slope as in Pr. 264 ‘Sol the frequency at which the deceleration slope Is ewitched from the Pr. 264 salting To the 286 Oto oon | Fete fetine 147SaaS Note: 1. This function is invalid when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is activated, 2. If (output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure) minus (frequency set in Pr. 263) is negative, the calculation result is regarded as OHz, 3, The power failure stop function is not activated during a stop or error. 4. If power is restored during deceleration, the inverter is kept decelerating to a stop. To restart, switch off the start signal once, then switch it on again, 5, When the high power factor converter is used (Pr. 30=2), this function is made invalid ZXcaution A\ If power-failure deceleration operation is set, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to coast. If enough regenerative energy is not given by the motor, the motor will coast. 148Pr, 270 "stop-on-contact, load torque high-speed frequency selection" Related parameters Pr, 271 "high-speed setting maximum current” Pr, 272 "mid-speed setting minimum current" Pr. 273 "current averaging range" Pr. 274 "current averaging filter constant" Pr. 275 "stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor" Pr, 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency" To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc ofa lift, stop-on-contact control causes a mechanical brake to be closed while the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a mechanical stopper ete. This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in vertical motion applications, ensuring steady precise positioning Load torque high-speed frequency control automatically sets the maximum operating frequency according to the load ‘Specifically, the weight of the load is determined after a start by the average current at a given time toad is light, the preset frequency can be increased for operation. ‘When the load is light, speed can be automatically increased in a sky parking lot, for example, to reduce incoming and outgoing times. hen the © Using Pr. 270, select stop-on-contact contro! and/or high-speed frequency control (contro! which automatically switches between high- and middle-speed operations according to load torque). + When stop-on-contact control is selected, select advanced magnetic flux vector control, For function details, refer to Pr. 275 and Pr. 276. + For function details of load torque high-speed frequency control, refer to Pr. 274 to Pr. 274, Parameter | Factory mame | taco | soting Range Description ‘7 | Wit stp-on- contac control and load Torque Nigh speed Wequency canal i Slop-on-conact conto 20 ° z Load torque high-speed Fequency contol 3 Stop-on-contact conto + load forque high-speed fequancy conval 149Pr. 271 maximu mid-s set Pr. 273 “current averaging range" Pr, 274 “current averaging filter constant" surrent’ inimum current" Related parameters ‘mult-seed setting (high speed)" Pr. 5 “multi-seed setting (middle speed)’ Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speedy Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection’ Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact, load torque high-speed frequency selection" © Used to set the current, averaging range, etc. required when "2" or "3"/is set in Pr. 270 to select load torque high-speed frequency control. Paramoter Factory _itet nape Eeauencycotal> Number Setting Setting Range 2H 50% 15 200% nial 272 100% (010 200% c 213 9989) Dio 40otiz, 9899 i 274 16 10 4000. ss shh + Sink logic + Pr.186 = 19 eae (he th god or tno aa Path is moved veal atthe same sped tn ona (re culpa tequeny soa Loria gonad reso no soston cs em) Note: The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.Raa ernest | pets aiventot Clopnateioad A Re ee eS US WH + When operation is performed with X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) signal on, the inverter automatically varies the maximum frequency between Pr. 4 "multi-speed setting (high speed)" and Pr, § "multi-speed setting (middle speed)" settings as shown below according to the average current flowing during acceleration from the frequency half of the Pr. § setting to the frequency set in Pr. 5. Example; 1. Ifthe average current is not more than half of the rated inverter current, the maximum frequency is the value set in Pr. 4 as shown in operation example A. 2, If the average current is not less than the rated inverter current, the maximum frequency is the value set in Pr. 6 a8 shown in operation example B. ro coe bart rate Avwagpomert (co) (icon 41) Set "2 oF 3" in Pr. 270. 2) Assign X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) to the input terminal using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters: Parameter oes Name Setting Description 4 __| Mui-speed eating (igh speed) Dio s0oriz_| Sethe higher speed frequen 5 | Mubispeed setting (middle speed) | 010 400Hz | Set the lowor-speed frequency 27 [High-speed seting maximum curent | 0 to 200% | Set the upper and lower mits ofthe currant at high and migalo ‘272__| Mid-speed seting minimum curent | Oto 200% | speeds. ‘oto coors | (Avera9e current during acceleration Rom (Pr. 273 x 12) Ha te 273 | current averaging ange oe ee ose | Average current during accolaration fom (Pr 8 x 12) Hato Pr, 5) Hz is achived. ‘Sat the time conslant of the primary delay fiter relalve To The output curent 274 | Current averaging fitr constant 4140 4000 | (The time constant ms] is 0.75 x Pr. 274 and the factory setting 's 12ms,) A larger setting provides higher stability but poorer response, 151a is Note: 1 “This function is only valid in the external operation mode. This function is not activated when "1" or "2" (remote setting function) is selected for Pr. 68 If the current averaging zone includes the low output region, the output current may increase in the constant-output region. When the current is low, the running frequency increases, increasing the deceleration time. ‘The maximum output frequency is 120Hz. If its setting exceeds 120Hz, the output frequency is 4120Hz, The fast-response current limit function is invalid. Can be activated at every start. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be affected, Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. AX When the load is light, the motor may accelerate suddenly up to 120Hz, causing hazardous conditions. Provide sufficient interlocks on the machine side before starting operation. Z\CAUTION © Set frequency reference table for load torque high-speed frequency control ‘The following table lists the frequencies set when the load torque high-speed frequency control signal (X19) and multi-speed terminals (RH, RM, RL) are selected together: input Signal va Froauen xi [RH [RM] RC seein 0 Conforms to load torque Highspeed Frequency contol 2 ‘Speed i igh speed) Prd o ‘Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. D_| Speed ow speed) Pr o|-o ‘Speed 1 (righ speed) Pr.4 6 a ‘Speed 2 (middle speed) 5 © © Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. o [6 ‘Speed 6 P26 © | Speed 5 P25 [0 | Speed-4 P24 o[- 3-6 ‘Speed6 P26 oe ‘| 0 | Speed Pr 24 O_[ 9 [6 | Speed 7 Pra? o_o ‘0 _| Speed 5 P25 [Sd Pia? ‘Selling wil teminal 21,4, JOS (© indicates thatthe signal's on Note: 1. Assumes that the extemal operation command mode is selected and the remote setting function is not selected 2. Multi-speeds override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5, 4-5, 1-5). 3. When the 12-bit digital speed input (option FR-ASAX) is selected, the above list is invalid (The 12-bit digital speed input has the highest priority.) 4, Jog operation overrides the above list. 152(Zw aaas © Function list (The following specifications apply to the external operation mode.) Pr aT0Seting | ead Tore HGR SP=H4 ] seopioncontat Conte! | Mul-Speed 7 speeds) 7 r z 3 5 7 3 % z o z 3 3 3 S o ‘©: Indicates that the function is valid. © Restrictions when 1 to 3 are selected for Pr. 270 Under the following conditions, the functions of Pr. 270 settings "1 to 3" are made invalid: + PU operation + Programmed operation + PU + extemal combined + PID control + Remote setting function mode + Orientation control (option FR-ASAR) + Jog operation (common to PU and external operations) 153AGA) Pr, 275 "stop-on-contact exciting current Related parameters low-speed multiplying factor” Pr. 4 “multi-seed setting (high speed)" Pr. 5 "mult-seed setting (middle speed)" Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speed)" Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation current” Pr, 72 "PWM carrier frequency" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 270 “stop-on-contact, load torque high-speed frequency selection” Pr. 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency” '® Set “1 or 3" (stop-on-contact control) in Pr. 270, Also advanced magnetic flux vector control must be selected. Paramotor | Factory Number Satting Setting Range 270) 0 O123, 275 3595) Die 1000%, 9580 276 9299) Oo 15, 9989 Nien suponcinteh ———thlapancotact conc > och, Wi jon examples> + Sink logic ape fi) xara na Spore cot t}—| + rine —4 @ om re on Oy: Noe Lard RT maybe echcon nay re wh yin eancn) ‘taped ate Seponeran en Note: The input signal terminals used depend on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings ‘When both the RT and RL terminals are switched on, the inverter enters the stop-on-contact made, in which operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)" independently of the preceding speed, 154Gara Note: 1. By increasing the Pr. 275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but the ‘overcurrent alarm (E.OCT) may occur or the machine may oseilite in a stop-on-contact state. 2. The stop-on-contact function is different from the servo lock function, and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period, the function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop, immediately reset this function and use a mechanical brake to hold the load. 3. Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is made invalid + PU operation + Programmed operation + PU + extemal operation + PID control function operation + Remote setting function operation + Orientation control function operation + Jog operation 1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control and set "1" or "3" in Pr. 270, 2) Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Name Seting Deserpton Sel sepa aqua or sop-v-cotae cana ‘he fequoncy shuld be as low as poss (about 2H), Is sto Mutsped sting (ow mor than 20H, the operating equency wile 3z 6 speed) Oto 400H2 | When stop-on-contact controls to be exercised during PLG feedback conto, PLS feedback coriolis made aval when te inverter entre the stop-on-contact convo mode, co | Seanksetperenion [ov aan | Sette tat reveston operation fe sop-onconat conto Stop-orconiac rena | 9 aaa saa vate batwoon 130% and ORE 275 | current low-speed Oto 1000% | Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact contro ruling factor TEBE [No compensation Sela PHM caret Fequanay fr sop oF canaa Sool 275 | Stpon-coniact PH 91015 | ivatsat the equenay of Seo es) eer 9600 [ Conforms to the Pr. 72°PWM carrer frequency selection” + Function switch-over when stop-on-contact control is selected Geen Ordinary Operation ‘Stop-on-Contact Control iL, RT terminals RU] RT RL RT Remarks tain uncon Soe nO ow on aan pate oupareiencytrastn | Sipay oto 10V |b towsped teary sie ma Stall prevention operation | Pr. 22 (stall prevention | Pr. 48 (second stall prevention operation ceca can peeeeataet ae eo tion level) current) operation frequency) is invalid. The ares Sopot ye ‘eg canon apeed rlongfacor te ano an cenia our Peart ars RT shed Tainan | BBE apa PU err arr cuancy weoaere | regen foie ___| foto, 2000 aaa eT a s 155aaa + Frequencies set in stop-on-contact control (Pr. 270 = 1 or 3) (In external operation mode) ‘The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selected together. Input Signals Stop-on- Contact ra | rm | re | ar | Joc ‘Set Frequency Control roma Function o Spaedi Wigh epee) Pea o ‘Speed 2 (middle speed) PAS: o ‘Speed 3 (ow speed) PS. 2 ‘According to 0-5V, OO, AZOMA [og toquensy Pais Tide speed when ofo Speed 6 P28 diese o a Spas, Peas ow speed whan Pr 25 = 9509 ° x Speed 1 igh speed) Pra o 5 fea feawency P15 oo Speed Piza Tow spend when Pr © 3 ‘Speed 2 (riddle speed) 25: © [og frequen P18 ‘Speed 3 (low speed, sloparrcontact ito frequency) P68 2 a | sog fecuenay Pi O_[ Over requenay Pris S| [0 | og frequency Bets o (O[ 0 | veg tequeney Peis oo (O-[ og fequen Pris Speed 3 (ow sped, stop or contact alae frequen Peo 2 o B-[-S[e frequen Pr © a ‘0 | vg frequency Peis ‘Speed’ (ow speed, sfop-on-contact ° eye frequesey) P68 2 ore [sea freer Pris ofo ° Speed 6 Pr26 Wie spose when ooo Speed 7 Bear O[-0 [6] 6] og requ Pets o [oo sog reaver Bri5 oo (| of dog frequen Pri o}o}o (© [ dog freauenc Pb ‘Speed 3 (low speed, sloponcontact CHUECE HOR) Ec frequency) Pee hd O_O [-S_[-S_|-S veg tequensy Pts ‘scoring to 05V, OV, EEOmMA “© incicates that he function is selec Note: 1. © indicates that the signal is on, 2, Indicates that the remote selting function is not selected. (The remote setting function disables stop-on-contact control) 3. The selection of the 12-bit digital speed input FR-ASAX (option) makes the above list invalid Note that when both RL and RT are on, the frequency is as set in Pr. 6 and stop-on-contact control is exercised. 4, The jog frequency has the highest priority 5. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings 156(eared Pr, 278 "brake opening frequency” Pr, 279"! ‘opening current" Related parameters Pr. 60 “inteligent mode selection" Pr, 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr, 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) Pr. 280 “brake opening current detection time” Pr. 281 "brake operation time at start" Pr, 282 "brake operation frequency" Pr. 283 "brake operation time at stop" Pr, 284 “deceleration detection function selection’ Pr. 285 “overspeed detection frequency” This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical brake opening completion signal timing signal in vertical lift and other applications. This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at starting due to the operation timing fault of the mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation, ‘© The mechanical brake opening completion signal may either be entered or not entered into the inverter. ‘© This function is only vatid when "7" or "8" is set in Pr. 60 to select brake sequence mode. Parameter Facto 7 Number Setting Setting Range 278 3H io sre 279 30% Oto 200% 280 03sec Oto 2 sec 261 03 sec 105 ee 282 ez ‘Oto 30H 283 03 see 010 5 sec 284 0 Ot 285 wes Tis Bore, 9555 + Sink logic + PrAsd= 15 + Pr190=20 ‘at coer ocest sia BOE sesh vc, [oe dG) stent rele sun serg compen ral 2 441 omen teaser Yoo se Note: 1. The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr, 180 to Pr. 186 settings. 2. The output signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr, 195 settings. 187a= © Atstart: When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the output frequency reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. 279, the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed ‘When the time set in Pr. 261 elapses after the brake opening completion signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed. © Atsstop: When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr. 282, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is switched off, When the time set in Pr. 283 elapses after the brake operation confirmation signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter output is switched off * IfPr. 60 ="8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input), this time is the time after the brake ‘opening request signal is output. 1) Pr. 60 ="7" (brake opening completion signal input) lame see seater i al sat peng equoe I! on eT (eor sora) r i frac cearng anplton ; (RMA ned | ome eoroneratcrsecprtan nes u 2) Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input) Tam at 7 ie a ee ae t on betecomicgenan ———! eon : t Cased i 158 (1) Parameter setting 1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control. (Pr. 80, Pr. 81 #"9999") 2) Set '7 or 8" (brake sequence mode) in Pr. 60. To ensure more complete sequence control, itis recommended to set "7" (brake opening completion signal Input) in Pr. 60. Note that the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is not activated when the brake sequence mode is selected. 3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters: eet Nome Setting Description Brae opening Sato the vied ip Toque othe rtar abot TORE 278 frequenc Oto 30H | This parameter may only be set if Pr. 278 < Pr. 282. ‘naraty, a is parame fo about 50.90% Whe Eating 15D 279 | rake operingcurent | 0t0 200% | ow, th ats labie trop wth gravy atta, Suppose ta erated inverter cent 100%, 220 | Brake opening cent | 91072 anc | Ganaray, setts parameter to about 01-03 secon. ers GOAT Sola chan ay Ue unl te ke Hoss. za | Bate otwssec | Pr sons Set the mechanical cia ie nt te bate oosened # Shot o.07 second, ae A his frequency, he brake oping request ara (SOF) ached oF zea Boke otosore | Genera sot hs parameter ther 270 sting + 4h Thi parameter may ony be st fr 282 3 Pr. 278 r,s? St he machrical delay tne url tie bake Gexed 7 aan | Bmxeoperaiontine | Giogeg | secon stop Pr. 6006 Sel he mechanical delay Uo un te brake is osed + about 03.03 secon, TT Decwieraton ok detec seq | Deeraton setecton ifdecelrton not noel ng deaeralon opera, Te ‘eneton selesfon 1+ | Inver slam (€ME} = provide shu of the output and ech of the brake opening request ira SOF) i detected frequency) (oubul equenay) > Pr 265 tha PL Towa nas | Overpseddtecion | atoaoHz | conselma, he svete alam (ME = proved to shut of the outpet reqverey and ech of he brake oping request sia (SOF) BE [reteset detects Note: When using this function, set the acceleration time to 1 second or longer. (2) Explanations of terminals used ‘The terminals must be allocated using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 and Pr, 190 to Pr. 195. Brake Sequence Mode. ‘Signal Terminals Uso Br. 66=7 (with mochanical brake Pr. 608 (without machanical ‘opening completion signal) brake opening completion signal) BOF | Recording 0 Pr, 16016 Pr 785 _| Brake opening request Brake opening request BAL_| According to Pr. 190 t0Pr. 195 | Brake opening completion signal — Note: 1. The brake opening completion signal (BRI) is a parameter valid when Pr. 60=7, 2. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to 186 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. 159aaa (8) Protective functions If any of the following errors occu the brake sequence mode, the inverter results in an alarm, shuts off the output and switches off the brake opening request signal (BOF terminal). On the operation panel (FR-DU04) LED and parameter unit (FR-PU04) screen, the following errors are displayed: Error eres Error Display EMB! | (Detected frequency) -[ouiput Requency) > Pr 268 in the PLG feedback control mode. Overspeed detection function) ‘Emaz | Deceleration is not normal during deceleration operaiio (Use Pr. 284 fo select this function.) (Except stall prevention operation) EMBS_| Brake opening request signal (BOF) switched on though ie motor is ata Slap. (Gravity drop prevention uncton ‘Eps | Mow than 2 seconds after the run command (foward or roverse rotalon) i input, the brake opening request signal (SOF) does nat svitch on, ‘Emas | Note than 2 seconds after the brake opening request signal sviched on, the brake opening completion signal (RI) does not switch en Eampe | Though the inverter had switched on th brake opening request signal (BOF), he brake opening completion signal (BRD switched off during that period Zaay | Mot than 2 soconds after the Brake opening request signal (SOF) swiched oH ata sop, th brake Gparing completion signal (BRI) does not switch of 160(Raa Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration’ libration” Related parameters Pr, 64 FM terminal function selection” Pr, 85 “frequency monitoring reference" Pr, 66 “current monitoring reference” Pr, 158 "AM terminal function selection’ © By using the operation paneV/parameter unit, you can calibrate a meter connected to terminal FM to full scale © Terminal FM provides the pulse output. By setting Pr. 900, you can calibrate the meter connected to the inverter from the parameter unit without providing a calibration resistor. © You can display a digital value on a digital counter using the pulse train signal from terminal FM. A 1440Hz output is provided at the full scale value as explained in the section of Pr. 54. When the running frequency has been selected for monitoring, the ratio of this FM terminal output frequency can be set in Pr. 55. (Zisx) (Dt rion ooo 5 Fa aa le win Tt Acutin wt900 Pie pea T2 Stn 55 ator toquny montage) © Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale state of each monitoréd data. Pr. 901 allows the output voltage ratio (gain) to be adjusted according to the meter reading. Note that the maximum. ‘output voltage is 10VDC. (1) Calibration of terminal FM 4) Connect a meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals FM-SD. (Note the polarity. FM is the positive terminal.) 2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor. 3) Set any of "1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 and 21" in Pr. 54. When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal, preset in Pr, 86 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 1440Hz. At this 1440Hz, the meter normally deflects to full scale. (2) Calibration of terminal AM 4) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals AM-5, (Note the polarity. AMis the positive terminal.) 2) Set any of "1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 and 21" in Pr. 158, When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal, preset in Pr. 86 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 10V. 3) When outputting a signal which cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21" in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for example) in Pr. 158. 161 + When operation panel (FR-DUO4) is used 1) Sole he PU operation mode 2) Roud Pr. 00°F ermba cabratont or Pr 901 AM trina alban 3) Sete foquncy Exar: 62) 4) Press to (SETI. 5) Press he [Fey orn the ver. ead nat be connect) 6) Using te (UPIDOWN| ay, adh te mater portr toh requre poston, (hepa akes omen ome) 0 [SET key for aout 1.5 second 1 Pres the |STOPIRESET] hey t tape Ever, Note: 1 2, Pr, 900 is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440Hz FM output frequency at 60Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400Hz. ‘When a frequency meter is connected across terminals FM-SD to monitor the running frequency, the FM terminal output is filed to capacity at the factory setting if the maximum output frequency reaches or exceeds 100Hz, In this case, the Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum frequency, For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PUO4), refer to the FR-PUO4 instruction manual. 162Pr. 902 “frequency setting voltage bia: Pr. 903 “frequency setting voltage gain" Pr. 904 “frequency setting current bias” Pr. 905 “frequency setting current gain” You can set the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 8V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC). Related parameters Pr. 20 “acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" Pr. 73"0-5/0-10V selection” ‘The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input signal entered from outside the inverter to set the output frequency, €.g. 0 to SVDC, 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency. © Use Pr, 902 to set the bias frequency at OV. ‘© Use Pr. 903 to set the output frequency relative to the frequency command voltage set in Pr. 73. © Use Pr. 904 to set the bias frequency at 4mA. © Use Pr, 905 to set the output frequency relative to the 20mA frequency command current (4 to 20mA). paneer Factory Setting Sotting Range 902 ov One O10 107 Dio core 208. av Boz Dio 10V To 400H 308 am Oz Do 20mA Oto Gott 208 ZomA | —60Hz | —0f0 20mA. ‘io 4002, é racy tases! 5 Ce) (1) The frequency setting voltage biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following two ways: 1) Any point can be adjusted with a voltage applied across terminals 2-6. 2) Any point can be adjusted with no voltage applied across terminals 2-6. 3) Bias voltage is not adjusted. (2) The frequency setting current biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following two ways: 41) Any point can be adjusted with a current flowing at terminal 4. 2) Any point can be adjusted with no current flowing at terminal 4. 3) Bias current is not adjusted. 163PARAMETERS Pr. 902 (Pr. 904) “frequency setting voltage (current) bias + When operation panel (FR-DUO4) is used Select the PU operation mode. [ Read Pr. 902 (Pr. 904) value. T Pross the [SET] key. I Using the [UP/DOWN] key, set the bias frequency. —__[ Press the [SET] key for about 1.5 sec. eee] eae The analog voltage (current) monitor value across terminals 2(4)-5 Is displayed. (1) Any point is adjusted with a voltage (current) applied (2) Any point is adjusted with (8) Blas voltage (current) ‘no voltage (current) applied is not adjusted. Using the [UPIOOWN] Key, set the bias voltage (current in %. {0% for OV (OMA), 100% for 5V {10V, 207A) ‘When the [UP] or [DOWN] key is pressed, the present setting is displayed, Apply the bias voltage (current. Press the [SET] key for about 1.5 seconds, I ‘The bias voltage (current) setting flickers. en Bias setting complete Press the [SET] key. “The cursor moves to the next parameter. “Pr. 903 to Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly using the above procedure. Note: 1. Ifthe Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 (gain adjustment) value is changed, the Pr. 20 value does not change. ‘The input signal to terminal 4 ([requency setting auxiliary input) is added to the frequency setting signal 2. For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PUO4), refer to the FR-PUO4 instruction manual 164ae Z\caution A, Be careful when setting any value other than "0". Even without the speed command, the motor will start running at the set frequency by merely switching on the start signal. Pr, 990 "buzzer control You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press any key of the operation panel or parameter unit Parameter Factory al Number Setting cee eaete Remarks 990 i oi DrWihout beep, 1 Wah beep 165MEMOCHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment. 5.1 Errors (Alarms) «+ + 166 5.2 Troubleshooting - “4171 5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection: ++ 174 CHAPTER 1 | OUTLINE CHAPTER 2 | INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 3 | OPERATION CHAPTER 4 | PARAMETERS CHAPTER 5 (GSCI agnor eg CHAPTER 6 | SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER OPTIONS ‘APPENDICES5.1 Errors (Alarms) = r ; ; Ee TaA ae If any fault has occurred in the inverter, the corresponding protective function is activated and the error (alarm) indication appears automatically on the PU display. When the protective function is activated, refer to "5.2 Troubleshooting” and clear up the cause by taking proper action. If an alarm stop has occurred, the inverter must be reset to restart it 5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions ee Parameter in Name Descriton Dieray {FR-DU04) (FR-PUO4) Seba | Bas E001 | Ace acceleration tae eocz | 902954 |Cotn | ovcuret | wen he verter ouput cnet sachs or xeeds appx. 200% of seoat”" _| Shacat”” | faoc crane tect cet eivead oy verte uu a] eocs | Oc 0¥i | ction During stop Son OTB Bare So | etrton a regerratie oor fr tuning motor caves tb vrs Tow | Seay sre [OPE | regenerate | onl an ast Oe whup eechoecede seled va, bo GVM | constant | Sevctope | prtcheccut atlas sop he inert oupi org shut-off ‘This may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power eovs | Vu | poten sup ton Dung ap The Taine DRA BOOST Fhe Tee eae Hae Drea! dn 0 eon occlng eapahiy dud eu cow span span han 5% ef est aol ached perm TH Wor Feicauny ceca When ho pei sae och, poce erat | Sioaa | Oteeat | oor | Se uted sap roe’ aud When a spel sch outot ssamuntoon outro eter arama wan, Pe rt ana bo (econ srsuted be dnctere oreo psc Pow sual ly orscara fe nvetar Sapa sat ia aa a bas han TOW Tod SCO To ena | snamar | eeont stat (08) seve nal neu GO oat voesire Groot Shale coma scot oncom peter be ached {Sap he mdr au (Ovoad Fant, 0 60s) ape ialaa tc cacurodi coer Tena Gis pt00 a0 Teter pa shay is clon selaldis sop mer opal (Seon corel cea fon mcperar Atha te, slam cine | nstewe | stanneouspovertre | suputcontcs a apened ees 0) and dosed (crs Ac) te | piece tite apne epost tr mortton oma he lam cuit (esl cn sarsnalocn a be ts ofpee ett, tholnvorer at esa apo aslo mlnanocs win Tes te ann ona pris sa) nwa ser py oe ae CTC AT root pen renin deceased more er cresredest a Senuraton To prover the power uy vlape duce ow cuve |, | untnotae ptesion | en nu a0 fre con) hs ton ps he era oa neta moe not comeced aes Pt uadenotage ramets clon scat Tia cat tn oe a por SONTI OOTOTTS pe crn | BER [Romneat ee.oore Tors iror Wa fouahe & Gal Tah FI day ono ey lL canteun “portion pare afar at gal 80 nda ut lal (ae Fre SZoatuncnte costng tan ap doco eor pre sir om Ss nating ot Br 20 od en operon cr ; patra line ete eno daapel are TARO, eae | B:0ct [Baker atm |S ne unto sos te ver Opt Ini ase ee font ust be seh of edn 166PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: Operation | parameter Panel Unit Name Description Display (eR-buoe | (FRPUOA) “This function stops the inverer output fa ground fault occurs Inthe cp | Sound | Output sie ground faut’ | inverte's output (oad) sie and aground fault current flows, A ground fault Fault overcurent pratection| ‘occuring at low ground resistance may activate the overcurrent protection (061 to 063), ifthe extemal thermal flay designed for moter overheat protection or the internally mounted temperature relay inthe motor switches on (relay contacts open’), the inverter output can be stopped if those contacts had been entored int the inverter. the relay contacts are reset automaticaly, the inverter will not restart uness itis reset fa current not less than 160% (Note 4) of the rated Tnverer Garant Howe in the motor, this funtion lowers the frequency unt the load eurrent feduces to prevent the inverer from resulting in overcurrent shut-off Extoral thermal relay E.OHT | OH Fault | cperaion (Note 3) cour ung aezleraton Uimen th ond siren has resicad el 150%, thi uct esses oi te agony apo o aura an put ta vero 9 eauere. Broventon | sy rey ia cure wal ens an 155% (ci ofa ated vere curon fas soeraton | STP | wing eorstantapeey | Muemetr i fnclon ler the requency uni ha lead curt reduced | (OL shown | oon si reduces to prevent overcurrent shut-off. When the load current has Seg | ut tediced Blow 150% ts uneson eases the equency upto fhe sat peoverton va frequency | eration) ithe egaraave sraty of We nr has Htased above te Bake oom capably, th funcon Ieases the equenoy to prevent ovenotage ane shutoff caren nt es than 150% (Note 4) ofthe ated invertor eer Dung dcseatin Suet fows nthe mote, ths tnt nreases the fesuory un fe fond cure resent preven th inverter rm osling In overeurert Shutoff non the ead corer hs duced below 180%, ths fneton Secreases the Feaverey aga ‘Stops he vera ouput re sedated boar opin wed we Onton inverter este n sein er of conection (anna eu EOPT | Fault Option alarm ‘When the high power factor converter connection is selected, this alarm i dapayed AC pone conected to. 5, corre | Onna Tops theinvetr outa functonl feu (ouch a commurieaon oer OP1"0 | term | Orton st alarm cf the conmanicaon spon) ocean the ard open loaded ry 03 sit Cont Stops te op Fak ocaurs EPROM whi saves paral EP [Come | Parametereror one ‘This funclion slops the Inverter output f communication between iverter ‘and PU is susponded, e.g. the operation panel or parameter unt is tlsconnactag, when"2", "3", 16" or 17" is setin Pr 75 "eset ‘selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selection”. This function ‘stops the inverter output ifthe numberof successive communication {errors is greater than tho numberof permissible retries when Pr, 124 value is "9999" for RS-485 communication from PU connector. ‘This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for a peried of ime set in Pr, 122 operation cannot be resumed wihin the numiber of retves set, is enue [gular |puseamacin pet | RYN | Retry count exceeded Over function stops the inverter output me ‘Open oulput phase This function stops the Inverter oulput when any ofthe tras phases (U,V, protection \W) onthe invarte's output side (load sid) opens. Tf the arthmetic operation of the bult-n CPU doos nat ond within a e.cPU_ | CPUFaut | CPU eror predetermined period, the inverter sel-determines ithas an alarm and stops the output ‘When 24VDC power output rom the PC terminals shoved, this funcion| eee 24VDC power output short | shuts off the power output, At this ime, all external contact inputs switch cout off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. To reset, use the operation panel or switch power of, then on again ‘Wien the operation panel power (PSS ofthe PU connecion ie shored, tis function shuts ofthe power output. At this time, the operation pane! ects Qneration panel power Short | (rameter unt) cannot be used and RS-485 communication from the PU oad connector cannot be made, To reset, enter the RES signa or switch power off, ten on again 167Ozer ORIEN | parton are Name Dereon eR-puon | FR PLO Tas OTC a os Cova aa a Wane OTST Dao dy fom te mic us rschod 2% ol he spatiale, po arate estorovenest | aamm{R® incon overs te spactiogvabe encendoa abe — | — |eaeee Sit pero ype teppei et cvereaing, (tte rate opetsed the sat, ropoertie vonage suf vl cor) When he ke restr fas coe, he brake apeaton eee ENGI] ———] gaeaaueasoonay pT fncion tp the ve obul Fa suance Ooms Oh MBT_ 7 the use of the brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285). IfPr. 195 (A, B, C terminal function selection) is as set in the factory, The terminals used must be allocated using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195. External thermal relay operation is only activated when "OH" is setiin any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection), Indicates that the stall prevention operation level has been set to 150% (factory setting). If this value is changed, stall prevention is operated at the new value. Resetting method ‘When the protective function is activated and the inverter stops its output (the motor is coasted toa stop), the inverter is kept stopped. Uniess reset, the inverter cannot restart. To reset the inverter, use any of the following methods: switch power off once, then on again; short reset terminal RES- ‘SD for more than 0.1 seconds, then open; press the [RESET] key of the parameter unit (use the help function of the parameter unit) If RES-SD is kept shorted, the operation panel will show "Err." or the parameter unit will show that the inverter is being reset. 168PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS © To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm ‘When any alarm has occurred, the display automatically switches to the indication of the corresponding protective function (error). By pressing the [MODE] key at this point without resetting the inverter, the display shows the output frequency. In this way, itis possible to know the running frequency at the occurrence of the alarm. It is also possible to know the current in the same manner, However, these values are not stored in memory and are erased when the inverter is reset. 5.1.2 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ‘There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel: ‘Actual | Digital ‘Actual | Digital ‘Actual_| Digital @ @ oO @ © @ @ QO] @ @ Q @ @ @ @ @ 4 8 @ f a ( a E 2 u 169esas 5.1.3 Alarm code output ee By setting Pr. 76 “alarm code output selection’, an alarm definition can be output as a 4-bit digital signal. This signal is output from the open collector output terminals equipped as standard on the inverter. Correlations between alarm definitions and alarm codes are as follows. ‘Gperation Panet ‘Output Terminal Signal On-OfF Display ‘Alarm Code ‘Alarm Output (across (R-DUDY) su IPF OL, FU ion Bo EOCi 0 2 3 7 7 E062 0 0 1 2 2 Provided (Open) E.0c3 ° o 1 1 3 EOvt OVE ° 1 ° o 4 Provided (Open) OVS. ETHM o 7 o 7 3 a 8 + 7 + 2 Provided (Open) PE 0 1 1 1 7 Provided (Open) EU 1 2 ° ° 8 Provided (Open) EFIN 7 0 0 1 3 Provided (Open) BE + 0 7 0 A Provided (Open) EGF 1 o 1 1 8 Provided (Open) EOHT 7 1 2 2 6 Provided (Open Not provided (Provided when OLT EOT 1 1 ° 1 ° is displayed) (Open) EOPT 7 H 7 o Ee Provided (Open) EOP wEOPS 1 1 1 o E Provided (Open) PE Provided (Open) EPUE Provided (Open) ERET 1 1 1 1 F Provided (Open) ELF Provided (Open) Ecru Provided (Open) 5.1.4 Resetting the inverter (Note) 0: Output transistor OFF, 1: Output transistor ON (common terminal SE) The alarm output assumes that Pr. 195 setting is "99" (factory setting). The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the electronic overcurrent protection’s internal heat calculation value and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter. Operation 1: Using the operation panel (FR-DU04), press the [RESET] key to reset the inverter, Operation 2: Switch power off once, then switch it on again Operation 3: Switch on the reset signal (RES), 1705.2 Troubleshooting euseereny If any function of the inverter is lost due to occurrence of a fault, clear up the cause and make correction in accordance with the following procedure. Contact your sales representative if the corresponding fault is not found below, the inverter has failed, parts have been damaged, or any other fault has occurred, 5.2.1 Checking the operation panel display at alarm stop The alarm code is displayed on the operation panel to indicate the cause of a faulty operation. Clear up the cause and take proper action in accordance with the following table: ‘Operaton Pan — - aa Ra Display Check Point Remedy ‘Major_| Minor Tea Ta eae Check for output short circult or ground fault, _| O7ORSE acceleration time. g Side nd charge? cee Check for output short cicuit or ground faut_| Keep load stable i Delrin oa 003 | Greckierouput shor cout or ground at, | Mar¥aea deearaon to ° Mechanical brake of motor operating too fast?_| Check brake operation E OVE essen tot Tors soon I z Eve | Soden oad charge? ep ed stabi 3 Tntease deters ne Ga c.0ve | ecataton to ts ° eden bag uy. a 5 ee fe 3 ETHT tears teen erate Increase motor and inverter capacities. EIPF mua ‘the cause of instantaneous power Restore 7 ° Large-caacty motor stated? Silico gel lige da) ee teminis EAN _| anbien temperate foongh? Set bie! epee win 3 > Rese aa GO BE | caves iake ay Rese nas GO 3 EGE | Cree moran ents GRE Reso ground ou 3 (CCE on ‘Check motor for overheat Reduce load and frequency of operation. | © Rede or. ecky abot el nade everad Increase motor and inverter capacttes. Q EOP | Gree roo wea Connecter 7 pen neon sting o opoaTEn ROBO? cao Eom wore | oRten Ruan sting opeatOn BEE [ check tw optan neon soting otc | 0 © FE [Narr ot parameter ne tines to any? | hangs mee 3 EPUE [BU or Red secre? FDU or PU se © ERET | Check ease ofan © ELF [ere or pen lp apa pon pas o cory char tr eceomeet Change ivrer © eck oroose comes 2] Ra [Chas 66 ral op aha Rea so 3 ETE | Check PU cones cbr sot Check PU and © FX | Goong an noma Chang 3 ET OTT | Chock brat sequence 3 be | STOP toy of operation ara a Crack oad Ta tera operating Fort pagn RE [Bat estar used tn ane Those dcr Pea mamaioa Reduce Toad anoint oF TeGueney TH | Loadtolage Sudden accra a twa? ox __| Sudden docetortont Lhe a ol “Orentage sa Reduce iene oF bang OL: Owreoren sa fe © When the protective function is activated, take proper corrective action, reset the inverter, then resume operation. 1745.2.2 Faults and check points POINT: Check the corresponding areas. if the cause is still unknown, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (retum to factory settings), re-set the required parameter values, and check again, 4) Motor remains stopped. 1) Check the main circuit + Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided), + Check that the motor is connected property 2) Check the input signals + Check that the start signal is input + Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input Cheok that the frequency setting signal is not zero. Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to 20mA. Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on. * Check that the CS signal is not off when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 = other than "9999"), 3) Check the parameter settings + Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 78) is not selected + Check that the operation mode (Pr. 79) setting is correct. + Check that the bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905) settings are correct. + Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 13) setting is not greater than the running frequency. + Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation), especially the maximum frequency (Pr. 1), are not zero 4) Check the load + Check that the load is not too heavy. + Check that the shaft is not locked. 5) Others + Check that the ALARM lamp is not it. + Check that the Pr. 15 "jog frequency’ setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 “starting frequency" value, (2) Motor rotates in + Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct + Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly (3) Speed greatly differs from the setting. + Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.) + Check that the following parameter settings are proper: Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 19. Check that the input signal lines are not affected by extemal noise. (Use shielded cables) Check that the toad is not too heavy. (4) Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth. + Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short. + Check that the load is not too heavy. + Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 142) setting is not too large to activate the stall function. 172VAN (5) Motor current is large. + Check that the load is not too heavy. + Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large. (6) Speed does not increase, + Check that the maximum frequency (Pr. 1) setting is correct. * Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavy in winter.) * Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention function, (7) Speed varies durin: ration. During operation under advanced magnetic flux vector control, the output frequency varies with load fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault 41) Inspection of load + Check that the load is not varying. 2) Inspection of input signal + Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying + Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by induced noise. 3) Others + Check that the settings of the applied motor capacity (Pr. 80) and the number of applied motor poles (Pr. 81) are correct forthe inverter and motor capacities in advanced magnetic flux vector control + Check that the wiring length is within 30m in advanced magnetic flux vector control + Check that the wiring length is correct in VIF control. Operation mode is not changed properly. If the operation mode is not changed properly, check the following: 1. External input signal «+--+ +Check that the STF or STR signal is off. ‘When itis on, the operation mode cannot be changed. *Check the Pr. 79 setting When the setting of Pr. 79 “operation mode selection’ is "0" (factory setting), switching input power on places the inverter in the external operation mode. Press the operation panel's [MODE] key three times. and press the [UP] key (press the [PU] key for the parameter unit (FR-PU04)). This changes the extemal operation mode into the PU operation mode, For any other setting (1 to 8), the operation mode is limited according to the setting 2. Parameter setting ++++++ (9) Operatior nel (FR-DU04) display is not provided. + Make sure that the operation panel is connected securely with the inverter. (10) POWER lamp is not I + Make sure that the wiring and installation are correct. 1735.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection : ese ae ‘The transistorized inverter is @ static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse influence by the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors. 5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the inverter for inspection, switch power off. When more than 10 minutes have elapsed, make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P-N of the inverter is S0VDC or less using a tester, etc. 5.3.2 Check items (4) Dai * Check the following: 1) Motor operation fault 2) improper installation environment 3) Cooling system fault 4) Unusual vibration and noise 5) Unusual overheating and discoloration * During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester. (2) Cleaning ‘Always run the inverter in a clean state, When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol Note: Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off. Do not use detergent or alcohol to clean the display and other sections of the operation panel (FR-DUO4) of parameter unit (FR-PU04) as these sections do not like them. tions 5.3.3 Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. For periodic inspection, ‘consult us, 4) Cooling system: « 2) Screws and bolts: = + Clean the air fiter, etc. + These parts may become loose due to vibration, temperature changes, etc. Check that they are tightened securely and retighten as necessary. 3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage 4) Insulation resistance: Measure, 5) Cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, relay: Check and change if necessary. 174ee ANON 5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger 1) Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external circuit, disconnect the cables {rom ail terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter. 2) For the continuity test of the contro! circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer, 3) For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.) 5.3.5 Pressure test Do not conduct a pressure test, The inverter's main circuit uses semiconductors, which may be deteriorated if a pressure test is made. Daily and Periodic Inspection ina fact Ingection ae reves |fzc" | oectn [Oa FREE] mae ertaron | Instant a creer etek aman "ete 50, | memo een temperature, humidity, | (Referto page 7) |non-freezing. hygrometer, Jenvironment| aust, dir, etc, | Ambient humidity: | recorder ot ses Lee pon coon. “eneral [Check for unusual | Visual and auditory [Overall unit | ipration and noise. Y checks. tone an pai power tess votage [ac vote fseey [ohaktatman chet | cceciverer’ —[auciawe (Tex data voltage otage '§ normal terminals R-S-T. (Refer to page te TER eae [8 irosemnsrar Jinan orm (osm momen Cates em |, es Nota ior ad iets ad gourd trina tae rose ene) [Swe tr oe ° Comoe so0voc das veneral ‘screws and bolts. V, Wand ground megger Grek or ove ° ‘eal a 7 fcteac pat meaae i (4) Clean. (2) Re-tighten. a (3) Visual check. Tica eas S[k eh hae Rea fernornn Senco cra case ° sree oasuge a TITS [eck damage ° Wawa [potoun 175Osea en Daily and Periodic Inspection ia fonot oper |™peston| — owseon [oa F-FRERHE | ato — | cron | Intent yar [years Simonet imerer om vere ad Irotie, _foteckresitance frets armn’ (See tefolvirg [Converter across terminals. © terminals R, 8,7, P, N pages) Analog teeter ee gv. WW feserangect ona Toe — |S (vat check (hoa ‘sage [Biteswevin (yest ormre atredtersstey | 0 Cavey, td capo smodting |” ve io and eapaty eoectr® | Se ree evnensve ° Main tlecrestac ‘rout capacity. Trek Sa ay cae TTR 7 sg opto Qvarcen [enor al (2) Check for rough ° uae cn conn vena torec Oar cae | oT resistor insulation. ‘Cement resistor, | (2) Error should be| (2) Check for open ° ‘wire-wound within £10% of Resistor cable. resistor. indicated ene Je Beceractore | onsane tniandmeccue | te inate Toe 3] ine ge [OTP cont vatagen Sees inet ||” pase aoe Se poe wth Saratomnas | rc win eons wa spare oan sven [ota cut [opwaion | ntpecerty JeSeminivey — | Soave, |intiae, frtes. lence” |e Ferom soqance ° cormcter (crater ye wet protective opanon ress wvte| cea bss | Catomate eet pracohe creat” | fsecunca, ronal a rece Sau rina td py Sra renee oon TO Ta aa OT ET cong verstn ano rane vaaion system [CAN Fan |) Check for loose ° (2) Retighten (2) No faut. camesiea Tiguan Cana — OT oro patsy | Sewn tarpeonparat_ | lame elt aiciesn o | lsat nn ay Shea tat eamgs |S ec eairg a aS roel fmonpena! [spt ant [Vota a | management ammeter, etc. vas (1) Check for unusual ° (1) Auditory, sensory, [(1), (2) No fault. brain oo. teva cac conoay {OCR umes” | Sood rinse ose caer are roel, Meter damage, etc. TR Sasa is | ANT rin | asec fondu. W resistance and ground including motor '500V meager ‘en oie Note: The value for the 400V class is indicated in the parentheses. 176een aS @ Checking the inverter and converter modules (1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R, S, T) and motor cables (U, V, W). (2) Prepare a tester. (Use 1009 range.) Change the polarity ofthe tester alternately atthe inverter terminals R, S, T, U, V, W, P and N, and check for continuity Note: 1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged 2. Atthe time of continuity, the measured value is several to several ten’s-of ohms depending on the module type, circuit tester type, ete. If all measured values are almost the same, the modules are without fault J = conte no Potanty_| Mesured Povarty_| Mensured ete BIS SP or PRP | teenie Tn | toninay ; a co AR Becta Epi paeonine | 5, Cs eatin i PLS] contin N[-S-| Bisco Te Pont TY comin 8] FET contry | °° [NT Bisco > ULF Biscniny UW Conta 3 TRY ea continaty | "4 nu icon 8 ce sei TL tiny : LWT conta NW Biscay 8 [rs LL connate TWD Tonia ele © [WT Continuity 2 Cn [wr I Discontinuity 177Sens 5.3.6 Replacement of parts The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices. ‘The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced performance or failure of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be changed periodically. (4) Cooling fan ‘The cooling fan cools heat-generating parts such as the main circuit semiconductor devices. The life of the cooling fan bearing is usually 10,000 to 35,000 hours. Hence, the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3 years if the inverter is run continuously. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the ‘cooling fan must be changed immediately. © Removal 1) Push the catches from above and remove the fan cover. 2) Disconnect the fan connectors. 3) Remove the fan. © Reinstallation 1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up. fran FRLASIOS 5 ? AIR FLOW 2) Reconnect the fan connectors, ‘When wiring, use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan. 3) Reinstall the fan cover. 178Reza ANON (2) Smoothing capacitors A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DG in the main circuit, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current, etc. When the inverter is operated in an ordinary, air- conditioned environment, change the capacitors about every 5 years. When 5 years have elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at least every year (less than six months if their lfe will be expired soon). Check the following: 1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion) 2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warping and extreme cracks) 3) Explosion-proof valve (for excessive valve expansion and operation) 4) Appearance, external cracks, discoloration, leakage. When the measured capacitance of the capacitor has reduced below 85% of the rating, change the capacitor. (3) Relays To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be changed according to the number of accumulative switching times (switching life). See the following table for the inverter parts replacement guide. Lamps and other shortife parts must also be changed during periodic inspection. Replacement Parts of the Inverter [Par Name: ‘Slandard Replacement interval Description ‘Cooling fan 210 3 years ‘Change (as required) ‘Smoothing capactor in main crcult Syears Change (es required) ‘Smoothing capactor on control board Syears ‘Change the board (as required) Relays —= (Change as required 5.3.7 Inverter replacement ‘The inverter can be changed with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the screws in the wiring cover of the inverter. 1) Remove the mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block, 2) With both hands, pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals. 3) When installing the terminal block to a new inverter, exercise care not to bend the pins of the control circuit terminal block connector. 179PROTECTIVE FUNCTION 5.3.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and power @ Measurement of voltages and currents ‘Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and circuits measured. ‘When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits Using the instruments given on the next page. lopatcet spa votane ton tt ot CF ££ 6 A Ew 6 tt Typical Measuring Points and Instruments 180PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: Measuring Points and Instruments em leasuring Poi jeasuring Instrument Sana c 7 stalls = ing Instr * (Reference Measured Value) * Conroe Pomerssephvotagevs | AcoseRS.S-TandT-R | Movingion ype AC wotnetr | Win’ garner AC. vlape fuuatee Powe supp ile Ts and Tine curents Moving ype AC ammeter Foner spy Saar | NR Sand aniacow RS, | Ebcconana pe seat P=Was Wa a Stunir soso nam (votre) a Power supply side power Bs een emacs ermrmmeg Ee nae ee an ann GTaa Rector yp A waa ovcseawonoeve [aman vnmenn [Rebs me Ae ane | nae re Gre ORT Das OSS saci Yuverdwiee ames | Mosaxngpe scanner | tania eer cone Cutout ae mt Saat " (Note 3) Difference between phases is 10% Bevin We outta perez | MUWandWandacoes Uv | tcosmaric yp snes | Ot td or tinge et ks aa mara Fe as PT TO a i pvt | IDE ST TT HT Bs ee BORER aS Uovngcoi ype toushas | nase eee ae tester) ‘Max. 380V (760V) during reer spot RSET ERRNO Frenueey etn sal [Asie Te Doses], feats #20TADS : oar wing por PAsose 10-6 Si Pe san feat SE on BIDS a feueay (na teeny me Toow ‘Across FM (+) ~SD ‘Moving-coil type (Tester, etc, & ay oa ira 7 é requency ia ‘resistance: 50kQ or larger) Pulse width T1: & ‘das Prooo | paseo Tasers |B (vats tens | 8 monitoring only) ° apoC TONE a ao rss A )-8 fueny fou Tener i Sa Tae SR RAR Sed Sgr! Joe Ad, sT6P.05 01-6 2030906 vhen en fees Ree RES = En voage ares Sao Seas WS SD iy Se OT sam son cose A Moving citys oe Monee (bones ey haces: Sy cep SEES Soma” Son Note 1. Accurate data wil not be obtained by a tester. 2. When Pr. 195A, B, C terminal function selection” seting is postive loci, 3. When the canir frequency exceeds SkHz, do not use the insttument because overcurrent losses occuring in the metalic pats inside the instrument will increase and may lea to burnout In this case, use an approximate effective value type instrument * Values in parentheses indicate those for 400V class. 181MEMOCHAPTER 6 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter provides the "specifications" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment. 6.1 Standard Specifications: +++ +++++++reser sree 182 CHAPTER 1 | OUTLINE CHAPTER 2 | INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 3 | OPERATION CHAPTER 4 | PARAMETERS CHAPTER 5 | PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS cHapTer 6 (RR Se eG CHAPTER 7 | OPTIONS APPENDICES6.1 Standard Specifications ReSaeees 6.1.1 Model specifications © 200V class Two FRASODOK [os [oe is [ azar [es [s[ uN] el ws| el w]e] w]e Fppicable motor Apts oes) _| 04 [o75| 15 | 22 | a7 | 5s | 75] 14 | 19 [se] 2 | 20 | av | a8 | os fategcasciy WAT; | 49 [a1 | a2 [ar |ea [x20] ms|ma| [=| «| |e | @ Rated een) [3 [S| sli iimelm || @ |e | re | |e] | 8] 25 ‘Overload capaci B lnees) 150% 60 seo, 200% 0.5 see (nverse-tme characterises) 3 Thies phase, 200VTo & | Votage (Note 4) “Te phase, 200V to 20V SoHz, 200 to 240V 60H 220V sole, 200 to 230 ot Regen- | Max see see apes | Meee | cox 100% 5 20% (Note 8) braking | Permissh - feel cana 3KED 2D Continuous (Note 8) Tape “Thves phase, 200V Rata ps A “Thee phase, 200V 0 220V So, 20 240 eo ov athe, __ | vote, frequency 200 to 230V 60H. | Pemisstie ac 170 to 242V SO, 17010 reo 4170 to 242V 60H, 170 to 264V 60H ae 3| Permissive 5 Power supply system ecapacty 15 | 28] 45| 558] 9 | 12] 17 | 20 | 20 | a4 | at | 52 | oo | 80 | 100 (VA) (Note 6) Protective structure (e130) Erode (20 NEMA’) Open 9 (OO) ‘oaing system Baa Forced air cooling ‘Aprox want a) wi 29 | 25 | 38 | 35 | 35 | 60 | 60 | a0 | 130] 120] 130] 200] 400] 400] 55.0 Note: 1. 2 ‘The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and ‘AA0V for 400V class. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter’s rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage. ‘The torque indicated is the average value for deceleration from 60Hz to a stop and varies with motor loss. ‘The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) 182SPECIFICATIONS: @ 400V class Type RAMOOK [oa [OTIS Se ST Se ST ees eT wT TT eT eS Roptcable motor Faptestomcia | [04 [ors| 1s | 22 | a7 | ss | zs | 1 | 15 [ves] 2 | m0 | or | as | os Rated capacy VAY foes 1 fre] 2 [42 [eof os | wm fars| ase] 20 [s28[aaa| on | os | oo Raiedomemay [isl asta be tsletrtataete ete pape ti ‘Ovetondeapacty ove 150% 60 a0, 200% 0.5 se (verso characteris) Votage (ois Tio pave, S00 fo 400V Soa Rogen] Moz : erative | valuestime nee braking [Permissi torque _| be cu Rated put AC Seta, reson Permisabie AC ‘olagefutuaton Permissbie frequoneyfctation Power spy Sooneaeciy | 15 as] as [ss] 9 | 12 | a7 | 20 | 2] 24 | a1 | 52 | 6 | 90 | 100 Way ole) Perce Enclosed ype (P20 NEMA) ‘pen type (POD) Cooling system Saksoing Fort a ag Arpox.wooht Gah Ta [as | 95 | a8 | a8 | 00 | 60 [190 | 00] 130] 120] 40] 950] a50 [0 ‘Output a 20% (Note 5) 2%ED Continuous (Note 5) ‘Three phase, 280V to 480V SOHzI60H 323 to 528V S0H2/60Hz 15% Power supply Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used. 2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class, 3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. 4, The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage, The maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage. 5, The torque indicated is the average value for deceleration from 60Hz to a stop and varies with motor loss. 6. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). 183aCTaNIONS 6.1.2 Common specifications ‘Soi PWINN conianigh carer Fequency PWA contol (VIF Conlal or Control systern ‘advanced magnetic fux vetor contol can be selected) Cagle [trea tre Sion oes oa & | resolution Digital input | 0.01Hz_ i Titi Oo maar al aapeay OETA aan wn COT g | Freauency ad output frequency for digital input % | Votopertequency Base frequency set as required balwean 0 and A0OHE. Constant largue of varable Tome 2 | characteristic pattern can be selected. & [Staring torque 500k: ALO Hz (for advanced magnetic fax vector contro. 3 [rommsont ita ae be FS amram | PSS ean me So DOO RIA ToT tenn astern nae cnee tase Sean Seen eect Bi Sat oetioees ena aia PES ea revern ee | operate caret el can be et (01 200% ara) presence aeons canbe sence Tray [De HBE Te HES OE STDE, SAAD Frequency Spt BC or 12.08 bray weg operate pal or pronwor uk Sstngacna!| oot | S408 2CD or 2. ray ng ee Taaapseumwsion” OD 8 00 Cans WISN (EE aT CT veh Oa TOF, GE habs chanel sy cpa ba BU GRLOLOAPR DN) _ | Sanaa 3 0 980 wc uy tre tent scram and conn : ar becet nokta 2 | soe 2. [dog operation selection | Provided with og operation mode select terminal (Note 1) a | © [aibetipar cotton putt tomes anti agat ti SOmiDe (onan oa 3 ‘Output stop Instantaneous shut-off of Inverter output (frequency. voltage) : Sree ecnrs pais nove ta ope, cia Dama ay Fp i sano raat oratan Sait mtoeah bat ponieener nama poe ‘Operation functions failure, commercial power supply Inverter switchover operation, foward/reverse rotation prevention, sip compensation, operation mode selection, offine auto tuning function, online auto tuning function, PID contol, programmed operation, computer link operation (RS-A85) ' different signals can be selected from inverter running, upto frequency, instantaneous power failure (undervoltage), frequency detection, second frequency detection, third frequency etection, during program mode operation, during PU operation, overload alarm, regenerative Operating status brake pre-alarm, electronic overcurrent protection pre-alarm, zero current detection, output current detection, PID lower limi, PID upper limit, PID forwardireverse rotation, commercial ower supplyinverter switch-over MC1, 2, 3, operation ready, brake release request, fan fault ‘and fin overheat pre-alarm minor faut. Open eolector output Conlact output. change-over contact (230VAC 0.34, 30VDC 03a) Open collector. alarm code (4 bit) output 1 signal can be selected from output frequency, motor curent (steady or peak valve), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, motor torque, converter output voltage (steady oF For meter peak value), regenerative brake duty, electronic overcurrent protection load factor, input power, ‘utput power, load meter, and motor exciting current. Pulse train output (1440 pulses/sec/ull scale) and analog output (0 to 10VDC), ‘Selection can be made fom output frequency, motor current (steady or peak valve), output operating | YA equency setting, running speed, motor torque, overoad, converter output voltage purrouos | ste"? | (stea0y orpeak value), electronic overcurrent protection lod factr, input power, Utbut power load meter, motor exciting current, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, wat- GD hour meter, regenerative brake duly and motor load factor. “Ria [Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. @ alarm definitions are sored, defisiion__| (Four alarm defntions are ony csplayed on the operation panel ‘Operating | Input terminal signal states, output terminal signal sates, option fing status, terminal ‘Alarm (inverter tip) Output signals Additional | status —_| assignment status. asplayon | Fala ‘Output voltage/currertifequencyloumulalive energization time paarce unt | tniton | imadately bolo pace unten activate oy Tac | operon gue ond eestota by lp neton 184Zac meen Gvercurent shut-off (Guring acceleration, deceleration, constant peed), reganerative overvokage shutof, undervltage, Instantaneous power faure, overioad shutoff (electronic Protectivefalarm functions overcurrent protection), brake transistor alarm(Note 2), ground faut current, output shor circu, main circult device overheat, stall prevention, overload alarm, brake resistor overheat protection, {in overheat, fan fault, option faut, parameter error, PU disconnection z 10°C to 50°C (non-reezing) (10% to H40°C when tho dit protection Srucure alacant = | Antienttomperture ence © export ramiay SORA or as (on condanag] 8 [Storge omparanre®——[-20-0 6 50 & [ambence Theos. (No crisis ad Farimabie gases oi mist, dsl and it) Aikido, virion ax. 1000m above sa level, 5 rvs (0.60) or lss (Conforms to SCOOT ‘Note: 1. Jog operation may also be performed from the operation panel or parameter unit. 2. Not provided for the FR-A520-11K to 55K and FR-AS40-11K to 55K which do not have a built-in brake circuit 3. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc. 185Sse} 6.1.3. Outline drawings @ FR-A520-0.4K, 0.75K yee © 200V class He invertor fype_[ DH j FRAS200.4K | 110 zi Ly Wal |g ill #4 jt 8 stim we ise) Ho a O_O} amu —ts GRRRPAL 5 (Unit : mm) @ FR-A520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K @ FR-A540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K ss 20st rT | & zl ke Fle | Satie as | Note: FR-AS40-0.4K to 1.5K are not provided C00 with the cooling fan. o00 (Unit : mm) 186@ FR-A520-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K @ FR-AS40-5.5K, 7.5K «2-4 was avon @ 200V class ] Jnverter Type | _H HT D Dt FRAG20-6 5K | 260 | 245] 770] B65 FRas207 sk | 260 | 245_| 170] 885 FRASzO-IK | 900] 205 190 [101.5 7 4 © 400V class inverter Type [A [at [ 6 [09 Fass 5K | 260| 245 | 170 | 365 FRAsoTsKT 260 | 245 1170] 68.5 —a (Unit : mm) @ FR-A520-15K, 18.5K, 22K © FR-AS40-11K, 15K, 18.5K, 22K (Unit : mm)Za e ONS © FR-A520-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K © FR-A540-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K @ 200V class Tnetertpe| Wl witwil apm]. [om] FRASZO3OK [240 | 270 | 320 | G50 | 500 | 198] 71.5 | 10 FR-A52037K | 450 | 380 | 430 | $60 | 55 | 250 f 154 | 12 FRASZ0-45K | 450 | 960 | 430 | 650 | 525 | 250 | 154 | 12, FRASZOS5K | 400 | 410 | 460 | roo | 675 | 250 | 154 | 12 @ 400V class Tweets | Wlwilwil atm]. | om] ¢ FRASAOSOK | 340 | 270 | 320 | 650 | 530] 108 [71.5 [10 FRASA37K | 450 | 300 | 430 | 860 | 525 | 250 | 154 | 12 FRASAO-45K_|_450 | 260 | 430 | 560 | 605 | 250 [ta [12 FR-AS40-55K | ~460_| 380 | 430 | 660 | 525 | 250 | 154 12 (Unit: mm) 188© Operation panel (FR-DU04) (Unit: mm) @ Parameter unit (FR-PU04) (Unit: mm) 189MEMOCHAPTER 7 OPTIONS This chapter describes the "options" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment. TA Option List s++++++ee eee eeeeeeee teense ee ee CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 3 OPERATION CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 6 ‘SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER T APPENDICES7.1 Option List 7.1.1 Stand-alone options name ee Depletion Spctctons, te aaa Farmar Tita para nk ang LCD dla Japan (8 languages) coe English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish and Finnish) _| Common to Poa simodts Parameter unk | emcaaca | cable or comeaton fhe operation parlor aa unt ener ead 5 pac ly i ea geneiing selene meters | TERRE Heatarkousie | | erascnc | back ate cn box aezang 6 {PcWes 07 wb aaa son aes ie Ditgrteten 2 tating hi op, the vere mess way enced , Siugue afachment | FRASCVO | ra tone (Pal) secortna to Conduit connection pons Ss ent con rasenccs | used conect a cond ety naan ronment capacity ‘noumnpaibmy Tang pie wee ora ag von ooo ropa ee canrchg UreASATOSu bo tasos so saoay Bie Beare ooo convablenave nr | Se00 Niele confming the EMC Decne (5081-2) scx fo ae canal Htorauy bare | PRABR-ONGE | Usdio mpov ebay capably oft barabunin he | UAKOTRK resistor {Note 1) inverter eee capuly oro ne FRASF-HOO ‘Suppresses surge voltages onthe inverter output sce. according to resin tat seas Power tacor merovng | FRAELHOO | Usedtoimprov the veer put power aor (ren power tactor | 4K 10 SEK OG reactor (ote) bout 95%) end cooperate ih the power supply seeing ower fcr mpovna | FLGAL-tHEE | Usedio npove te hvor apa pve fcr oratpowertoaa | 22 SR AC reactor (Note 1) about 90%) and cooperate with the power supply, capacity 7 ee a cameo rraarol aria rele recon pp weal capa TS Tr | CONOR Line nl fer iss Fa Fer i a Guaeun U-e00TS TER | Used tree Bang PY va vsctoro | petatosd or nga ns) orate nt FRBU-TER® SER yea io improve the tating capa fe nvre or Mah iets oe or eguined) Ure the kau ad eit ont Resistor unit FREER-T5K t0 5K, | together. ‘According to akon Acari Power return converter | FCRC-15K to 85K, | High-function brake unit which can return motor-generated braking " Historia | energy othe power supa Woh gertcor river scisax | ehenroe at constr audios te Snare Toner eae ees harmonics considerably, (Used with the standard accessories.) ; rine parton ih faniony neler onary eS eae come ce potentiometer and start switch, en ej operator a earl Sls (TS BVO, OTS TOVECY cea ae Liidied (1VA) (Note 2) Common to ise seed solar | FRAT ore speed igh mln suching option, (LAVA sn mecel : Cee ottzed sped ster | FRLFK Fore aa FEF oti oa AG a Sao a VA 190Cai ‘Nome ‘Type Application, Specifications, otc. re es faeP Fa ory ai oa Te a Ta PETG PT Taster contoler | FRFS Fox paral operation of several (up 1035) verre (OVA) For soft sart and stp. Allows parallel operation and Sof stanter PREC aczelrationecsleration. (2VA) ps For synchronous operation. Used wih a devaton sensor and Deviation detector | FRFD ary Preanpifer FREA Can be used as AIV conversion or operational amir. GVA) Bot generator ‘QVAHLTO Fo olow-up operation. 7OIS5VAC SOO at 2500/p). Common to one ' For syncironaus operation (mechanical deviation detecion) attmodels Deviat YWEC-S0OWNS | output SOVAGIBO® Frequency eeting : 1 frequency sting, Wie-wound ype chara are Wazwaotka For frequency seting. Wie-wound type, 2W1KA B characteristic Freqwncymter | wizoriaina | Dede Feuer topo TORE a) ong S asererer neste) 20 en eee aia Tver setup sofware | FRRSWOSETUB.WI | Supports steps For verter sartup te mainienance Note: 1. "H’ in the type code indicates 400V class. Power supply specifications of FR series controllers and setters: 200VAC 50H2, 200V/220VAG 60Hz, 115VAC 60Hz, 2. Rated power consumption 3. The intercompatibilty attachment (FR-ASATOID) is required to mount the inverter, with the exception of some models. 1917.1.2 Inboard dedicated options Bi Inboard options Name on Function inp wire ved to wate vere Hequency accurately Wag @nerhal Sigh BOD oF tabidigtainot | eRasax |” 12a binory-coded dial signal. + Gains and ots can also be adjusted Dana aap Among 26 standard output signals ofthe var, is option opus ny 7 aleced gnals ffomopencoletor oupu ional a Tea | FRASAY [Outputs extra 1 signals which canbe mantored on he Fan AM tomas such a8 eo output requncy. + 20mADG or SV fOVJDC mater canbe connected. moa "Tamora 28 standard output signals ofthe verter, is pion pts ay 3 aleced Sana pee eae from relay contact output terminals. Used witha poston deleclor (ee encada raaled ana acina too apna asap he spin in poaton(orenaton conto). ee + The motor ened is detected by the pulse encoder and this detection signals fed back Oration f the invertor fo autaratealycornpencate for speed variation. Hence the motor speed can tput (Note 2) a be kept constant if load variation occurs. + Tho current spindle poson and actual motor speed canbe montred on the operation panel or parameter un Fue ta nok [A pulse an signal ean be used ase i spend command he ves ~Opaationmenterngfbarartor change ofthe inverter canbe performed under the Cantor Computerink | FR-AswR |" cla user program fem a computor, eg personal computer or FA contol, connected by 5 communiaton cable @ | Profibus DP FRASNP | * Opsrationimentoringtperametar ‘change of the inverter can be performed from a computer 2 [ooconam | rmaewp |” OPsaln/nontonclparameter ange ofthe iwerer canbe pavomned fom a Sompur E orPl. 5 | cerinc ots 37 FRASNK |” Operaton/nentonnafparameter cargo of the ivoTor can bo peromed fom a PLC Tana Pia | Fras)" Sbeaoniontooparotr cane Freer canbe paored fom a cone Note: 1. Three inboard options may be mounted at the same time (the number of the same options mountable is only one, and only one of the communication options may be mounted.) 2, CC-Link stands for Control & Communication Link, 3. The FR-ASAX (12-bit digital input) is required for orientation control 192APPENDICES This chapter provides the "appendices" for use of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment. Appendix 1 Data Code List +++ +++#+++sseeeeeereeeee 193 Appendix 2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use------ 198 CHAPTER 1 } OUTLINE CHAPTER 2 | INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 3 | OPERATION CHAPTER 4 | PARAMETERS CHAPTER 5 | PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 6 | SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 7 | OPTIONS aa aidAPPENDICES Appendix 1 Data Code List Data Codes ton’ | ‘Number Name Road) wane | Unk Paraniotr Eonaton Setting (Data code 7) | Tague boat @ 5 . +] sium fester at at o ¢ (C2 Tier terpenay a2 a ¢ § 3 | Base frequency 08 od 0 fe ee ee ae fi 2 [5 [lated sting imi speed) a5 a5 0 @ [8 [tats sting dow sped) 06 28 o o 7 ‘Acceleration time 7 7 o 3 Dsosleraton tine 08 a8 3 | Betis tena’ G7 28 28 3 10] 6 ijecton rake operation equa oA mn 0 11] Be iecton brake operation tine 8 8 3 12] BC ijeston brake vlog oc 20 a 73 Stang Feuer oD 0 3 4 [Load pator stsion oe BE o Te [seg fequeney oF oF 3 18 | Jog acsleralonidocolraon Te 10 30 0 77 [WS ut slcion 0 at 3 48 | igh speed maximuri Reaian 12 a2 3 2 [ieee egueeyvatage 3 33 3 4 [20 [cesteratontdeotraton rere fequerey [14 oe a 2 [21 acesorontdsoseraton tne netemers 5 a a = [22 [iat prevention operation ive 16 6 3 3 [2 —T sia prevonionopraton ove dauie speea | —ir sr 3 & 24 | Mul-speed setting (speed 4) 18 38 0 & [25 [Wlteseedssling peed) 9 a 3 & [25 | itsped sting peas 6) rN 3k 3 2 [arf it speedseting peed 1 3 3B 3 & [se | tspeed input compensatn ie sc 3 28 | Accoleraon!eceeraton palo 10 a 3 30 —[ Regenerative freon selecion 7 se 3 3 Fresuency umn 14 iF oF 3 32 [ Freqsney juno 18 20 oo 3 33 [ Freuency ump 28 Fa Ai 3 30 [Freaueney amo 28 Zz a 3 35 [Freeney ump 38 2 A 3 36 Frewency ump 38 3 ma 3 37 | Speed dpa 35 2S a 2 Lt bertotequene snetity 29 28 @ #2) [2 [outputreavene acon za LAA Q 882 [20 | out teauency detecionorroverseoaton | 28 | AB a 2 [st Seed nea osecotraton te on 3 8 [2 [eeond declan time 2 [AD 3 8 [ae [second tere boost 3E | aE 3 5 [47 [Second VF (ase reauen aF ar 3 2 [ae [second sal preverton operalon cure 20 80 3 8 [so [Seeond sal prevention operaion frequen. a i 3 eo 50. ‘Second output frequency detection. 32. Bz, 0 EE DUPU main dspiay daa selection a Bt 3 53 PU vel depay data selection 35 35 3 54 Feria finn selection 36 a6 3 35] Freauency montoring reference a7 Br 3 36 | Curent montoxng reference 36 Be 2 57__| Automat reta fnctons 298 29 0 30 | Restart coasting ime A BA 0 193Vina eas Fune- | Parameter : Data Codes, z jae Link Parameter Exonsion tion_| Number ood [ite | Hem poem xtenal 2 |e | remote soting int selection 28 ee ° 35 Go| ligt ee sleaion 3 a a Gi | Reference curent 30 ab 0 62 Reference curent fr acaraton 3 BE 0 63 Reference curent or deceleration oF Eg ° Gi Staring quency for elevator meds a0 co ° G5_—[ Ret slecion at or 3 Sal reverionopraion evel edueion 68 | stantng frequency ea ic 2 7 [Number of ties Aslan Scio a os a 68 Ret wang tine i ot 3 66 Ret count delay esis # cs 3 70 [Special regeneraive brake diy 4 oe 3 7 [Aaed motor a7 cr 3 72 PWM reuency scion a8 oe 3 73 OVA seedon rn co 0 74 iter tre constant th cA 3 Rese selectonldiconneded PU deeclonPO a stop selection bi CJ ° 7e_—| Nr coe oa slocion x oa a 77 —| Parameter ure disable slo a0 | “one 0 7_—[ Reverse oon preverton selecion aE cE 3 73 —| Operation mode selecton af [nena 0 —[Wetor capac Ea 0 0 at [Numer of motarsaae Fa Df 3 2—[ Motor eeing cet 2 bz 3 33_—[ Rated moor votage = D3 3 2 [eT rata motor gen se be a 8 [eT speed contol gain 28 oe a [so Titer constant) EN DA 0 5 [ct | Motorconstant 2) 8 OB 0 2 [a2 [ Motor constant) sc 06: 0 3 [Wotor constant 2 30 3D. 0 2 Wotor enstant 6 se DE . 35 | Onlne avi tuning slesion =F oF 3 36 [Ao ting sating/stalus a a o 700 [ViFt tit reqvoncy 0 0 1 TO VFI (ist feauaney ola oF at 7 & [oie esona regu 2 a i 2.2 [tes [er escondrecveney aRaae) 3 a3 1 2 © [toe [3 ed reaueney I ae H 2 3 [ios [ies ered requeney voraae) 05 ra 7 & § [tos [irs uth requ a5 35 7 88 [orf verona agg) ae | 108 | Wis th requeney oe mn i 108 | WS th requeny aagay 8 a i 110_—| Third scceleranldecleaton Te om aA i 2 [tT deceleration ime 8 28 i 3 [ite Pe ore Bost a6 ac i a 113_| Third VIF (base frequen 00 30 i = [The sta preventon operation cae 0 ae i - 15 “Third stall prevention operation frequen OF oF 1 416] Tied ouput equency delecion 0 0 1 194Cie ersS sass ion | Number Name = i Link Parameter Extension = a eee Ld Setting (Data code 7F) Reg eee poe : 2S [2 homber of conmuntstion otis 75 None fl DE ee oes : 5° eee —— i 2. [30 rio epee 7 oe I 8 131 ‘Upper limit, 1F oF 1 ieee EES 2 pee e4=8 ! g 5 18 sequence output terminal selection 7 aS 7 ae 8 736 __| MC switch-over interlock time 2 mw 7 age 137] Start waiting time 25 AS + [alco |e | 1 ga ‘Automatic inverter-commercial ° 198 _switch-over frequency ar Ay 4 ee gies [| ; $ [[ tat J eaatiash acceleration stopping time 23 2) 7 3 142 __ | Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 28 AN 1 pa ee ss ose sr a fce ; | Saeco ceroe 2-8 i g 154 | prevention operation 8 8 ‘ ht 158 ‘AMM terminal function selection 3A, BA 1 23 | 150. | usergroup rood cotection 00 80 2 a © § S| ies [riat cation tne treo w w z 242 7164 __| First cushion voltage for restart oF 4 2 a 165 __ | Restart stall prevention operation lovel 8 2 ay io | masa a ad : By BS 174 User group 1 deletion 0 BE 2 3 3 175 __| User group 2 registration OF ar 2 195Fune- Parameter Data Codes mc | Perinat Name 7 waa | Link PararterExtonston we eae 7 eee Waite Setting (Data code 7F) 7a0__| RL rnd Graton sedion % 3 z 2 (CsI [Riera inton steeton ri % z 8 [iar rateminalfnetionselecion is 6 z 2 183 | RT teminal function selection 77 7 2 2 [is [Av teminl uncon section a 36 2 2 185, ‘JOG terminal function selection, 49 EJ 2 © [ee [6s tena funtion slecion a 3A 2 [150 [RUN termina funtion siecion 7 ae z © [ter Tsu teins funation selection iF oF 2 gz 192) IPF terminal function selection. 20 AO 2 [iss [ot termine fonction stecton zi a 3 2 [joe] Fu termina neon selection 2 a z 125 [ABC leminal incon select 2 ma 2 109 | Users nia vate sting a "7 2 Beagraed operon iTasocana 200 | Sotecion a = 1 351 | Progam satiagt 5 30 z 262 [ Program sang" Fa BE i 303 | Program sang F oF i 304 | Progam sating a cf i 305 —| Program sting a cf 7 208 Progra seting ae @ i 207 | Progr sting | ra co x 208 | Program sting a co i [200 Presa sing ra cs i 210 | Program seting + ra a 3 2it | Proram soting? ri cr 4 & 212__| Program setting 2 nH oe 7 § [as [ rogram eting #8 co 1 8 [ne Prcgram sting aK cK i 3 215 Program setting 2 48 cB a © [oxte [Program seung 2 ac ce H 5S [Coo Program seting 2 za) oo i 8 [oxte[Proaam seting 2 ae CE ‘ i 219 ‘Program setting 2 4F CF 1 20 | Program satin? 30 0 i Zi | Program seting > a oF 4 222 Program setting 3 32 ‘D2 1 223, Progeam setting 3 53 03, 1 224 | Program seting 3 S| be i 225 [ Froyram seting 3. % 5 4 [7226 Prosram seting 3 6 06 i 221 [ Brosram sang > 7 oF 1 328| Program sting 3 Ey be 3 323 | Program sting 3 32 8 i $30 | Program seting > pales oA 1 251 [Timer seting 8 3B. “ 2 | Mut-specd sang lapeed@) 8 7 z 35. Muf-seod seting (so00d 9) A A a Bg [est] Mutispoed sting sed 1) 2A ak 2 2.8 | “dis | Mut-soeed song (speed 1) 28 a8 2 2 § [ass | wtcpoed sting Goeed 12) 26 aC 2 2 8 [357 mcs sting peed 19) 35 [AD i 33a | Mu-speed stig (epeed 1. 3E AE 2 | Mul-sposd song (apeed 13) 2 a z 196Data Codes Func- | Parameter Name Link Parameter Extonsion tion | Number = to i este | ace Setting (Data code 7F) 2a SoR PINT seting wo 30 2 9 8 (24 [oolig fan operafon slecion 34 Be 2 3 | 250 | stop selection aA BA 2 751 | Power falure stop selection B ca z g 2 [762 | subiracos requoncy at decoiration am 8 oo 2 23 [263 | Subtraction staring frequeng a7 or z © 5 [354 [Power faiure deceleration time 28 ay z 35 [ass | Powrfaure decieaton ta 2 wo (ol 2 ae Power-faiure deceleration ime swiah over 286 ay “A ca 2 58 ‘Stop-on-contactoad torque high-speed a} 3 juency control selection a i 7 ag ‘requency control select en [271_| Hi-speed setting maximum current « oF 2 a SB |__272 | Ma-speed seting minimum curent 6 Bo 2 2 [273 | curent averaging range a ot z ES [274 | Curent averaging titer constant 8 2 2 Se | zs | Sepen-ontactexcing eirent Twapwed | gy 0 3 83 rulipiying factor &B | 276 _ | stop-on-contact PWM cartier frequency 54 Dé 2 — is | Brave oporing reaver % De. z 8 279 | Brake opening current 37 or 2 § » [280 [Brake opening curentdetaaion tine 38 co 2 23 [251 | Brake operation ime at start 39 Bs 2 33 [2a [rake operation frequency 5A DA 2 22 [7255 [ Brake operation time at sop Es DB 2 & 284 | Deceleraton detection function selection 5c oc 2 285 | Overspeed detection fequency 50. D0 2 200 [FA terminal calibration 5. oc i . 01 AM terminal eatbration 50. 00 . g £02 | Frequency sofing votage Das SE. BE 1 58 [203 | Frequency soting votage gain 3 OF 1. 3 304 | Frequency seting current bias 60. 0 1 305 | Frequency setng current gain oI Et + Buzzer control BA DA a ‘Second poramater avich aver 5 EC = — | Bq | Running tequency (RAM) 60 =o = 32 a8 2 — | B | running tequency (€*ROM) 6e ee = = onior € =i = (=) 2 5 [Output curentmonter 70 i = =—] 2 § [output vottage mentor 71 = =] FE [Soeciai montor a = = Special monitor seledion No, rz 7 = — ost recent Ho, Ne lam aay [74 ra = 23 [sear =] § S [Moston no Nea = = =] £3 [Most recent No, 5,No-6 7 = = = Most recent No. 7.No 8 7 = = = [verter status monforun command Th Fa = = [Operation mode acquisition 78 FS = = [Alldear = FG = = [inverter sat = FD. = [ink parameter extension seing TF FF 7 197“APPENDICES: Appendix 2 List of Parameters Classified by Purposes of Use Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates purposes of use and parameters. (For full information on the parameters, Refer to Chapter 4.) Parameter Numbers ceteeeuane Parameter numbers which must be set Fajustment of acceloration/deceleration time and pattern | Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 24 Motor overheat protection Pro ‘Selection of optimum output characteristic for load aa —| characteristic. Limit of output frequency Prt, Pr. 2, Pr. 18 Operation over 60Hz Pr. 803, Pr. 905 “Adjustment of frequency setting signal and output Pr. 73, Pr, 902, Pr. 903, Pr. 904, Pr. 905. Calibration of frequency meter Pr 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 900, ‘Adjustment of digtal frequency meter Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 66, Pr. 200 ‘Adjustment of motor output torque Pr. 0, Pr. 80. Pr. 61 - Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr 24, Pr. 26, Pr. 26, Pr. 27, Pr. 232, Pr ition omeen 234, Pr. 235, Pr. 236, Pr. 297, Pr. 238, Pr. 239 Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16 Frequency jump operation. Pr. 31, Pr. 32, Pr. 33, Pr. 34, Pr. 35, Pr 96 Reversible operation according to analog signal polarity | Pr. 26, Pr. 73 ‘Automatic restart after instantaneous power falure Pr. 67, Pr.58 ‘Adjustment of brake operation Pr. 10, Pr. 14, Pr 12 “Timing of magnetic brake operation Pr. 42. Display of speed, etc. Pr. 37, Pr, 62, Pr, 83 7 Function rewite prevention Pr. 77 Reverse rotation prevention, Pr. 78 Optimum acceleraionldeceloration within continuous | p,q rating range Energy-saving operation Pr. 60 ‘Automatic restart after alarm stop Pr. 65, Pr. 67, Pr. 68, Pr. 68 Pr. 0, Pr.3,Pr. 7, Pr 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr 46, Pr. 47, Pr. 110, ‘Sub-motor operation Deine aTS "To make desired output characteristics (VIF pattem) | Pr. 100 to Pr. 108 Operation via communication with personal computer_| Pr. 117 to Pr. 124 ‘Operation under PID control Pr, 128 t0 Pr. 124 To perform commercial power suppiyinventer switch | o- 436 1 pr. 139 ‘over operation "To make backlash compensation Pr 140 to Pr 143 "To detect current Pr, 160 t0 Pr. 153 “Assignment of input terminal functions, Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 ‘Assignment of output terminal functions Pr, 19010 Pr. 198 To suppress noise Pr. 72, Pr. 240 ‘To group parameters Pr, 160,Pr. 17510 Pr. 176 To set iil values for parameters Pr. 199, Clearing of inverters actual operation time Pri? High-speed frequency control operation, Pr, 271 Pr. 274 “To exercise stop-on-contact control Pr. 276, Pr. 276 To increase cooling fan life Pr. 244 | To decelerate inverter to a slop at power failure Pr. 261 to Pr, 206, "Advanced magnetic fix vector control operation Pr. 80, Pr. Bt Programmed operation Pr, 200 to Pr. 231 ‘Selection of key beep Pr. 880 ~ 198MEMO